Service Manual & User Guide

CPU-NXT, CPU-NXT2, CPU-NXT3, CPU-3.2X

Operating System (OS)

24/7 Product Support Group: 1.866.967.4457 - [email protected] or

+34 93 594 87 20 - [email protected]

WMS Gaming, Inc. • 800 S. Northpoint Boulevard • Waukegan, IL 60085

16-020832
January 2015
 Table of Contents

About this  Documentation Copyright.................................................................. A-1

Guide  Game Copyright, Trademark, and Patent Laws ............................... A-1
 Check Local Laws............................................................................... A-1
 CE Marking .......................................................................................... A-1
 Support Information ........................................................................... A-1
 Conventions ........................................................................................ A-2
Text Conventions ......................................................................................A-2
Safety Symbols and Information ...............................................................A-2
 Preventing Injury and Damage .......................................................... A-3
Preventing Shock......................................................................................A-3
Preventing ESD ........................................................................................A-3
Replacing/Repairing AC Line Cord ...........................................................A-3
Properly Secure and Vent All Equipment ..................................................A-3
 AMD End User License Agreement...................................................A-4

Chapter 1  Table of Contents.................................................................................1-1

Introduction  Overview...............................................................................................1-2
and CPU OS Version................................................................................................1-2
Features New Features and Enhancements............................................................1-2
CPU, BIOS, RAM Clear, RAM Dump, and OS Compatibility ....................1-3
Reference Documentation ........................................................................1-3
CompactFlash® Card Handling Guidelines ..............................................1-5
 CPU Boards..........................................................................................1-5
 Primary Amplifier .................................................................................1-8
 Hardware Key Introduction .................................................................1-8
Obtaining the Hardware Key.....................................................................1-8
Hardware Key Installation Location ..........................................................1-8
 Administration Menus .........................................................................1-9
DIAGNOSTIC Button ................................................................................1-9
Blade s23 DIAGNOSTIC Button Location...................................................... 1-9
Blade DIAGNOSTIC Button Location............................................................. 1-9
GameField xD DIAGNOSTIC Button Location ............................................. 1-10
BBxD DIAGNOSTIC Button Location........................................................... 1-10
BB2 DIAGNOSTIC Button Locations ........................................................... 1-11
BBU and BBS DIAGNOSTIC Button Locations ........................................... 1-11
Attendant Key Locations .........................................................................1-12
 Attendant Navigation.........................................................................1-14
Fields ......................................................................................................1-14
Messages................................................................................................1-14
Field Features .........................................................................................1-14
Numeric Keypad .....................................................................................1-15

January 2015
16-020832
 2 Table of Contents:

Chapter 2  Table of Contents ......................................................................................2-1

Software  Introduction to the RAM Clear Process ..................................................2-4
Installation When to Perform a RAM Clear ....................................................................... 2-4
RAM Clear Compatibility Table ....................................................................... 2-5
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure .................................................2-5
Tools Required................................................................................................ 2-5
Removing Protective Pull-Tabs from Batteries................................................ 2-6
Verifying the CPU-3.2X Board BIOS/JUR SPI Module ................................... 2-9
Installing the CPU-3.2X Board BIOS/JUR SPI Module................................... 2-9
BIOS/JUR SPI Module LEDs.............................................................................. 2-10
Verifying the CPU-NXT3.2 Board BIOS Firmware and the SPI ................... 2-11
Removing the CPU-NXT3.2 Board BIOS Firmware or SPI ......................... 2-12
Installing the SPI and BIOS for a CPU-NXT3.2 Board ................................ 2-13
Verifying the CPU-NXT2 Board BIOS Firmware and the SPI ...................... 2-14
Reseating the CPU-NXT2 Board BIOS Firmware or SPI ............................ 2-15
Installing the SPI for a CPU-NXT2 Board .................................................... 2-16
Installing the BIOS Firmware for a CPU-NXT2 Board ................................. 2-17
Verifying the SPI and BIOS Firmware for CPU-NXT
RoHS-Compliant Board ............................................................................... 2-18
Reseating the BIOS Firmware and SPI in the CPU-NXT
RoHS-Compliant Board ............................................................................... 2-19
Installing the SPI for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board .......................... 2-20
Installing the BIOS Firmware in the CPU-NXT RoHS-compliant Board ...... 2-21
Verifying the SPI and BIOS Firmware for CPU-NXT
Non-RoHS-Compliant Board ....................................................................... 2-22
Reseating the BIOS Firmware and SPI in the CPU-NXT Non-RoHS .......... 2-23
Installing the SPI on the CPU-NXT Non-RoHS-Compliant Board ............... 2-24
Installing the BIOS Firmware for CPU-NXT Non-RoHS Board .................... 2-25
 RAM Clear Procedures .......................................................................... 2-26
Standard RAM Clear with a CompactFlash Card ........................................ 2-26
Performing an Automated RAM Clear
(Blade and Gamefield, and CPU-NXT2)...................................................... 2-27
Performing a RAM Clear from Administration Mode...........................................2-27
Performing a RAM Clear from a Fault (if permitted in jurisdiction) .....................2-29
Performing a RAM Clear using the DIAGNOSTIC Button/Attendant Key
(if permitted in jurisdiction) .................................................................................2-29
 Troubleshooting RAM Clear Problems................................................. 2-30
 Hardware Key Installation ..................................................................... 2-31
Tools Required............................................................................................. 2-31
Determine Correct Hardware Key Installation Procedure ............................ 2-31
 Installing the Hardware Key .................................................................. 2-32
Preparation .................................................................................................. 2-32
Seating the Hardware Key on CPU-3.2X..................................................... 2-32
Seating the Hardware Key on CPU-NXT3.2 ................................................ 2-33
Seating the Hardware Key and Hardware Key Board on CPU-NXT2 .......... 2-33
Removing/Installing CPU Enclosure from Cabinet (BBU and BBS only)..... 2-34
Install Hardware Key Into RoHS CPU-NXT or Non-RoHS CPU NXT
(BBU or BBS Only) ...................................................................................... 2-34
 Install Faceplate, Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto
Non-RoHS CPU-NXT (Select Jurisdictions Only) ................................ 2-36
Removing/Installing CPU Enclosure from Cabinet ...................................... 2-36
Remove Existing Faceplate ......................................................................... 2-36
Installing Replacement Faceplate................................................................ 2-37

January 2015
 Chapter 2 Software Installation 3
Installing Hardware Key and Protective Cover ........................................ 2-38
 Install Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto RoHS CPU-NXT
(Select Jurisdictions Only) .............................................................. 2-39
Removing/Installing CPU Enclosure from Cabinet .................................2-39
Installing Hardware Key and Protective Cover ........................................2-39
 Configuring the Game ...................................................................... 2-41
OLED Button Firmware...........................................................................2-41
Standard Configuration Order.................................................................2-41
Configuration Order for Stand-Alone Progressives.................................2-42
One-Time Settable Parameters ..............................................................2-42
Device Parameter Settings .....................................................................2-42
Setup Menu.............................................................................................2-43
Touch Screen Calibration........................................................................2-45
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................................2-48
Setting Up Devices .................................................................................2-50
Setting Up Machine Information..............................................................2-52
 Location Setup Overview................................................................. 2-55
Location Setup Screen Fields and Descriptions .....................................2-56
Zone, Group, and Unit Number Configurations.......................................2-57
Location Setup Diagram .........................................................................2-57
Line and Circle Bank Configurations.......................................................2-58
Circle Bank Configurations .....................................................................2-58
Line Bank Configurations........................................................................2-59
Location Setup Diagram .........................................................................2-60
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen ......................................... 2-61
Setting Up XD Lighting............................................................................2-65
Setting Up XD Environmental Control Server (ECS) ..............................2-66
Configuring Game Denomination Settings .............................................2-68
Cash Out and Promotional Options ........................................................2-71
Setting up Pay Tables..............................................................................2-73
Configuring Protocols with Comm Setup ................................................2-77
Dual Host Settings ....................................................................................... 2-77
Setting Up Max Bet .................................................................................2-82
Setting Up Vouchers ...............................................................................2-85
Game Volume .........................................................................................2-87
Configuring Progressives........................................................................2-89
Obtaining MAC Address............................................................................... 2-89
Progressive Options Configuration .........................................................2-90
Testing Progressive Settings...................................................................2-92
WMSP Traffic Statistics ................................................................................ 2-92
WMSP Link Statistics ................................................................................... 2-93
SPN Traffic Statistics .................................................................................... 2-94
SPN Link Statistics....................................................................................... 2-95
SPN Device Diagnostics .............................................................................. 2-96
Configuring WMSP Options ....................................................................2-97
Enabling WMSP as the Serial Protocol ........................................................ 2-97
Setting Up WMSP ...................................................................................2-98
 Network Gaming Setup and Configuration .................................. 2-101
Network Gaming Terms ........................................................................2-101
Certificate Enrollment and Generation Terms .......................................2-102
EGM Configuration Worksheet for Network Gaming ............................2-102
Machine Ethernet IP Setup Screen ......................................................2-102
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with AOM
as the Primary Host ........................................................................ 2-104
Configuring the EGM to Connect to the CGC .......................................2-104

16-020832
 4 Table of Contents:
Configuring the Machine Ethernet IP Setup Screen for Communication
to the CGC........................................................................................................ 2-105
Configuring G2S to Communicate with the AOM .......................................2-106
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the
Primary Host..........................................................................................2-108
Certificate Generation Order ......................................................................2-108
Generating G2S Certificates for the EGM ..................................................2-108
Generating a Root Certificate for G2S Communications.................................. 2-109
Generating a G2S Certificate for G2S Communications .................................. 2-112
Generating Certificates for Flash Communications ....................................2-114
Generating a Root Certificate for Flash Communications ................................ 2-114
Generating a Flash Certificate for Flash Communications ............................... 2-116
Configuring G2S - Configuring the EGM to Connect to the CGC ...............2-119
Configuring G2S Section on Machine Ethernet IP Setup Screen to
Communicate with SBX ..............................................................................2-122
Viewing Paytable Information for Portal Games..........................................2-125
Viewing Portal Meters .................................................................................2-126
 Beginning Game Play ...........................................................................2-127

Chapter 3  Table of Contents ..................................................................................... 3-1

Software  Overview ................................................................................................... 3-5
Administration  Accounting Menu ..................................................................................... 3-5
Accounting - Machine Accounting...................................................................3-5
Accounting - Game Accounting - Game Master .............................................3-7
Accounting - Game Accounting - Wager Categories ......................................3-8
Accounting - Game Accounting - Game Statistics ..........................................3-9
Accounting - Game Accounting - Game Period ............................................ 3-11
Game Accounting - Denomination Master ....................................................3-12
Game Accounting - Denomination Period.....................................................3-13
Accounting - Protocol Accounting - Progressive Accounting -
Progressive Master.......................................................................................3-14
Accounting - Protocol Accounting - Progressive Accounting ........................3-15
Accounting - Protocol Accounting Progressive Accounting -
Current Amounts...........................................................................................3-16
Protocol Accounting - Protocol Meters..........................................................3-17
Accounting - Bill Accounting .........................................................................3-19
Accounting - Bill Clearance Accounting ........................................................3-20
Accounting - Security Accounting .................................................................3-21
Accounting - Error Accounting ......................................................................3-22
Accounting - Clear Period Accounting ..........................................................3-23
 Diagnostic Menu .................................................................................... 3-24
Diagnostics - Machine Info - System Information .........................................3-24
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Program Version Information ..........................3-25
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Hard Drive List (CPU-NXT2, CPU-NXT3.2) .....3-26
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Software Validation .........................................3-28
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Fault Logs .......................................................3-29
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Boot Log..........................................................3-30
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Health Monitor.................................................3-31
Diagnostics - Machine Info - DRM Information .............................................3-32
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Machine Info Commands ................................3-33
Diagnostics - Jurisdiction Information - Jurisdiction Limits ...........................3-37
Diagnostics - Jurisdiction Information - Jurisdictional Bit Codes ..................3-38
Diagnostics - Input/Output Diagnostics - Door I/O Diagnostics ....................3-39
Diagnostics - Input/Output Diagnostics - Lamp Matrix Diagnostic................3-41

January 2015
 Chapter 3 Software Administration 5
Diagnostics - Input/Output Diagnostics - Cabinet I/O Diagnostics.......... 3-42
Diagnostics - Input/Output Diagnostics - Mechanical Arm Diagnostic .... 3-43
Diagnostics - Input/Output Diagnostics - Processor I/O Diagnostics ...... 3-44
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics .................................................. 3-45
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics - Bill Validator ........................... 3-46
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics - Coin Acceptor......................... 3-49
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics -Hopper .................................... 3-50
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics -Printer ..................................... 3-51
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics - Card Reader .......................... 3-53
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics - DFU........................................ 3-54
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics ............................................................. 3-55
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - Color Purity ....................................... 3-55
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - Dot Alignment.................................... 3-58
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - Graph Alignment ............................... 3-59
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - White Temp ....................................... 3-60
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - Contrast............................................. 3-61
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - EDID Data ......................................... 3-62
Diagnostics - Sound Diagnostics - Speakers.......................................... 3-63
Diagnostics - Sound Diagnostics - Sound Calls...................................... 3-65
Diagnostics - Sound Diagnostics - Playlist Calls..................................... 3-67
Performing Ethernet Diagnostics Using the Message Delay/
Loss Screen ............................................................................................ 3-68
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - Ethernet Diagnostics |
Network Connection Diagnostics ............................................................ 3-71
Diagnostics - WMSP Diagnostics - WMSP Traffic Statistics................... 3-72
Diagnostics - WMSP Diagnostics - WMSP Link Statistics ...................... 3-73
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics- SPN Diagnostics -
SPN Traffic Statistics .............................................................................. 3-74
Diagnostics - SPN Diagnostics - SPN Link Statistics.............................. 3-75
Diagnostics - SPN Diagnostics - SPN Devices Diagnostics ................... 3-76
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics -
OLED Button Panel................................................................................. 3-78
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics -
Emotive Controller .................................................................................. 3-79
Accessing the I2C Lights Diagnostic Screen ............................................... 3-81
MUX Port Mapping to Controller Port........................................................... 3-83
Emotive Lighting Controller EL SyncApp, EL SyncTransport, and
EL SyncMedia......................................................................................... 3-84
Emotive Lighting Controller - DMX Fixture.............................................. 3-85
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics - USB Mech Panel3-87
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics - Motion Chair.... 3-88
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - Location Diagnostics ..................... 3-89
Location Setup Diagnostics Screen Fields and Definitions..................... 3-89
Location Diagnostics - Identify Node ...................................................... 3-91
Location Diagnostics - Restart Bank Shows ........................................... 3-92
Diagnostics - Emotive Lighting Controller Troubleshooting Chart........... 3-93
Diagnostics - G2S Diagnostics -G2S Traffic Statistics............................ 3-94
 History Menu ...................................................................................... 3-95
History - Game Play................................................................................ 3-95
History - Event ........................................................................................ 3-96
History - Bill Acceptor.............................................................................. 3-98
History - Cash Out .................................................................................. 3-99
History - Hand Pay................................................................................ 3-100
History - Coin Mech History .................................................................. 3-101
History - Voucher In .............................................................................. 3-102

16-020832
6 Table of Contents:

History - Voucher Out History ..................................................................... 3-103

History - Voucher Reject History................................................................. 3-104
History - Cashless Bonus History ............................................................... 3-105
History - Cashless Funds In........................................................................3-106
History - Cashless Transfer - Cashless Funds Out History ........................3-107
History - SSG History..................................................................................3-108
History - SSG Download History.................................................................3-109
History - Hard Drive Log ............................................................................. 3-110
History - Progressive Events ...................................................................... 3-111
History - DHCP Options Info....................................................................... 3-112
 Setup Menu............................................................................................ 3-113
One-time Settable Parameters ...................................................................3-113
Setup - Touch Screen Setup.......................................................................3-114
Testing Accuracy for the Screen Calibration..................................................... 3-116
Setup - Clock Setup....................................................................................3-118
Setup - Machine Setup - Machine Info Setup ............................................ 3-121
Setup - Machine Setup - Cabinet Setup - Device Setup.............................3-124
Testing Printers ...........................................................................................3-125
Setup - Machine Setup - Cabinet Setup - Location Setup ..........................3-127
Setup - Machine Setup - Cabinet Setup - EGM Physical Setup .................3-130
Setup - Machine Setup - Cabinet Setup - XD Setup -
XD Lighting Setup.......................................................................................3-131
Setup - Machine Setup - Cabinet Setup - XD ECS Setup ..........................3-132
Setup - Machine Setup - Language Setup..................................................3-134
Setup - Machine Setup - Machine IP Setup................................................3-135
Configuring G2S Section on Machine Ethernet IP Setup Screen to
Communicate with SBX.................................................................................... 3-138
Setup - Machine Setup - Certificate Setup .................................................3-141
Generating a G2S Certificate for G2S Communications .................................. 3-144
Generating a Root Certificate for Flash Communications ................................ 3-146
Generating a Flash Certificate for Flash Communications ............................... 3-148
Setup - Machine Setup - OCSP Setup .......................................................3-151
Setup - Machine Setup - Static IP Setup ....................................................3-152
Setup - Machine Setup - Operating Hours..................................................3-153
Setup - Machine Setup - Perform RAM Clear.............................................3-154
Performing a RAM Clear from Administration Mode......................................... 3-154
Performing a RAM Clear from a Fault (if permitted in jurisdiction) ................... 3-155
Performing a RAM Clear using the DIAGNOSTIC Button
(if permitted in jurisdiction)................................................................................ 3-156
Setup - Machine Setup - Apply G2S Commands........................................3-157
Setup - Credit Setup ...................................................................................3-158
Setting up Paytables...................................................................................3-160
Selecting Paytables ....................................................................................3-161
Enabling the Subtoken Wager Feature ............................................................ 3-164
Setting Up Cash Out and Promotional Options ..........................................3-166
Setup - Denom Configuration and Paytable Selection -
Poker xD Games ........................................................................................3-170
Setup - Communication Setup - Serial Ports ..............................................3-176
Setup - SAS Progressive Setup..................................................................3-181
Handpay Reset and Win to Credit Meter Functionality with
SAS Systems..............................................................................................3-184
Set the Jackpot Limits ...................................................................................... 3-184
Set the SAS Options......................................................................................... 3-185
Configure the SAS System............................................................................... 3-185
Setup - Comm Setup - Wager Account Transfer (WAT) Setup ...................3-186

January 2015
 Chapter 3 Software Administration 7
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup:
Registering Games ......................................................................... 3-189
Setup - Comm Setup | Protocol Version ...............................................3-190
Setup - WMSP Setup............................................................................3-191
Obtaining the MAC Address from a Game............................................3-192
Setup - Game Setup - Double Up Autoplay Max Bet Feature
(for Select Themes) ..............................................................................3-194
Game Setup - Advanced Options - Bet Options ...................................3-195
Setup - Game Setup - Advanced Options - Game Options ..................3-199
Setup - Game Setup - Choose Your Style ............................................3-202
Setup - Game Setup - Diagnostic Options - Paytable Test (Video) ......3-205
Setup - Game Setup - Diagnostic Options - Paytable Test
(Blade Mech Reel) ................................................................................3-208
Setup - Voucher/Bill Setup - Voucher Data Setup................................. 3-211
Setup - Voucher/Bill Setup - Bill Validator Denom Setup ......................3-212
Setup - Sound Setup.............................................................................3-213
 Portal Menu ......................................................................................3-215
Portal Connection ................................................................................. 3-215
Portal - Portal Meters ............................................................................ 3-216
 Out of Service ..................................................................................3-217
 X-Series Support (NSW Only).........................................................3-218
Progressive Accounting ........................................................................ 3-218
Current Progressive Amounts ............................................................... 3-219
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Machine Identification.............................. 3-220
History - Game History - Game Play Data ............................................ 3-221
Setup - Credit Setup ............................................................................. 3-223
Setup - Comm Setup ............................................................................ 3-224
Software Validation ............................................................................... 3-227
Handpays.............................................................................................. 3-228
P1-P6 X-Series Connection Failure ...................................................... 3-229
 Configuration Mode.........................................................................3-231
 Big Event Server Menu....................................................................3-232
Big Event Server - Event History .......................................................... 3-232
Big Event Server - Big Event Sound Calls ............................................ 3-233
Setting Up Big Event Automatic Sound Schedule................................. 3-234
Big Event Server - BE Server Sound Calls ........................................... 3-237
Big Event Server - Language Configuration
(International Versions Only)................................................................. 3-238
 Using SVC/GAT ................................................................................3-239
 Key-In Credits (Russia Only) ..........................................................3-240
 Central Determination .....................................................................3-242
Central Determination - Configuration .................................................. 3-246
Central Determination - Event History - Central Determ. Event............ 3-247
Central Determination - Event History - Protocol Event........................ 3-248
Power Cycling Central Determination Games............................................ 3-248
RAM Clearing Central Determination Games ............................................ 3-248
Changing the Game Denom or Type on Central Determination Games.... 3-248

16-020832
 8 Table of Contents:

Chapter 4  Table of Contents ......................................................................................4-1

Troubleshooting  Overview ....................................................................................................4-2
 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................4-2
 Major Tilts ..................................................................................................4-2
Clearing a Major Tilt........................................................................................4-2
 Minor Tilts ..................................................................................................4-3
 Tilt or Event Indicators .............................................................................4-3
 Clearing a Tilt ............................................................................................4-3
 Error and Solutions...................................................................................4-4
CPU-NXT3.2 LEDs .......................................................................................4-15
 OLED Button Panel Tilts/Solutions .......................................................4-16
 Network Gaming Tilts .............................................................................4-17
 RGB Reel Hardware Tilts........................................................................4-18
 General Cabinet Troubleshooting Solutions ........................................4-18
 Tower Light Operation ............................................................................4-20
Tower Light States ........................................................................................4-20
EGM States ..................................................................................................4-20
Two-Stage Tower Lights ...............................................................................4-21
Two-Stage Tower Light Operations...............................................................4-21
Three-Stage Tower Light Operations............................................................4-23
Chirping Switch Troubleshooting ..................................................................4-25
 Ethernet Diagnostics ..............................................................................4-33
Performing Ethernet Diagnostics Using the Message Delay/Loss Screen .. 4-34

January 2015
 Chapter 5 Maintenance 9
Chapter 5  Table of Contents.................................................................................5-1
Maintenance  Hardware Key Administration ............................................................5-2
Hardware Key Error Resolution Decision Flow Chart ............................... 5-3
Troubleshooting Hardware Key Boot up Errors ........................................ 5-4
Troubleshooting Hardware Key Machine Fault Errors .............................. 5-5
Verifying the Hardware Key Installation .................................................... 5-6
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-3.2X Board........................................ 5-6
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT3.2 Board................................... 5-7
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT2 Board...................................... 5-9
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board and
Non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT Board....................................................... 5-11
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board and
Non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT Board for Jurisdictions
with the Protective Cover ............................................................................. 5-13
Verifying Hardware Key ID and Game Theme Information..................... 5-15
Verifying the Game ID Information for the Hardware Key if the
System Halted Screen Displays................................................................... 5-15
Obtaining Hardware Key ID Information
if the Machine Fault Screen Displays........................................................... 5-17
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives ...............5-19
Data Recovery ........................................................................................ 5-19
When to Perform a Transfer of Liability................................................... 5-19
Configuration Order ................................................................................ 5-19
Overview of Transfer of Liability When Values are Not Known............... 5-20
Performing Transfer of Liability When Values are Not Known ................ 5-21
Overview of Transfer of Liability When Values are Known ..................... 5-27
Performing Transfer of Liability When Values are Known....................... 5-28
Flow Chart for Reconciling Current Amounts.......................................... 5-34
Reconciling Current Amounts .................................................................5-35

16-020832
 About this Guide
General Information
Revision History
Part Number Revision Changes Initials

16-020832 January 2015 Updated to include NSOS-000-403x, NSOS-000-402x, SSSG-000-16Ex, SSSG-000-16Fx. Reference New JPC
Features and Enhancements on page 1-2.

November 2013 Updated to include the latest OS versions, NSOS-000-40xx, NSOS-000-30xx, SSSG-000-16Cx, SSSG-000- JPC
16Dx.

February 2012 Updated to include OS versions NSOS-000-1000, SSSG-000-16B0, and SSSG-000-16A0 and support for CPU- JPC
NXT3.
Specific additions:
Chapter 1: CPU, BIOS, RAM Clear, and OS Compatibility Reference
Chapter 2: OLED Button firmware automatic update.
Chapter 3: New or updated options/fields: Central Determination; Diagnostics - Emotive Lighting; Comm Setup -
Protocol Version; Poker xD Configuration; Setup - Language Setup; Diagnostics - Video - Contrast; Automated
RAM Clear; Advanced Game Setup; Handpay Reset and Win to Credit Meter.

16-020832-04 January 2011 Updated to include additions for OS 1680. MM

Documentation ©2015, WMS Gaming Inc. (“WMS”). All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be
Copyright reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation,
transformation, or adaptation) without written permission from WMS.
WMS reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to
time without obligation on the part of WMS to provide notification of such revision or change.
WMS provides this documentation without warranty of any kind, either implied or expressed,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. WMS may make improvements or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s)
described in this documentation at any time.
Unless otherwise indicated, WMS registered trademarks are registered in the United States and
may or may not be registered in other countries.
Other brand and product names may be registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective
holders.

Game Strict legal regulations protect the gaming device. Unauthorized modifications may be illegal under
Copyright, international law. This principle also applies to WMS logos, designs, publications, and assemblies.
Trademark, and Facsimiles of WMS equipment (or any feature of it) may be illegal. This principle applies to
Patent Laws facsimiles manufactured with or without WMS components.

Check Local Operation of gaming devices may be subject to state and local laws and regulations. This manual
Laws does not solicit sale of gaming devices where they may not lawfully operate.

CE Marking The CE Marking appears on gaming devices that meet the requirements of the EU directives. On
these products, a Declaration of Conformity states that they satisfy all applicable EMC and safety
requirements.

Support Contact the Product Support Group or the International Office with any questions regarding this
Information manual.
Region Contact Phone Fax Email
US/Canada Product Support Group 866-967-4457 847- 785-3780 [email protected]
International International Support +34 93 594 87 20 +34 93 594 87 21 [email protected]

January 2015
16-020832
 2 About this Guide: General Information

Conventions For clarity, this Service Manual uses the following conventions:
Text Conventions  Items that appear on a Screen Display (video screen) are identified in bold text.
 Button names are shown in ALL CAPS text.

Safety Symbols and When required, information is provided in procedures about potential challenges and dangers. The
Information terms WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE are used for specific safety reasons. For emphasis,
WARNING and CAUTION appear beside the characteristic triangle symbol. Table 1 lists notice
icons used in this guide.
Table 1 Notice icon descriptions.
Icon/Format Description
NOTE: Information note about important features or instructions but is not critical data.

CAUTION: Caution alerts you to potential damage to a program, system, or device.

WARNING: Warning indicates a situation that may cause personal injury or death.

WARNING: Warning indicates a situation that may cause personal injury or death due to a
potential electrical hazard.

ESD: ESD alerts you to take proper grounding precautions against electrostatic
discharge (ESD) before handling a product.

January 2015
 Preventing Injury and Damage 3

Preventing This section provides guidelines for preventing electrical injury and protecting components from
Injury and electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage.
Damage

Preventing Shock  ALWAYS power equipment OFF at the Power Switch.

Regardless of the type of procedure, set all Power Switches to OFF when servicing the game,
Top Box, or other equipment.
 Unplug equipment from the outlet if not handling ESD-sensitive components.
 Exercise caution when working around electrical equipment.

Preventing ESD  ALWAYS wear an ESD wrist strap.

Fasten a resistive type (1 or 10 Meg) ESD wrist strap on arm and ensure that it makes good skin
contact, Figure A-1 (A). Secure the clip end of the wrist strap to a nearby ground point.
Suggested grounds points are:
 An unpainted or bare exposed metal area of the game cabinet or equipment enclosure.
 Any labeled ESD common ground point, Figure A-1.
Figure 1 ESD wrist strap (left) and ESD common ground point symbol (right).

 Ground equipment when handling ESD-sensitive components.

When accessing printed circuit boards (PCBs) or components in direct contact with PCBs,
including EPROMs, CompactFlash® Cards, and PCB connectors, connect the three-prong
equipment line cord to a properly grounded outlet. Then, secure the clip end of the ESD wrist
strap to an unpainted or bare exposed metal area of the game cabinet or equipment enclosure.
Replacing/Repairing If the AC Line Cord is damaged, it must be replaced by the manufacturer (WMS), its service agent,
AC Line Cord or similarly qualified persons in order to avoid a hazard.

Properly Secure and Before performing any service tasks, the game (and Top/Accessory Box, if applicable) must be
Vent All Equipment properly secured as described in the Service Manual. All WMS cabinets and associated equipment
(including Top/Accessory Box, controllers, etc.) must be properly installed. WMS Upright (BBU/BB2/
BB2e/Blade) games must be mounted to a stand using four bolts, and all stands must be bolted to
the floor when placed individually or back-to-back, or secured to a wall. WMS Slant (BBS/BBS-W/
GameField xD) games must be installed back-to-back, or back against a wall. WMS Upright and
Slant cabinets require a minimum of 6 inches (15 cm) clearance on both sides and at the rear to
allow for proper ventilation. WMS BBxD cabinets may be placed directly side-by-side, but require a
minimum of 6 inches (15 cm) clearance at the rear to allow for proper ventilation. Failure to fully
secure and vent games may cause injury and equipment damage.
 4 About this Guide: General Information

AMD End User PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THE
License SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE.
Agreement 1. License. The software accompanying this License (hereinafter “Software”), regardless of the
media on which it is distributed, are licensed to you by Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. (“AMD”) for
use solely in conjunction with AMD hardware products purchased with the Software (“AMD
Hardware”). You own the medium on which the Software is recorded, but AMD and AMD's
Licensors (referred to collectively as “AMD”) retain title to the Software and related documentation.
You may:
a) use the Software solely in conjunction with the AMD Hardware on a single computer;
b) make one copy of the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes only. You must
reproduce on such copy AMD's copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the
original copy of the Software;
c) transfer all your license rights in the Software provided you must also transfer a copy of this
License, the backup copy of the Software, the AMD Hardware and the related documentation and
provided the other party reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License. Upon
such transfer your license is then terminated.

2. Restrictions. The Software contains copyrighted and patented material, trade secrets and other
proprietary material. In order to protect them, and except as permitted by applicable legislation, you
may not:
a) decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce the Software to a human-
perceivable form;
b) modify, network, rent, lend, loan, distribute or create derivative works based upon the Software in
whole or in part; or
c) electronically transmit the Software from one computer to another or over a network or otherwise
transfer the Software except as permitted by this License.

3. Termination. This License is effective until terminated. You may terminate this License at any
time by destroying the Software, related documentation and all copies thereof. This License will
terminate immediately without notice from AMD if you fail to comply with any provision of this
License. Upon termination you must destroy the Software, related documentation and all copies
thereof.

4. Government End Users. If you are acquiring the Software on behalf of any unit or agency of the
United States Government, the following provisions apply. The Government agrees the Software
and documentation were developed at private expense and are provided with “RESTRICTED
RIGHTS”. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in
DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) (Oct 1988), FAR
12.212(a)(1995), FAR 52.227-19, (June 1987) or FAR 52.227-14(ALT III) (June 1987), as amended
from time to time. In the event that this License, or any part thereof, is deemed inconsistent with the
minimum rights identified in the Restricted Rights provisions, the minimum rights shall prevail.

5. No Other License. No rights or licenses are granted by AMD under this License, expressly or by
implication, with respect to any proprietary information or patent, copyright, trade secret or other
intellectual property right owned or controlled by AMD, except as expressly provided in this License.

6. Additional Licenses. DISTRIBUTION OR USE OF THE SOFTWARE WITH AN OPERATING

SYSTEM MAY REQUIRE ADDITIONAL LICENSES FROM THE OPERATING SYSTEM VENDOR.

January 2015
 AMD End User License Agreement 5
7. Disclaimer of Warranty on Software. You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the
Software is at your sole risk. The Software and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and
without warranty of any kind and AMD EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AMD DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR
R E Q U I R E M E N T S , O R T H AT T H E O P E R AT I O N O F T H E S O F T WA R E W I L L B E
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
CORRECTED. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. FURTHERMORE, AMD DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE
ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE
SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS,
ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS, OR OTHERWISE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY AMD OR AMD'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY.
S H O U L D T H E S O F T WA R E P R O V E D E F E C T I V E , Y O U ( A N D N O T A M D O R A M D ' S
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN
MEDICAL, LIFE SAVING OR LIFE SUSTAINING APPLICATIONS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU.

8. Limitation of Liability. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL

AMD, OR ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY
TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION, BREACH OR DEFAULT,
INCLUDING THOSE ARISING FROM INFRINGEMENT OR ALLEGED INFRINGEMENT OF ANY
PATENT, TRADEMARK, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT, BY AMD,
EVEN IF AMD OR AMD'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION
OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. AMD will not be liable for 1)loss
of, or damage to, your records or data or 2) any damages claimed by you based on any third party
claim. In no event shall AMD's total liability to you for all damages, losses, and causes of action
(whether in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise) exceed the amount paid by you for the
Software.

9. Controlling Law and Severability. This Agreement will be governed by and construed under the
laws of the State of California without reference to its conflicts of law principles. The rights and
obligations under this Agreement shall not be governed by the United Nations Convention on
Contracts or the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. Each
party hereto submits to the jurisdiction of the state and federal courts of Santa Clara County and the
Northern District of California for the purpose of all legal proceedings arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the subject matter hereof. Each party waives any objection which it may have to
contest such forum.

10. Complete Agreement. This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with
respect to the use of the Software and the related documentation, and supersedes all prior or
contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject matter. No
amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly
authorized representative of AMD.
 Chapter 1
Introduction and CPU Features

Table of  Table of Contents......................................................................... 1-1

Contents  Overview....................................................................................... 1-2
OS Version....................................................................................... 1-2
New Features and Enhancements................................................... 1-2
CPU, BIOS, RAM Clear, RAM Dump, and OS Compatibility ........... 1-3
Reference Documentation ............................................................... 1-3
CompactFlash® Card Handling Guidelines ..................................... 1-4
 CPU Boards.................................................................................. 1-5
 Primary Amplifier ......................................................................... 1-8
 Hardware Key Introduction ......................................................... 1-8
Obtaining the Hardware Key............................................................ 1-8
Hardware Key Installation Location ................................................. 1-8
 Administration Menus ................................................................. 1-9
DIAGNOSTIC Button ....................................................................... 1-9
Blade s23 DIAGNOSTIC Button Location............................................. 1-9
Blade DIAGNOSTIC Button Location.................................................... 1-9
GameField xD DIAGNOSTIC Button Location .................................... 1-10
BBxD DIAGNOSTIC Button Location.................................................. 1-10
BB2 DIAGNOSTIC Button Locations .................................................. 1-11
BBU and BBS DIAGNOSTIC Button Locations .................................. 1-11
Attendant Key Locations ................................................................ 1-12
 Attendant Navigation................................................................. 1-14
Fields ............................................................................................. 1-14
Messages....................................................................................... 1-14
Field Features ................................................................................ 1-14
Numeric Keypad ............................................................................ 1-15

January 2015
16-020832
 1-2 Chapter 1: Introduction and CPU Features

Overview This Service Manual provides a feature summary and functional instructions for the WMS CPU-NXT
Operating System (OS). Details about the features and procedures for configuration are also
included in this manual.
OS Version This manual is based on Operating System versions NSOS-000-404x, NSOS-000-403x,
NSOS-000-402x, SSSG-000-16Ex, SSSG-000-16Fx, and SSSG-000-16Gx. If you are using an
older OS version, the latest features included in this manual may not be available.
New Features and The latest OS versions include the new features and enhancements listed in Table 1-1.
Enhancements Table 1-1 Latest OS enhancements.
Feature/Enhancement New in OS Version Reference
New tilt: Cabinet fan(s) locked. Tilt displays if one or both NSOS-000-4011 See Error and Solutions on page 4-5
cabinet fans fail. for more information.
New tilt: Communication loss during print. NSOS-000-4011 See Error and Solutions on page 4-6
for more information.
New tilt: CPU Logic Box Not Fully Installed. Tilt displays NSOS-000-4011 See Error and Solutions on page 4-6
when the CPU is not fully seated with the CPU latches for more information.
engaged on Blade cabinets.
New Cash Out Option available: non-suspend ON tilt for NSOS-000-4011 See Cash Out and Promotional
printer paper out/comm loss. When enabled, this option Options. on page 3-167 for more
allows game play to continue when paper out or printer information.
comm loss is detected.
New Choose Your Style attract features and options NSOS-000-4011 See Setup - Game Setup - Choose
available to the player. Your Style on page 3-202 for more
information.

New Blade Mechanical paytable test. NSOS-000-4021 See Setup - Game Setup - Diagnostic
Options - Paytable Test (Blade Mech
Reel) on page 3-208 for more
information.
Additional character support (100M-1). Credit limit and NSOS-000-4021 None.
other data fields now support a total of 10 digits.
New Apply G2S Commands option allows an operator to NSOS-000-4021 See Setup - Machine Setup - Apply
use G2S commands that require operator action before G2S Commands on page 3-157 for
command execution. It is available on live systems for use more information.
by G2S hosts.
SAS Progressives support. NSOS-000-4021 See Setup - SAS Progressive Setup
on page 3-181 for more information.
OS download from the Administration, Operations, and NSOS-000-4021 None.
Maintenance server (AOM). Using the AOM application,
OS updates can be made from the back end for connected SSSG-000-16G0
EGMs.
Support for Blade s23 cabinet. NSOS-000-4021 See Blade s23 DIAGNOSTIC Button
Location on page 1-9 and Attendant
Key Locations on page 1-12.
For more extensive information on the
Blade s23 cabinet, reference Service
Manual 1445543: Blade s23.
Support for button panel 2.0. NSOS-000-4021 See Button Panel options. on page 3-
124 for more information.
X-Series communication with standalone progressive NSOS-000-4030 See X-Series Support (NSW Only) on
(SAP) support (for NSW). Using the new 6XP hardware, page 3-218 for more information.
the OS monitors multiple X-series communication ports
and provides additional game history and metering
information. Additional Credit Limit fields were also added
to support jurisdictional requirements.
Support for CPU-3.2X and Backplane 2.0. NSOS-000-4031 See CPU, BIOS, RAM Clear, RAM
Dump, and OS Compatibility on page
1-3 for BIOS, RAM clear, and RAM
dump required for the new hardware.
See Verifying the CPU-3.2X Board
BIOS/JUR SPI Module on page 2-9.
See Seating the Hardware Key on
CPU-3.2X on page 2-32.

January 2015
 Overview 1-3
Table 1-1 Latest OS enhancements.
Portfolio Performance Plan (PPP) Digital Rights NSOS-000-4031 See Diagnostics - Machine Info - DRM
Management (dongle) limits the number of days leased Information on page 3-32.
products may remain active. Only the current game
software can be used for the PPP period, or after the
period expires. A software upgrade will require a new
dongle.
Central Determination (Class II) support. Central NSOS-000-4031 None.
Determination is now supported on CPU-NXT3.2.
Paytable sorting. Paytables are sorted and presented in a NSOS-000-4031 None.
default order determined by WMS Game Development.
SAP configuration from the AOM. Using the AOM NSOS-000-4031 None.
application, SAP paytable assignments and SAP
configuration options can be set from the back end for SSSG-000-16G0
connected EGMs.
New Convert All OLED Buttons to Bet Buttons feature, NSOS-000-4031 See Figure 3-353 on page 3-197.
which allows each OLED button to be converted to a bet
value (in credits) button.

CPU, BIOS, RAM Reference the following table for information on OS version compatibility:
Clear, RAM Dump, Table 1-2 CPU, RAM Clear, and BIOS compatibility.
and OS
CPU BIOS RAM Clear RAM Dump OS Version OS Family
Compatibility
CPU-3.2X NBOT-00003-2020 NCLR-000-4011 NDMP-000-4000 NSOS-000-4031 H19.xx
and above
CPU-NXT3.2 NBOT-00003-2000 NCLR-000-4000 NDMP-000-20xx NSOS-000-40xx H19.xx
(A-026352-03-YY)
NCLR-000-1000 NSOS-000-30xx H18.xx
CPU-NXT3 NBOT-00003-2000 NCLR-000-1000 NSOS-000-20xx H17.xx
(A-026352-02-YY) (common BIOS)
CPU-NXT2 SBOT-00002-3000 SCLR-000-18xx and SDMP-000-10xx SSSG-000-16xx H13.xx
(A-017999-XX-YY) SBOT-00002-2000 later
SSSG-000-15xx H10.xx
SSSG-000-14xx H9.xx
CPU-NXT1 SBOT-00001-2000 SCLR-000-18xx and SDMP-000-10xx SSSG-000-16xx H13.xx
(A-017096-XX-YY) later
SSSG-000-15xx H10.xx
SSSG-000-14xx H9.xx
SSOS-000-12xx B1
SSOS-000-14xx G1.3
SSOS-000-15xx G2.0
SSOS-000-16xx A1.2
SSOS-000-17xx B1.6
SSOS-000-18xx D1.3
SSOS-000-19xx E1.1

Reference See Table 1-3 for a list of relevant Service Manuals available from WMS:
Documentation
Table 1-3 Reference Documentation.
Service/Reference Manual Description
Service Manual 1446859: Williams Cabinet (in Includes installation, setup, maintenance, and troubleshooting
development as of January 2015) information for the Williams cabinet.
Service Manual 1445543: Blade s23 Includes installation, setup, maintenance, and troubleshooting
information for the Blade s23 cabinet.
Service Manual 1441400: CPU-3.2X Includes detailed information on CPU installation, maintenance,
and replacement parts.
Service Manual 16-1408191: Blade Video Gaming Includes installation, setup, maintenance, and troubleshooting
Device information for the Blade cabinet.
Service Manual 16-1405135: GameField xD Includes installation, setup, maintenance, and troubleshooting
information for the GameField xD cabinet.
Service Manual 16-022128: Bluebird 2 (BB2) and Includes installation, setup, maintenance, and troubleshooting
Bluebird 2 enhanced (BB2e) information for the BB2 and BB2e cabinets.

16-020832
1-4 Chapter 1: Introduction and CPU Features

Table 1-3 Reference Documentation. (continued)

Service/Reference Manual Description
Service Manual & User Guide 16-026146-xx: Includes installation, setup, maintenance, and troubleshooting
Bluebird eXperience Design (BBxD) Video and 3 or 5 information for the Bluebird xD cabinet.
Reel Gaming Cabinet
Service Manual & User Guide 16-030165-xx: Bluebird Includes installation, setup, maintenance, and troubleshooting
eXperience Design (BBxD) Video and Reel Gaming information for the Bluebird xD (version A-025101-06) cabinet.
Device - Version A-025101-06
Service Manual & User Guide 16-1408348: Includes installation, maintenance, and troubleshooting
CPU-NXT3.2 information for the CPU-NXT3.2 assembly.

Technical Service Bulletin 16-1408444: Conversion Details the conversion of the CPU-NXT3 assembly to
CPU-NXT3 to CPU-NXT3.2 CPU-NXT3.2.
Installation Bulletin 16-1407002: Liquid Resistant Includes installation, configuration, and maintenance information
Button Panel BBU-BB2-BBxD for the Liquid Resistant Button Panel for the BBxD, BB2, and BBU
cabinets.
Technical Service Bulletin 16-020293: Identifies part number information and describes the installation
CPU-NXT, CPU-NXT2, and CPU-NXT3.2 Enclosure and removal of the CPU-NXT Enclosure Ethernet/USB/Serial Port
Ethernet/USB/Serial Port Covers Covers.

CompactFlash® The following are guidelines for handling WMS CompactFlash® Cards.
Card Handling
Guidelines
CAUTION: Failure to comply with these guidelines damages the cards and renders the software
unusable.
 Do not attempt to access the CompactFlash Card contents using a computer or any card-reading
device. Doing so modifies the card and causes the validation process to fail.
 When using the Kobetron LT400 tool, choose Sector Method to validate the card. Do not use
the File Method.
 If using the DVCK GLI validation tool, only v3.0 may be used. Do not use any other DVCK
versions.

If any of the above guidelines are not followed, new software must be ordered from WMS. If
returned CompactFlash Cards do not show signs of inappropriate use, the WMS product warranty
applies. All game components are under warranty for 90 days from installation date, barring any
unauthorized actions and failures to comply with published WMS usage guidelines and warnings.

January 2015
 CPU Boards 1-5

CPU Boards This section outlines the CPU Boards available from WMS. CPU-3.2X, Figure 1-1, CPU-NXT3.2,
and CPU-NXT2 boards, Figure 1-2, are Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS)
compliant.
Figure 1-1 CPU-3.2X in enclosure (top) and PCB (bottom).

16-020832
1-6 Chapter 1: Introduction and CPU Features

Figure 1-2 CPU-NXT3.2 (top) and CPU-NXT2 (bottom) boards.

A-026352-XX-YY

A-017999-XX-YY

January 2015
 CPU Boards 1-7
There are two versions of the CPU-NXT board: RoHS-Compliant and non-RoHS-Compliant,
Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant (top), and CPU-NXT non-RoHS-Compliant (bottom) boards.
A-017096-XX-YY

A-010785-XX-YY

16-020832
 1-8 Chapter 1: Introduction and CPU Features

Primary The following section provides information regarding the Primary Amplifier. See Table 1-4 for part
Amplifier numbers, assembly information, and the identification markings for the amplifiers.
 The Digital/Analog Primary Amplifier for the BBxD (6901-021515-00-00), is installed in the
component drawer of the game cabinet. This Amplifier is marked with a black "x", "dot", or
"circle".
 The Digital/Analog Primary Amplifier for the BBU/BBS (6901-018316-00-00), is installed on
the back wall of the game cabinet. This Amplifier is marked with a green "x", "dot", or "circle".
For reference information, see Information Bulletin16-018805-xx: Verify CPU NXT2 Primary
Amplifier Configuration (BBU and BBS).
 The Digital/Analog Primary Amplifier for the BB2 and BB2e (6901-021515-00-00), is installed
on the back wall of the game cabinet. This Amplifier is marked with a black "x", "dot", or
"circle".
Table 1-4 Primary Amplifier Information.
Platform
Assembly Identification
Part Number Description Part Number Mechanical Assembly Description Marking
6901-021515-00-00 PCB: AMP & H/SINK- A-009820-00-03 ASSY: W/GDE-DGTL AMP-MTG-BB2 BB2, BBxD
BOSE-BB2 (Black Dot,
Circle or 'X')
6901-018316-00-00 PCB: AMP & H/SINK, A-009820-00-02 ASSY: W/GDE-DGTL AMP-MTG-BUX BBU, BBS
SPDIF CAPABLE, BBX (Green Dot,
Circle or 'X')

Hardware Key The WMS Hardware Key, also known as the Digital Rights Manager (DRM) or Dongle, is a USB
Introduction device used for game theme security starting with Operating System version SSSG-000-1660.
There are two versions of Hardware Keys: Stand-Alone and Network Gaming. The Stand-Alone
Hardware Key is used when the game theme is installed and executed by means of a CF Card. The
Network Gaming Hardware Key is used when the game theme is installed and executed by means
of the network, Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4 Stand-Alone Hardware Key (left) and Network Gaming Hardware Key (right).

Hardware Keys are labeled as follows:

 Network Gaming version = Network Gaming
or
 Stand-Alone version = Sxxx or Dxxx, where xxx = theme number (alphanumeric)
Obtaining the Each Hardware Key is created for a specific game theme and operating system. The Hardware Key
Hardware Key ships with the game theme and operating system CF Cards, and cannot be ordered separately. The
Hardware Key cannot be duplicated or used for multiple game themes.
Hardware Key The Hardware Key is installed into an internal USB port on CPU-NXT3.2 and CPU-NXT2, and into
Installation Location an external USB port on CPU-NXT.
For more information see Hardware Key Installation on page 2-31.

January 2015
 Administration Menus 1-9

Administration The CPU-NXT Administration Menu is accessed by pressing the DIAGNOSTIC Configuration Test
Menus Switch or turning the Attendant Key. The full Administration Menu displays upon pressing the
DIAGNOSTIC button, and a subset of options is available by turning the Attendant Key and
accessing the Attendant Menu.
DIAGNOSTIC Button The DIAGNOSTIC Configuration Test Switch is used to access the full Administration Menu. It is
referred to throughout this manual as the DIAGNOSTIC button. This section identifies the button
location in WMS cabinets.
Blade s23 DIAGNOSTIC Button Location
The DIAGNOSTIC button is located inside the Main Door below the button panel, Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-5 Blade s23 DIAGNOSTIC button.

Blade DIAGNOSTIC Button Location

The DIAGNOSTIC button is located inside the Main Door, to the left of the Printer and Bill Acceptor,
and is accessible with the EMI Door in the closed position, Figure 1-6.
Figure 1-6 Blade DIAGNOSTIC button.

16-020832
1-10 Chapter 1: Introduction and CPU Features

GameField xD DIAGNOSTIC Button Location

The DIAGNOSTIC button is located inside the Main Door (left side), below the Printer, Figure 1-7.
Figure 1-7 GameField xD DIAGNOSTIC button.

BBxD DIAGNOSTIC Button Location

The DIAGNOSTIC button is located on the inside of the Component Drawer, Figure 1-8. Access the
DIAGNOSTIC button by opening the Hatch Door. The Hatch Door can be opened by turning the
Hatch Door Key, on the left side of the cabinet, 90-degrees clockwise.
Figure 1-8 BBxD DIAGNOSTIC button.

January 2015
 Administration Menus 1-11
BB2 DIAGNOSTIC Button Locations
The DIAGNOSTIC button in the BB2 is located on the left front of the BB2 Cabinet. Depending
on the BB2 model, it may be in a horizontal or vertical orientation,
Figure 1-9.
Figure 1-9 DIAGNOSTIC button location in the BB2.

BBU and BBS DIAGNOSTIC Button Locations

On the BBU, the DIAGNOSTIC button is located inside the Main Door on the metal bar or shelf
spanning the middle of the cabinet, Figure 1-10 (A). On the BBS, the DIAGNOSTIC button is located
inside the Hatch on the left side, on the same bracket as the spill diversion tray, Figure 1-10 (B).
Figure 1-10 The DIAGNOSTIC button on the BBU (left) and BBS (right).

A B

16-020832
1-12 Chapter 1: Introduction and CPU Features

Attendant Key The Attendant Key provides access to the Attendant Menu, which includes fewer options than the
Locations full Administration Menu. Turn the key clockwise to display the Attendant Menu.
 The Blade s23 Attendant Key is located below the button panel, on the right side of the cabinet,
Figure 1-11 (A), left of the Main Door lock.
Figure 1-11 Blade s23 Attendant Key location.

 The Blade Attendant Key is located on the right side of the cabinet, Figure 1-12 (A), above the
Main Door lock.
Figure 1-12 Blade Attendant Key location.

January 2015
 Administration Menus 1-13
 The GameFIeld xD Attendant Key is located on the front left side of the cabinet, Figure 1-13 (A).
Figure 1-13 GameFIeld xD Attendant Key.

 The BBxD Attendant Key is located on the front left side of the cabinet, Figure 1-14.
Figure 1-14 BBxD Attendant Key.

16-020832
 1-14 Chapter 1: Introduction and CPU Features

 On the Bluebird 2 (BB2), the Attendant Key is on the right side of the cabinet, Figure 1-15 (A).
 The Bluebird Upright (BBU) Attendant Key is located on the right side of the cabinet,
Figure 1-15 (B).
 The Bluebird Slant (BBS) Attendant Key is on the left side of the cabinet, under the armrest,
Figure 1-15 (C).

Figure 1-15 Attendant Key locations for the BB2 (left), BBU (center), and BBS (right).

A
B

Attendant The Attendant/Setup Menus are navigated using the touch screen. There are several common
Navigation fields, messages, field and menu features that are described in this section.
Fields Common fields display at the screen, Figure 1-16, and along the right edge of the keypads. These
fields are used to save changed settings, view additional screens, exit from the current screen, and
to return the game to play.
Figure 1-16 Common fields.

Messages Messages sometimes display at the bottom of the screen to indicate important information, including
whether or not changes should be saved, Figure 1-17.
Figure 1-17 Message displays at bottom of screen.

Field Features To set field values or to toggle a field, touch inside the field, Figure 1-18. Then, if a numeric field
needs to be entered, a keypad displays.
Figure 1-18 Sample fields.

January 2015
 Attendant Navigation 1-15
Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad includes a title, Figure 1-19 (A), a value entry area, Figure 1-19 (B), a numeric
keypad similar to a calculator, and function fields, Figure 1-19 (C).
Figure 1-19 Entering a value in the numeric keypad.

These fields accomplish the following:

 Back: Erases entry one digit at a time
 Clear: Clears all digits
 Cancel: Closes the keypad with no entry or change
 Enter: Saves the entry

16-020832
 Chapter 2
Software Installation

Table of This chapter contains the following topics:

Contents
 Table of Contents.................................................................................2-1
 Introduction to the RAM Clear Process .............................................2-4
When to Perform a RAM Clear ................................................................. 2-4
RAM Clear Compatibility Table.................................................................. 2-5
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure ............................................2-5
Tools Required .......................................................................................... 2-5
Removing Protective Pull-Tabs from Batteries.......................................... 2-6
Verifying the CPU-3.2X Board BIOS/JUR SPI Module ............................. 2-9
Installing the CPU-3.2X Board BIOS/JUR SPI Module ............................. 2-9
BIOS/JUR SPI Module LEDs ....................................................................... 2-10
Verifying the CPU-NXT3.2 Board BIOS Firmware and the SPI .............. 2-11
Removing the CPU-NXT3.2 Board BIOS Firmware or SPI..................... 2-12
Installing the SPI and BIOS for a CPU-NXT3.2 Board............................ 2-13
Verifying the CPU-NXT2 Board BIOS Firmware and the SPI ................. 2-14
Reseating the CPU-NXT2 Board BIOS Firmware or SPI........................ 2-15
Installing the SPI for a CPU-NXT2 Board ............................................... 2-16
Installing the BIOS Firmware for a CPU-NXT2 Board............................. 2-17
Verifying the SPI and BIOS Firmware for CPU-NXT
RoHS-Compliant Board .......................................................................... 2-18
Reseating the BIOS Firmware and SPI in the CPU-NXT
RoHS-Compliant Board .......................................................................... 2-19
Installing the SPI for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board ..................... 2-20
Installing the BIOS Firmware in the CPU-NXT RoHS-compliant Board.. 2-21
Verifying the SPI and BIOS Firmware for CPU-NXT
Non-RoHS-Compliant Board................................................................... 2-22
Reseating the BIOS Firmware and SPI in the CPU-NXT Non-RoHS ..... 2-23
Installing the SPI on the CPU-NXT Non-RoHS-Compliant Board........... 2-24
Installing the BIOS Firmware for CPU-NXT Non-RoHS Board ............... 2-25
 RAM Clear Procedures ......................................................................2-26
Standard RAM Clear with a CompactFlash Card ................................... 2-26
Performing an Automated RAM Clear
(Blade and Gamefield, and CPU-NXT2) ................................................. 2-27
Performing a RAM Clear from Administration Mode .................................... 2-27
Performing a RAM Clear from a Fault (if permitted in jurisdiction) ............... 2-29
Performing a RAM Clear using the DIAGNOSTIC Button/Attendant Key
(if permitted in jurisdiction) ........................................................................... 2-29
 Troubleshooting RAM Clear Problems ............................................2-30
 Hardware Key Installation .................................................................2-31
Tools Required ........................................................................................ 2-31
Determine Correct Hardware Key Installation Procedure ....................... 2-31
 Installing the Hardware Key ..............................................................2-32
Preparation ............................................................................................. 2-32
Seating the Hardware Key on CPU-3.2X ................................................ 2-32
Seating the Hardware Key on CPU-NXT3.2 ........................................... 2-33
Seating the Hardware Key and Hardware Key Board on CPU-NXT2 ..... 2-33
Removing/Installing CPU Enclosure from Cabinet (BBU and BBS only) 2-34

January 2015
16-020832
2-2 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Install Hardware Key Into RoHS CPU-NXT or Non-RoHS CPU NXT

(BBU or BBS Only)..................................................................................2-34
 Install Faceplate, Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto
Non-RoHS CPU-NXT (Select Jurisdictions Only)............................2-36
Removing/Installing CPU Enclosure from Cabinet..................................2-36
Remove Existing Faceplate.....................................................................2-36
Installing Replacement Faceplate ...........................................................2-37
Installing Hardware Key and Protective Cover ........................................2-38
 Install Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto RoHS CPU-NXT
(Select Jurisdictions Only)............................................................... 2-39
Removing/Installing CPU Enclosure from Cabinet................................. 2-39
Installing Hardware Key and Protective Cover ....................................... 2-39
 Configuring the Game ...................................................................... 2-41
OLED Button Firmware .......................................................................... 2-41
Standard Configuration Order ................................................................ 2-41
Configuration Order for Stand-Alone Progressives ................................ 2-42
One-Time Settable Parameters.............................................................. 2-42
Device Parameter Settings..................................................................... 2-42
Setup Menu ............................................................................................ 2-43
Touch Screen Calibration ....................................................................... 2-45
Setting the Date and Time...................................................................... 2-48
Setting Up Devices................................................................................. 2-50
Setting Up Machine Information ............................................................. 2-52
 Location Setup Overview ................................................................. 2-55
Location Setup Screen Fields and Descriptions .................................... 2-56
Zone, Group, and Unit Number Configurations ...................................... 2-57
Location Setup Diagram......................................................................... 2-57
Line and Circle Bank Configurations ...................................................... 2-58
Circle Bank Configurations..................................................................... 2-58
Line Bank Configurations ....................................................................... 2-59
Location Setup Diagram......................................................................... 2-60
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen ......................................... 2-61
Setting Up XD Lighting ........................................................................... 2-65
Setting Up XD Environmental Control Server (ECS).............................. 2-66
Configuring Game Denomination Settings ............................................. 2-68
Cash Out and Promotional Options........................................................ 2-71
Setting up Pay Tables ............................................................................. 2-73
Configuring Protocols with Comm Setup ............................................... 2-77
Dual Host Settings ....................................................................................... 2-77
Setting Up Max Bet ................................................................................ 2-82
Setting Up Vouchers............................................................................... 2-85
Game Volume......................................................................................... 2-87
Configuring Progressives ....................................................................... 2-89
Obtaining MAC Address .............................................................................. 2-89
Progressive Options Configuration......................................................... 2-90
Testing Progressive Settings .................................................................. 2-92
WMSP Traffic Statistics ................................................................................ 2-92
WMSP Link Statistics................................................................................... 2-93
SPN Traffic Statistics.................................................................................... 2-94
SPN Link Statistics ...................................................................................... 2-95
SPN Device Diagnostics .............................................................................. 2-96
Configuring WMSP Options ................................................................... 2-97
Enabling WMSP as the Serial Protocol........................................................ 2-97
Setting Up WMSP .................................................................................. 2-98

January 2015
 Table of Contents 2-3
 Network Gaming Setup and Configuration .................................. 2-101
Network Gaming Terms ........................................................................2-101
Certificate Enrollment and Generation Terms .......................................2-102
EGM Configuration Worksheet for Network Gaming ............................2-102
Machine Ethernet IP Setup Screen ......................................................2-102
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with AOM
as the Primary Host ........................................................................ 2-104
Configuring the EGM to Connect to the CGC .......................................2-104
Configuring the Machine Ethernet IP Setup Screen for Communication
to the CGC ................................................................................................. 2-105
Configuring G2S to Communicate with the AOM..................................2-106
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the
Primary Host ................................................................................... 2-108
Certificate Generation Order.................................................................2-108
Generating G2S Certificates for the EGM.............................................2-108
Generating a Root Certificate for G2S Communications ........................... 2-109
Generating a G2S Certificate for G2S Communications............................ 2-112
Generating Certificates for Flash Communications ..............................2-114
Generating a Root Certificate for Flash Communications.......................... 2-114
Generating a Flash Certificate for Flash Communications......................... 2-116
Configuring G2S - Configuring the EGM to Connect to the CGC .........2-119
Configuring G2S Section on Machine Ethernet IP Setup Screen to
Communicate with SBX ........................................................................2-122
Viewing Paytable Information for Portal Games....................................2-125
Viewing Portal Meters ...........................................................................2-126
 Beginning Game Play..................................................................... 2-127

16-020832
 2-4 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Introduction to This section describes the Random Access Memory (RAM) clear procedures for the CPU-NXT,
the RAM Clear CPU-NXT2, and CPU-NXT3.2 boards. The RAM clear procedure requires a RAM clear CF Card,
Process Figure 2-1. The RAM clear CF Card initializes game parameters that command game software to
reset. Because many jurisdictions do not allow games to be shipped with the software installed, the
software is usually installed upon delivery. Software may be updated when new versions of software
become available, or in order to change the game theme.
When to Perform a The RAM clear procedure is performed at the following times:
RAM Clear  Prior to installing new software or updating an existing game.

 After a RAM error (tilt).

 When select game configuration options require modification.
 When game denomination requires a change.

Figure 2-1 RAM clear CompactFlash Card.

CAUTION: This procedure erases stored information. Do not clear the RAM and install software
unless casino management has authorized the process.

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-5
RAM Clear Table 2-1 lists each type of CPU and specifies whether the RAM clear CompactFlash Card
Compatibility Table indicated is compatible.
Table 2-1 RAM clear compatibility.
RAM Clear CPU OS Version
NCLR-000-4011 CPU-3.2X NSOS-000-4031
(1439750)
NCLR-000-4000 CPU-NXT3.2 NSOS-000-40xx
(A-026352-XX-YY)
NCLR-000-1000 NSOS-000-10xx
NSOS-000-20xx
NSOS-000-30xx
SCLR-000-xxxx CPU-NXT2 SSSG-000-xxxx
(A-017999-XX-YY)
CPU-NXT1
(A-017096-XX-YY)
CPU-NXT1 SSOS-000-xxxx
(A-017096-XX-YY)

Preparing for Complete the following procedures in this section to prepare for performing a RAM clear:
the RAM Clear  Remove protective pull-tabs from backup batteries
Procedure
 Verify the Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) and the Basic Input Output System (BIOS) Firmware
 Install the SPI
 Install the BIOS Firmware
Tools Required The following tools are required for the RAM clear procedures:
 ESD wrist strap
 Chip extraction tool (PLCC extraction tool for CPU-NXT2)
 RAM clear CompactFlash Card (SCLR-000-xxxx or NCLR-000-xxxx)

16-020832
 2-6 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Removing Complete the following procedure to remove the protective pull-tabs from the batteries on the
Protective Pull-Tabs CPU:
from Batteries 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
WARNING: Both protective pull-tabs must be removed from the backup batteries to activate the
batteries. If the backup battery protective pull-tabs are not removed, the game may lose settings
when the game power is turned OFF.
Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, and Figure 2-4 show the backup battery locations on CPU-3.2X, CPU-
NXT3.2, CPU-NXT2/CPU-NXT, and non-RoHS CPU-NXT. Figure 2-5 shows the pull-tabs
installed in the batteries for all CPUs.
Figure 2-2 CPU-3.2X (top) and CPU-NXT3.2 backup battery locations.

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-7
Figure 2-3 CPU-NXT2 backup battery locations.

Figure 2-4 CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant (top) and CPU-NXT non-RoHS (bottom) backup battery locations.

16-020832
2-8 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Figure 2-5 Pull-tabs for CPU-3.2X (A), CPU-NXT3.2 (B), CPU-NXT non-RoHS (C), CPU-NXT/CPU-NXT2 (D).
A A B

C D

2 If there are protective pull-tabs installed on the backup batteries, remove them to activate the
batteries by pulling them straight up for CPU-3.2X, CPU-NXT3.2, CPU-NXT2, or CPU-NXT
RoHS-Compliant board, Figure 2-6 (A). Pull the battery pull-tabs straight out for the CPU-NXT
non-RoHS-Compliant board, Figure 2-6 (B).
Figure 2-6 Pull tabs up (A) or out (B).

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-9
Verifying the Depending on the jurisdiction, the BIOS and Jurisdictional SPI (JUR SPI) module may not ship with
CPU-3.2X Board CPU-3.2X. Before installing CPU-3.2X, verify that the module is fully seated, Figure 2-7 (A).
BIOS/JUR SPI Figure 2-7 BIOS/JUR SPI module seated.
Module
A

If necessary, proceed to Installing the CPU-3.2X Board BIOS/JUR SPI Module on page 2-9.
Installing the If necessary, complete the following steps to install the BIOS/JUR SPI module, Figure 2-8, onto
CPU-3.2X Board CPU-3.2X:
BIOS/JUR SPI Figure 2-8 BIOS/JUR SPI module.
Module

1 Carefully grasp the module handle and align the BIOS/JUR SPI module guide over the yellow
BIOS/JUR SPI guide on the CPU, Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 BIOS/JUR SPI module guide.

16-020832
2-10 Chapter 2: Software Installation

2 Use the BIOS/JUR SPI module guide to position the BIOS/JUR SPI module and gently push it
into socket, Figure 2-10 (A).
Figure 2-10 BIOS/JUR SPI module guide.

A A

CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when installing the BIOS/JUR SPI module.

BIOS/JUR SPI Module LEDs

View the BIOS/JUR SPI LEDs to determine the status, Table 2-2, once the CPU is seated and the
EGM is powered up.
Table 2-2 BIOS/JUR SPI module LEDs.
LED Color Status
Power Red When lit, the BIOS/JUR SPI module has been properly inserted and power is on to the CPU
POST Start Yellow Once lit the BIOS has begun the boot up process, and POST is executing
POST Done Green When POST has successfully completed the green LED is illuminated and control is
transferred to the WMS UBE loader to validate the media
Validation Pass Blue When lit, the WMS UBE loader has completed the validation of the media AND the image is
deemed valid. The UBE then transfers control to the OS/Game. Should any of the media fail
to validate, the LED remains unlit and control is not transferred.

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-11
Verifying the CPU- Depending on the jurisdiction, the Jurisdictional SPI (JUR SPI) and BIOS may not ship with CPU-
NXT3.2 Board BIOS NXT3.2. Before installing CPU-NXT3.2, verify that each chip is fully seated, Figure 2-11 (A).
Firmware and the Figure 2-11 Both sockets unpopulated (top left), BIOS socket unpopulated (top right), JUR SPI socket
SPI unpopulated (bottom left), and both sockets populated (bottom right).

If necessary, proceed to Removing the CPU-NXT3.2 Board BIOS Firmware or SPI on page 2-12.

16-020832
 2-12 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Removing the CPU- Complete the following steps to remove the JUR SPI Firmware Assembly, Figure 2-12 (A), or
NXT3.2 Board BIOS BIOS Assembly, Figure 2-12 (B).
Firmware or SPI Figure 2-12 JUR SPI and BIOS secured to board (left) and close-up view (right).
A B

1 Carefully grasp the assembly handle, Figure 2-13 (A), and lift it up and away from the board,
Figure 2-13 (B).
Figure 2-13 Grasp assembly (left) and lift away from the board (right) (BIOS Assembly shown).

A B

2 If the chip is to be reinstalled, set aside in a safe location.

3 Proceed to Installing the SPI and BIOS for a CPU-NXT3.2 Board on page 2-13.

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-13
Installing the SPI Complete the following steps below to install the JUR SPI Assembly and/or BIOS Firmware
and BIOS for a Assembly.
CPU-NXT3.2 Board 1 Confirm that the appropriate EPROM version is on the appropriate side of the board. The "L"
notch, Figure 2-14 (A), should line up with the post header on the board.
Figure 2-14 Line up post header with "L" notch on board.
A A

2 Use guide pins to position assembly and lock into socket, Figure 2-15 (A).
Figure 2-15 Use guide pins to position assembly
(BIOS Assembly shown).

CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when installing the JUR SPI Assembly or BIOS Firmware
Assembly. If it does not install easily, ensure the assembly is positioned properly and the leads are
not bent.

16-020832
 2-14 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Verifying the Perform the procedures in this section to verify that the CPU-NXT2 board BIOS Firmware and SPI
CPU-NXT2 Board are installed correctly.
BIOS Firmware and 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
the SPI page 3.
2 Depending on the jurisdiction, the BIOS Firmware, Figure 2-16 (A), and the SPI,
Figure 2-16 (B), may not ship with CPU-NXT2 board. Before installing the CPU-NXT2 board,
verify that each chip is fully seated.
Figure 2-16 SPI and BIOS Firmware installed in CPU-NXT2.

3 See Table 2-3 to determine the correct SPI or BIOS Firmware procedure to perform:
Table 2-3 CPU-NXT2 SPI/BIOS Firmware Decision Table.
If the... proceed to ...
SPI and BIOS Firmware are not installed Reseating the CPU-NXT2 Board BIOS Firmware or SPI on page 2-15.
properly,
SPI is not installed, Installing the SPI for a CPU-NXT2 Board on page 2-16.
BIOS Firmware is not installed, Installing the BIOS Firmware for a CPU-NXT2 Board on page 2-17.
SPI and BIOS are installed and seated RAM Clear Procedures on page 2-26.
properly,

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-15
Reseating the CPU- Perform the following steps to reseat the CPU-NXT2 Board BIOS Firmware and SPI. The BIOS
NXT2 Board BIOS Firmware and SPI should be properly seated, meaning all pins should be inserted correctly into
Firmware or SPI their sockets, and pins should not be bent or damaged.
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Locate the BIOS Firmware, Figure 2-17 (A), and the SPI, Figure 2-17 (B) on the C.PU-NXT2
board, Figure 2-17.
Figure 2-17 CPU-NXT2 Board with the BIOS Firmware and SPI highlighted.
A

3 Use the extraction tool to grasp the chip at its location, Figure 2-18.
NOTE: When removing the BIOS Firmware, hook the ends of the extraction tool into the open
corners of the socket, Figure 2-18.
Figure 2-18 Grasping the BIOS Firmware by corners.

CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the pins. Damaged or bent leads can render a
chip unusable.

16-020832
 2-16 Chapter 2: Software Installation

4 Squeeze the sides of the chip extraction tool to pop the chip out of the socket. Pull straight up
to remove the chip, Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19 Remove SPI (left) and BIOS Firmware (right), removed with a PLCC extraction tool.

5 Inspect the chip(s) to see if the pins are bent or damaged. If the pins are bent or damaged the
chip is not usable. Order a new chip to replace the damaged chip. If the chips are not damaged
proceed to Installing the SPI for a CPU-NXT2 Board on page 2-16.

Installing the SPI for Complete the following procedure to install the SPI for the CPU-NXT2 Board.
a CPU-NXT2 Board 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Position the SPI so that the notch on the edge of the chip, Figure 2-20 (A), is aligned with the
notch on the socket, Figure 2-20 (B).
Figure 2-20 Ensure that SPI is positioned correctly.

3 Insert the pins on the chip into the socket, Figure 2-21.
CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the pins. Damaged or bent pins can render a chip
unusable.
Figure 2-21 Insert leads into socket.

4 Confirm that all pins are fully seated in the sockets.

CAUTION: Not having all pins fully seated (for example, having one or more pins positioned
outside a socket) can damage the SPI and cause the game to malfunction.

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-17
5 Press down on SPI to lock into socket, Figure 2-22.
Figure 2-22 Pressing down on the SPI.

Installing the BIOS Complete the following procedure to install the BIOS Firmware for a CPU-NXT2 Board.
Firmware for a
CPU-NXT2 Board
CAUTION: Confirm that the BIOS Firmware has the correct part number for CPU-NXT2:
SBOT-00002-xxx.
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Position the BIOS Firmware in the socket, so that the angled corner, Figure 2-23 (A), is aligned
with the angled corner on the socket, Figure 2-23 (B).
Figure 2-23 Ensure that BIOS is positioned correctly.

B
A

3 Press down on the BIOS to lock it into the socket, Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Installing the BIOS Firmware.

CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when installing the BIOS Firmware. If it does not install
easily, ensure that the BIOS is positioned properly and that the leads are not bent.

16-020832
 2-18 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Verifying the SPI Complete the following procedure to verify that the SPI and BIOS Firmware for the CPU-NXT
and BIOS Firmware RoHS-Compliant board are installed correctly.
for CPU-NXT RoHS- 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
Compliant Board page 3.
2 Depending on the jurisdiction, the BIOS Firmware, Figure 2-25 (A), and SPI, Figure 2-25 (B),
may not ship with CPU-NXT. Before installing CPU-NXT, verify that each EPROM is fully
seated.
NOTE: Ensure that each EPROM notch lines up with the notch on it’s socket, Figure 2-25 (C).
Figure 2-25 BIOS Firmware and SPI on the CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant board.

3 To identify the correct SPI or BIOS Firmware procedure to perform, determine the following:
If the ... proceed to ...
SPI and BIOS Firmware are not seated Reseating the BIOS Firmware and SPI in the CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant
properly, Board on page 2-19.
SPI is not installed, Installing the SPI for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board on page 2-20.
BIOS Firmware is not installed, Installing the BIOS Firmware in the CPU-NXT RoHS-compliant Board on
page 2-21.
SPI and BIOS Firmware are installed and RAM Clear Procedures on page 2-26.
seated properly,

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-19
Reseating the BIOS Complete the following procedure to reseat the BIOS Firmware or SPI in the CPU-NXT RoHS-
Firmware and SPI in Compliant board. The BIOS Firmware and SPI should be properly seated, meaning all pins should
the CPU-NXT RoHS- be inserted correctly into their sockets, and pins should not be bent or damaged.
Compliant Board 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
CAUTION: Ensure that all pins on the chips are fully seated. If one or more pins are positioned
outside a socket, the chips can be damaged and cause the game to malfunction.
2 Locate the BIOS Firmware, Figure 2-26 (A), and the SPI, Figure 2-26 (B) on the CPU-NXT
RoHS-Compliant board, Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 Bios Firmware and SPI on the CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant board.

3 Using the chip extraction tool, grasp the chip, Figure 2-27.
Figure 2-27 Using the chip extraction tool to grasp BIOS Firmware (left) and SPI (right).

4 Squeeze the sides of the chip extraction tool to pop the chip out of the socket. Pull straight up
to remove the chip. Place the chip on a flat surface, Figure 2-28.
Figure 2-28 Remove BIOS Firmware (left) and SPI (right).

5 Inspect the chip(s) to see if the pins are bent or damaged. If the pins are bent or damaged the
chip is not usable. Order a new chip to replace the damaged chip. If the chips are not damaged
proceed to see Installing the SPI for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board on page 20.

16-020832
 2-20 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Installing the SPI for Complete the following procedure to install the SPI for the CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant board.
a CPU-NXT RoHS- 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
Compliant Board page 3.
2 Position the SPI so that the notch on the edge of the chip, Figure 2-29 (A), is aligned with the
notch on the socket, Figure 2-29 (B).
Figure 2-29 Ensure that SPI is positioned correctly.

3 Insert the pins on the chip into the SPI socket, Figure 2-30.
CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the pins. Damaged or bent pins can render a chip
unusable.
Figure 2-30 Insert pins into socket.

4 Confirm that all leads are fully seated in the sockets.

CAUTION: Not having all pins fully seated (for example, having one or more pins positioned
outside a socket) can damage the SPI and cause the game to malfunction.
5 Press down gently on the SPI to lock it into the socket, Figure 2-31.
Figure 2-31 Pressing down on the SPI.

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-21
Installing the BIOS Complete the following steps to install the BIOS Firmware in the CPU-NXT RoHS-compliant board.
Firmware in the 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
CPU-NXT RoHS- page 3.
compliant Board
CAUTION: Confirm that the BIOS has the correct part number for CPU-NXT: SBOT-00001-xxx.
2 Position the BIOS Firmware so that the notch on the chip, Figure 2-32 (A), is aligned with the
notch on the socket, Figure 2-32 (B).
Figure 2-32 Ensure that BIOS is positioned correctly.

3 Press down on the BIOS to lock it into the socket, Figure 2-33.
Figure 2-33 Press down on the BIOS.

CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when installing the BIOS Firmware. If it does not install
easily, ensure that the BIOS is positioned properly and that the leads are not bent.

16-020832
 2-22 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Verifying the SPI Complete the following procedure to verify that the SPI and BIOS Firmware for the CPU-NXT non-
and BIOS Firmware RoHS-Compliant board are installed correctly.
for CPU-NXT Non- 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
RoHS-Compliant page 3.
Board
2 Depending on the jurisdiction, the BIOS Firmware, Figure 2-34 (B), and the SPI,
Figure 2-34 (A), may not ship with CPU-NXT non-RoHS-Compliant board. Before installing
CPU-NXT Non-RoHS-Compliant board, verify that each EPROM is fully seated.
Figure 2-34 CPU-NXT Non-RoHS-Compliant board.
B

3 See Table 2-4 to determine the correct SPI or BIOS Firmware procedure to perform.
Table 2-4 CPU-NXT non-RoHS SPI/BIOS Firmware Decision Table
If the ... proceed to ...
SPI and BIOS Firmware are not Reseating the BIOS Firmware and SPI in the CPU-NXT Non-RoHS on page 2-23.
installed properly,
SPI is not installed, Installing the SPI on the CPU-NXT Non-RoHS-Compliant Board on page 2-24.
BIOS Firmware is not installed, Installing the BIOS Firmware for CPU-NXT Non-RoHS Board on page 2-25.
SPI and BIOS are installed and seated RAM Clear Procedures on page 2-26.
properly,

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-23
Reseating the BIOS Complete the following steps to reseat the BIOS Firmware and SPI in the CPU-NXT non-RoHS-
Firmware and SPI in Compliant board. The BIOS Firmware and SPI should be properly seated, meaning all pins should
the CPU-NXT Non- be inserted correctly into their sockets, and pins should not be bent or damaged.
RoHS
CAUTION: Ensure that all pins on the chips are fully seated. If one or more pins are positioned
outside a socket, the chips can be damaged and cause the game to malfunction.
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Locate the BIOS Firmware, Figure 2-35 (B), and the SPI, Figure 2-35 (A) on the CPU-NXT
Non-RoHS board, Figure 2-35.
Figure 2-35 CPU-NXT non-RoHS-Compliant board.

3 Using a chip extraction tool, grasp the chip and pull straight up to remove it. Place the chip on a
flat surface, Figure 2-36.
Figure 2-36 Using the chip extraction tool to grasp BIOS Firmware (left) and SPI (right).

4 Inspect the chip(s) to see if the pins are bent or damaged. If the pins are bent or damaged the
chip is not usable. Order a new chip to replace the damaged chip. If the chips are not
damaged, proceed to Installing the SPI on the CPU-NXT Non-RoHS-Compliant Board on page
2-24.

16-020832
 2-24 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Installing the SPI on Complete the following procedure to install the SPI for CPU-NXT Non-RoHS-Compliant board.
the CPU-NXT Non-
RoHS-Compliant 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
Board page 3.
CAUTION: Confirm that the BIOS has the correct part number for CPU-NXT: SBOT-00001-xxx.
2 Find the SPI location on the CPU-NXT Non-RoHS-Compliant board, Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37 SPI location on the CPU-NXT non-RoHS-Compliant board.

3 Position the SPI so that the notch on the edge of the chip, Figure 2-38 (A), is aligned with the
notch on the socket, Figure 2-38 (B).
Figure 2-38 Ensure that SPI is positioned correctly.

A B

4 Insert the pins on the chip into the socket for the SPI, Figure 2-39.
CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the pins. Damaged or bent leads can render a
chip unusable. Ensure that all leads are fully seated (for example, having one or more pins
positioned outside a socket) can damage the SPI and cause the game to malfunction.
Figure 2-39 Insert leads into socket.

5 Confirm that all pins are fully seated in the sockets.

January 2015
 Preparing for the RAM Clear Procedure 2-25
CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the pins. Damaged or bent leads can render a
chip unusable.
6 Press down gently on SPI to lock it into the socket, Figure 2-40.
Figure 2-40 SPI installation.

Installing the BIOS Complete the following steps to install the BIOS Firmware for a non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT.
Firmware for 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
CPU-NXT Non-RoHS page 3.
Board
2 Position the BIOS Firmware on the board so that the notch on the edge of the chip,
Figure 2-41 (A), is aligned with the notch on the socket, Figure 2-41 (B).
Figure 2-41 BIOS Firmware notch.
A

CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the pins. Damaged or bent leads can render a
chip unusable.
3 Press down gently on the BIOS Firmware to lock it into the socket, Figure 2-42.
Figure 2-42 Installing the BIOS Firmware.

CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when installing the BIOS Firmware. If it does not install
easily, ensure that the BIOS is positioned properly and that the leads are not bent.

16-020832
 2-26 Chapter 2: Software Installation

RAM Clear This section includes information on performing a RAM clear, which is done to install a new EGM,
Procedures modify a game configuration option, change the theme, or to address a fault or as part of
troubleshooting procedures.
Standard RAM Clear Complete the following steps to perform a standard RAM clear using a CompactFlash card.
with a
CompactFlash Card
CAUTION: The RAM clear procedure erases stored information. Do not clear the RAM and install
software unless casino management has authorized the process.
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Obtain the appropriate RAM clear for the game. Reference CPU, BIOS, RAM Clear, RAM
Dump, and OS Compatibility on page 1-3 for the correct part.
3 Unlock and open the Main Door/Hatch.
4 Power OFF the game at the Power Switch.
CAUTION: The game MUST be powered OFF before inserting or removing CompactFlash
cards. Inserting or removing a card with the power ON may cause permanent damage and data
corruption.
5 Access the CPU Enclosure.
6 Unlock and open the Logic Door.
7 Verify that the SPI and BIOS are present and fully seated.
8 If applicable, remove the game and OS CompactFlash cards.
9 Insert the RAM clear CompactFlash Card into the OS CompactFlash Card slot by gently
pushing down on the center of the RAM clear CompactFlash Card.
WARNING: Do not force the RAM clear CompactFlash card into the slot. If the card does not
engage easily, it is likely installed backwards.
10 Power the game ON at the Power Switch.
11 Proceed to RAM Clear Completion Procedure on page 2-37.
12 Power the game ON at the Power Switch.

January 2015
 RAM Clear Procedures 2-27
Depending on the version of RAM clear, a series of RAM clear validation messages may
display, Figure 2-43.
Figure 2-43 RAM clear validation messages.

13 The RAM clear completes, and additional instructions may display.

14 Power the game OFF.
15 Remove the RAM clear CompactFlash card.
16 Install the game card into the game CompactFlash slot.
17 Install the Operating System (OS) card into the OS CompactFlash slot.
18 Close and lock the Logic Door.
19 Power the game ON at the Power Switch.
The EGM boots and loads the game.
20 Remove the ESD wrist strap and store it in a cool and dry location.
21 Configure the game to casino specifications.
22 Close and lock the Main Door/Hatch.

Performing an Starting with OS NSOS-000-2000 and SSSG-000-16CX, an automated RAM clear option is
Automated RAM available if allowed in the jurisdiction, as dictated by the SPI. Complete the automated RAM clear in
Clear (Blade and one of the three ways described in this section. If necessary, a manual RAM clear may also be
Gamefield, and completed.
CPU-NXT2) Performing a RAM Clear from Administration Mode
1 Open the Main Door/Hatch.
2 Open the CPU Logic Door.
3 Press the DIAGNOSTIC button.
The Administration Menu displays. If the CPU Logic Door is not open, a message displays to
indicate that the Logic Door must be open.

16-020832
2-28 Chapter 2: Software Installation

4 Select Setup | Machine Setup | Perform RAM Clear, Figure 2-44.

Figure 2-44 Machine Setup Menu.

Depending on Jurisdictional SPI chip settings, between two and four RAM clear options
display, Figure 2-45.
Figure 2-45 RAM clear options.

Table 2-5 RAM clear options.

Option Definition
Cancel Does not initiate a RAM clear.
RAM Clear Retain Performs a partial RAM clear. The game image is retained on the CPU hard drive, so
Images and that game content does not need to be downloaded after the RAM clear. All game
Configuration configuration options, including all Setup options, remain unchanged and do not need
to be reset after the RAM clear. Game Play History, Event History, Money In/Out
History, and Hard Drive Logs are also retained.
RAM Clear Retain Performs a partial RAM clear. The game image is retained on the CPU hard drive, so
Images that game content does not need to be downloaded after the RAM clear.
RAM Clear Performs a full RAM clear. The game will need to be fully reconfigured after a reboot.

5 If applicable, select a RAM clear option.

6 Select Yes at the confirmation message.
The RAM clear initiates, and when complete, the game reboots.

January 2015
 RAM Clear Procedures 2-29
7 If applicable, insert new Game and/or OS CompactFlash cards after initiating the RAM clear,
and the EGM will boot with the new OS and/or game version(s).
Performing a RAM Clear from a Fault (if permitted in jurisdiction)
If the CPU Logic Door is open, the EGM can perform a RAM clear from a fault condition.
1 If the CPU Logic Door is open, the option to initiate a RAM clear displays on the Fault screen,
Figure 2-46 (A).
Figure 2-46 RAM clear option on Fault screen.

2 Press the DIAGNOSTICS button to toggle between the available options and select Ram
Clear.
3 Turn the Attendant Key.
The RAM clear initiates, and when complete, the game reboots.
Performing a RAM Clear using the DIAGNOSTIC Button/Attendant Key (if permitted in
jurisdiction)
1 Open the Main Door/Hatch.
2 If necessary, power the game OFF.
3 Open the CPU Logic Door.
4 Power the game ON.
5 A message in the boot sequence displays a Please PRESS DIAG button NOW for RAMCLEAR
message, Figure 2-47.
Figure 2-47 RAM clear during game boot up, close-up (right).

6 Press the DIAGNOSTIC button to select the option.

7 Turn the Attendant Key to trigger the RAM clear.
The RAM clear initiates, and when complete, the EGM boots and loads the game.

16-020832
 2-30 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Troubleshooting Complete the following procedure to troubleshoot RAM Clear problems.

RAM Clear 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
Problems page 3.
2 If the following System Halted screen, Figure 2-48 displays during the RAM Clear procedure,
verify that the correct Bios Firmware and SPI are installed, and not damaged.
Figure 2-48 System Halted Screen.

3 If the game does not boot up, and the System Halted screen displays, contact the Product
Support Group: 1.866.967.4457.

January 2015
 Hardware Key Installation 2-31

Hardware Key This section describes the installation of the Hardware Key, Figure 2-49, into all CPU-NXT,
Installation CPU-NXT2, and CPU-NXT3 games. The Hardware Key is a USB device used to provide security
for WMS themes. Each Hardware Key is programmed for a specific Theme.
The installation steps depend on the cabinet (BB2, BBxD, BBU, BBS) and type of CPU
(CPU-NXT3.2.2, CPU-NXT2, RoHS CPU-NXT, and Non-RoHS CPU-NXT. See Determine Correct
Hardware Key Installation Procedure on page 2-31. For details on Hardware Key administration and
troubleshooting see Technical Service Bulletin 16-026885: Hardware Key Administration.
Figure 2-49 Hardware Key.

Tools Required The following tools are required to complete the Hardware Key installation:
 #2 Phillips Screwdriver
 5/16-inch nut driver (for jurisdictions requiring USB Cover)
 3/16-inch nut driver (for jurisdictions requiring USB Cover)
 ESD wrist strap
Determine Correct Use Table 2-6 to determine the correct installation procedure for the Hardware Key.
Hardware Key
Table 2-6 Guide to Hardware Key Installation Procedures.
Installation
Procedure CPU Type USB Cover Required? See the following Installation Instructions...
CPU-NXT3.2 N/A Installing the Hardware Key on page 2-32.
CPU-NXT2 N/A Installing the Hardware Key on page 2-32.

RoHS CPU-NXT No Removing/Installing CPU Enclosure from Cabinet (BBU and BBS
only) on page 2-34.
Yes Install Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto RoHS CPU-NXT
(Select Jurisdictions Only) on page 2-39.
Non-RoHS CPU- No Removing/Installing CPU Enclosure from Cabinet (BBU and BBS
NXT only) on page 2-34.
Yes Install Faceplate, Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto Non-
RoHS CPU-NXT (Select Jurisdictions Only) on page 2-36.

16-020832
 2-32 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Installing the This section describes the procedure to install the Hardware Key into CPU-3.2X, CPU-NXT3.2, or
Hardware Key CPU-NXT2.
Preparation Complete the following steps to prepare to install the Hardware Key:
1 Ensure that you are wearing an ESD Wrist Strap.
2 Unlock and open the Main Door/Hatch.
3 Turn the game OFF at the Power Switch.
4 Unlock and open the CPU Logic Door.
5 Ensure that you have the correct Hardware Key that corresponds to the game. If working on a
CPU-NXT2, also ensure that the Hardware Key Board (A-024263-00-00), Figure 2-50 is
available. CPU-3.2X and CPU-NXT3.2 do not require the Hardware Key Board.
Figure 2-50 Hardware Key Board (left) and Hardware Key (right).

Seating the Complete the following steps to seat the Hardware Key on CPU-3.2X:
Hardware Key on 1 Gently install the Hardware Key into an available USB port on the CPU, Figure 2-51 (A),
CPU-3.2X ensuring that it is fully seated.
Figure 2-51 Four USB ports on CPU-3.2X.

2 If the CPU is installed in the cabinet, close and lock the CPU Logic Door. If the CPU was
removed, reinstall the CPU Enclosure into the cabinet.
3 Set the Power Switch to ON and reboot the game.
See Hardware Key Administration on page 5-2 if the game does not boot.
4 Close and lock the game.

January 2015
 Installing the Hardware Key 2-33
Seating the Complete the following steps to seat the Hardware Key on CPU-NXT3.2:
Hardware Key on 1 Gently install the Hardware Key into either USB port (J4 or J5) on the CPU, Figure 2-52 (A),
CPU-NXT3.2 ensuring that it is fully seated.
Figure 2-52 Hardware Key seated at J5.

2 If the CPU is installed in the cabinet, close and lock the CPU Logic Door, Figure 2-58. If the
CPU was removed, reinstall the CPU Enclosure into the cabinet.
3 Set the Power Switch to ON and reboot the game.
See Hardware Key Administration on page 5-2 if the game does not boot.
4 Close and lock the game.

Seating the Complete the following steps to seat the Hardware Key on CPU-NXT2:
Hardware Key and 1 Line up J1 of the Adapter Board, Figure 2-50, with J16 on the CPU Enclosure, Figure 2-53 (A),
Hardware Key Board ensuring that the white plastic mounting post is pointed towards the hard drive, Figure 2-53 (B).
on CPU-NXT2
Figure 2-53 Adapter Board installs onto J16 on CPU, next to Hard Drive.

2 Press down gently to secure the Adapter Board to the CPU, ensuring that the white plastic
mounting post snaps below the plastic Hard Drive mount, Figure 2-53 (B), holding the Adapter
Board in place.

16-020832
 2-34 Chapter 2: Software Installation

3 Gently install the Hardware Key, Figure 2-54 (A), into the USB port on the Adapter Board,
Figure 2-53 (C), ensuring that it is fully seated.
Figure 2-54 Hardware Key Installed on Adapter Board (closeup on right).

4 If the CPU is installed in the cabinet, close and lock the CPU Logic Door, Figure 2-58. If the
CPU was removed, reinstall the CPU Enclosure into the cabinet. For instructions, see
Removing/Installing CPU Enclosure from Cabinet (BBU and BBS only) on page 34
5 Set the Power Switch to ON and reboot the game. See Hardware Key Administration on page
5-2 if the game does not boot.
6 Close and lock the game.
Removing/Installing When installing the Hardware Key into a BBU or BBS cabinet it may be necessary to remove the
CPU Enclosure from entire CPU Enclosure to more easily access the inside of the CPU Enclosure.
Cabinet (BBU and Reference the Maintenance Chapter of the appropriate cabinet Service Manual for instructions on
BBS only) removing and reinstalling the CPU Enclosure:
 Service Manual & User Guide 16-020838-xx: Bluebird Slant (BBS) Video Gaming Device
 Service Manual & User Guide 16-020834-xx: Bluebird Upright (BBU) Video Gaming Devices
 16-020835-xx Manual: Bluebird Upright (BBU) Mechanical Reel (3RM)
 Service Manual & User Guide 16-020835-xx: Bluebird Upright (BBU) Mechanical Reel Gaming
Device (3RM)
 Service Manual & User Guide 16-020836-xx: Bluebird Upright 4RM and 5RM Cabinet
(CPU-NXT and CPU-NXT2 OS)

Install Hardware Key This section describes the procedure to install the Hardware Key onto a RoHS or non-ROHS
Into RoHS CPU-NXT CPU-NXT in either a BBU or BBS. If you are in a jurisdiction that requires a USB Cover, proceed to
or Non-RoHS CPU one of the following sections:
NXT (BBU or BBS  Install Faceplate, Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto Non-RoHS CPU-NXT (Select
Only) Jurisdictions Only) on page 2-36
 Install Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto RoHS CPU-NXT (Select Jurisdictions Only) on
page 2-39
Complete the following steps to install the Hardware Key into a RoHS CPU-NXT:
1 Ensure that you are wearing an ESD Wrist Strap.
2 Unlock and open the Main Door/Hatch.
3 Turn the game OFF at the Power Switch.

January 2015
 Installing the Hardware Key 2-35
4 Locate the CPU Enclosure, Figure 2-55, and open the CPU Logic Door.
Figure 2-55 CPU NXT installed in BBU (left) and BBS (right).

5 Ensure that you have the correct Hardware Key that corresponds to the game theme,
Figure 2-56.
Figure 2-56 Hardware Key.

6 Install the Hardware Key into an available USB Port on the CPU, Figure 2-57 (A).
Figure 2-57 Hardware Key installed in CPU USB slot (BBU shown).

7 Set the Power Switch to ON and reboot the game. See Hardware Key Administration on page
5-2 if the game does not boot.
8 Close and lock the game.

16-020832
 2-36 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Install This section only applies to jurisdictions where a cover is required for USB peripherals connected
Faceplate, to the CPU. A kit (KIT-026502-00-00) is available to install a replacement CPU faceplate
Hardware Key (01-008296-06-00) that has mounting holes for a USB Cover.
and Protective
Cover onto Non-
RoHS CPU-NXT
(Select
Jurisdictions
Only)
Removing/Installing This procedure requires that the CPU Enclosure be removed from the cabinet. Reference the
CPU Enclosure from Maintenance Chapter of the appropriate cabinet Service Manual for instructions on removing and
Cabinet reinstalling the CPU Enclosure. See Reference Documentation on page 1-4 to identify the Service
Manual for each cabinet.
Remove Existing Complete the following steps to remove the existing CPU faceplate:
Faceplate 1 Ensure that the CPU Enclosure is removed from the cabinet.
2 Using a 3/16-inch nut driver, remove and set aside the six jack screws securing the CPU
faceplate to J14, J1000, and J11 on the CPU PCB, Figure 2-58.
Figure 2-58 Six Jack Screws on front faceplate.

3 Using a #2 Phillips head screwdriver, remove and retain the two Phillips head screws that
secure the CPU-NXT faceplate to the CPU Enclosure, Figure 2-59 (A) and Figure 2-59 (B).
Figure 2-59 Screws securing faceplate to CPU Enclosure.

B
A

January 2015
 Install Faceplate, Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto Non-RoHS CPU-NXT (Select Jurisdictions Only) 2-37
4 Grasp the top lip of the faceplate then pull back and up to disengage the faceplate from the
CPU Enclosure, Figure 2-60.

Figure 2-60 Removing/Installing a CPU faceplate.

Installing Complete the following steps to install the Replacement faceplate (01-008296-06-00) from the
Replacement conversion kit:
Faceplate 1 Take the faceplate (01-008296-06-00) from KIT-026502-00-00 and insert the bottom edge of
the faceplate into the space between the PCB and the enclosure, Figure 2-60 (A).
2 As you rotate the top of the faceplate towards the CPU, ensure that the cutouts on the
faceplate fit around J14, J1000, and J11 on the CPU PCB, Figure 2-61.
Figure 2-61 Faceplate cutouts fit around connectors.

3 Gradually adjust the faceplate so that it fits between the walls of the enclosure, is in its upright
location, and the screw holes are aligned, Figure 2-62.
Figure 2-62 Screws securing faceplate to CPU Enclosure.

B
A

16-020832
 2-38 Chapter 2: Software Installation

4 Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver secure the faceplate with the two screws removed earlier,
Figure 2-62 (A) and Figure 2-62 (B), tightening each screw until it is snug.
WARNING: Do not over-tighten the screws; the screws are thin and can break very easily.
5 Using a 3/16-inch nut driver, secure the faceplate to J14, J1000, and J11 on the CPU PCB with
the six jack screws removed earlier, Figure 2-63, tightening each screw until it is snug.
Figure 2-63 Six Jack Screws on front faceplate.

Installing Hardware Complete the following steps to install the Hardware Key and the Protective Cover:
Key and Protective
Cover
1 Install the Hardware Key into one of the available USB Ports, Figure 2-64 (A),
Figure 2-64 Install Hardware Key into USB Port.

2 Install the protective cover (01-025594-00-00) from the conversion kit over the Hardware Key,
Figure 2-65, by engaging the two studs on the cover with the two mounting holes in the CPU
faceplate, Figure 2-64 (B).
Figure 2-65 Install Hardware Key into USB Port.

January 2015
 Install Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto RoHS CPU-NXT (Select Jurisdictions Only) 2-39
3 On the inside of the CPU Enclosure, use a 5/16-inch nut driver to secure the protective cover to
the CPU faceplate with two 5/16'' hex nuts from the conversion kit, Figure 2-66 (A). The hex
nuts should only be tightened until they are snug.
Figure 2-66 Hex nuts securing USB Cover.

4 Reinstall the CPU Enclosure into the cabinet. For instructions, see Removing/Installing CPU
Enclosure from Cabinet on page 36.
5 Set the Power Switch to ON and reboot the game. See Hardware Key Administration on page
5-2 if the game does not boot.
6 Close and lock the game.

Install Hardware This section only applies to jurisdictions where a cover is required for USB peripherals connected
Key and to the CPU.
Protective
Cover onto
RoHS CPU-NXT
(Select
Jurisdictions
Only)
Removing/Installing This procedure requires that the CPU Enclosure be removed from the cabinet. Reference the
CPU Enclosure from Maintenance Chapter of the appropriate cabinet Service Manual for instructions on removing and
Cabinet reinstalling the CPU Enclosure. See Reference Documentation on page 1-4 to identify the Service
Manual for each cabinet.
Installing Hardware Complete the following steps to install the Hardware Key and Protective Cover onto the RoHS
Key and Protective CPU-NXT:
Cover 1 Ensure that the CPU Enclosure is removed from the cabinet. For instructions, Removing/
Installing CPU Enclosure from Cabinet above.
2 Install the Hardware Key into one of the available USB Ports, Figure 2-67 (A).
Figure 2-67 Install Hardware Key into USB Port.

B
B

A
A

16-020832
2-40 Chapter 2: Software Installation

3 Install the protective cover (01-025594-00-00) from the conversion kit over the Hardware Key,
Figure 2-68, by engaging the two studs on the cover with the two mounting holes in the CPU
faceplate, Figure 2-67 (B).
Figure 2-68 Install Hardware Key into USB Port.

4 On the inside of the CPU Enclosure, use a 5/16-inch nut driver to secure the protective cover to
the CPU faceplate with two 5/16-inch hex nuts from the conversion kit, Figure 2-69 (A). Only
tighten the hex nuts until snug.
Figure 2-69 Hex nuts securing USB Cover.

5 Reinstall the CPU Enclosure. For instructions, see Removing/Installing CPU Enclosure from
Cabinet on page 39
6 Set the Power Switch to ON and reboot the game. See Chapter 4,“Hardware Key
Administration” on page 4-29 if the game does not boot.
7 Close and lock the game.

January 2015
 Configuring the Game 2-41

Configuring the This section provides instructions for setting the minimum required OS options and enabling the
Game game for play. For greater detail about these and all menu options to begin game play, see Table of
Contents on page 3-1 to find specific information. Chapter 3 provides detailed information on all OS
options and settings.
OLED Button Starting with SSSG-000-1681, the Organic Light-Emitting Diode (OLED) Button Panel firmware
Firmware updates automatically if the detected firmware does not match the latest version. The message in
Figure 2-70 displays if an earlier firmware version is detected.
Figure 2-70 OLED Button Panel Firmware Update version 3.03 (example message).

Standard Perform the configuration of games in the following recommended order:

Configuration Order 1 Touch Screen Calibration, see Touch Screen Calibration on page 2-45.
2 Date and Time, see Setting the Date and Time on page 2-48.
3 Devices, see Setting Up Devices on page 2-50.
4 Machine Info, see Setting Up Machine Information on page 2-52.
5 Game Denominations, see Configuring Game Denomination Settings on page 2-68.
6 Pay Tables, see Setting up Pay Tables on page 2-73.
7 Communications, see Configuring Protocols with Comm Setup on page 2-77.
8 Voucher, see Setting Up Vouchers on page 2-85.
9 Game Volume, see Game Volume on page 2-87.
10 Host Comm, see Configuring Protocols with Comm Setup on page 2-77.
11 Max Bet, see Setting Up Max Bet on page 2-82.

16-020832
 2-42 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Configuration Order Perform the configuration of the Progressives in the following order:
for Stand-Alone 1 Touch Screen Calibration, see Touch Screen Calibration on page 2-45.
Progressives
2 Set up Date and Time, see Setting the Date and Time on page 2-48.
3 Set up Devices, see Setting Up Devices on page 2-50.
4 Set up Machine Info, see Setting Up Machine Information on page 2-52.
5 Set up Game Sound Volume, see Game Volume on page 2-87.
6 Set up Game Denominations, see Configuring Game Denomination Settings on page 2-68.
7 Configure Paytables, see Setting up Pay Tables on page 2-73.
8 Enable WMSP and other Host Protocols in the Serial Comm Setup Screen, see
Configuring WMSP Options on page 2-97.
9 Configure WMSP in the WMSP Level Setup Screen, see Setting Up WMSP on page 2-98.
10 Close the Main Door/Hatch. The Game loads in approximately 5-10 minutes.
11 All tilts clear, and the game goes into service.

NOTE: Progressive parameters are one-time settable. Once the settings are saved on these
parameters, a RAM clear is required to change the settings.
One-Time Settable The following parameters are one-time settable. If the values must be changed, a RAM clear is
Parameters required.
NOTE: Carefully set each of the following parameters, as these values may only be set one time,
requiring a RAM clear to reset.
Table 2-7 One-Time Settable Parameters.
Parameter Description
Denomination Enter game Base Denomination
Multiple Denominations Set game for Multiple Denominations
Pay Table Percentage Set game Pay Table Percentage
Machine Serial Number Enter game cabinet Serial Number
Asset Number Enter asset number for machine
Host Comm None, SAS Primary or SAS Secondary
Remote Hand Pay Reset Off, Enabled or Disabled
Remote Hand Pay Pending Off, Enabled or Disabled
Legacy Bonusing Off, Enabled or Disabled

Device Parameter If the Device field in the Device Configuration screen was initially set to one of the listed models,
Settings and the Service Technician would like to change the option to the None setting, they must perform a
RAM clear. If the Device field was initially set to a model, and the Service Technician would like to
select the None setting option, a RAM clear must be performed.
The only circumstance when a RAM clear is not necessary for modifying these parameters is when
the Service Technician is changing from one model to another model.
Table 2-8 Parameters/Descriptions.
Parameter Description
Ticket Printer Enable & Type Enter Ticket Printer model
Coin Acceptor Enable & Type Enter Coin Acceptor model
Hopper Enable & Type Enter Hopper model
Bill Validator Enable & Type Enter Bill Validator model

January 2015
 Configuring the Game 2-43
Setup Menu Complete the following steps to access the Setup Menu:
1 After the game reboots, a status message indicates that game configuration steps are needed,
Figure 2-71.
Figure 2-71 Example Pending Status message.

2 Open the Main Door/Hatch.

3 Press the DIAGNOSTIC button, Figure 2-72.
Figure 2-72 DIAGNOSIC button.

16-020832
2-44 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The Administration Menu displays, Figure 2-73.

Figure 2-73 Administration Menu.

4 Select Setup.
The Setup Menu displays, Figure 2-74.
Figure 2-74 Setup Menu.

5 The options required to configure the game after installing software are available from the
Setup Menu, Figure 2-74.

January 2015
 Configuring the Game 2-45
Touch Screen Calibrating the touch screen is a two-step process used to test the accuracy of screen placement.
Calibration The actual calibration is performed first, then the accuracy is tested using the Test Touch Screen
option on the Touchscreen Calibration screen.
Complete the following steps to calibrate the Touch Screen:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Touch Screen Setup, Figure 2-75.
Figure 2-75 Setup Menu.

The Touchscreen Calibration screen displays, Figure 2-76.

Figure 2-76 Touchscreen Calibration screen.

2 Select Test Touch Screen, Figure 2-76 (A).

16-020832
2-46 Chapter 2: Software Installation

NOTE: If the touch screen is not functional at this point, turn the Key three times to perform the
calibration.
3 Turn the Attendant Key clockwise.
4 Touch the + (cross) symbol in the lower left-hand corner, Figure 2-77 (A).
Figure 2-77 Touchscreen Test screen.

Touch at the Cross

5 Touch the + (cross) symbol in the upper right-hand corner, Figure 2-78 (A).
The screen is now calibrated.
Figure 2-78 Touchscreen Test screen.

Touch at the Cross

A

6 Turn the Attendant Key to exit and return to the Administration Menu.
7 To test the calibration, select Touch Screen Setup from the Setup Menu.

January 2015
 Configuring the Game 2-47
8 Select Test Touch Screen, Figure 2-79 (A), to test the accuracy of the screen calibration.
Figure 2-79 Touchscreen Calibration screen.

9 Touch a single location on the touch screen. The selected pixels display, Figure 2-80.
Figure 2-80 Touchscreen Test screen: selected pixels.

10 Turn the Attendant Key to exit and return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 2-48 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Setting the Date and The date and time must be set to maintain accuracy of game logs and other items. Complete the
Time following steps to set the date and time.
NOTE: OS versions SSOS-000-14A0, SSOS-000-1530, SSOS-000-1620, SSOS-000-1730, SSOS-
000-1830, SSOS-000-1910, SSSG-000-1200, and subsequent releases incorporate the new
Daylight Savings Time (DST) definitions for US and Canadian jurisdictions, per Energy Policy Act of
2005 (PUBLIC LAW 109-58-AUG.8, 2005). Beginning in 2007, DST begins at 2 a.m. on the second
Sunday of March and ends at 2 a.m. on the first Sunday of November.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Clock Setup, Figure 2-81.
Figure 2-81 Setup Menu.

The Date/Time screen displays, Figure 2-82. Time is on a 12 or 24-hour clock.

Figure 2-82 Date/Time screen.

NOTE: For SSG, the time and date are set automatically.
2 Select Change Time Zone, Figure 2-82 (A).

January 2015
 Configuring the Game 2-49
The Time Zone List screen displays, Figure 2-83.
Figure 2-83 Time Zone List screen.

3 Choose the appropriate time zone from the list and select Set, Figure 2-83 (A). The yellow text
indicates that there is a secondary Time Zone List screen, Figure 2-83.
4 To access Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) Time Zones, select Etc, Figure 2-83 (B). Selecting
Etc displays a Secondary Time Zone List screen with multiple GMT options, Figure 2-84.
Figure 2-84 GMT Time Zone List screen.

5 Choose the appropriate time zone and select Set, Figure 2-84 (A).
NOTE: GMT Time Zone designations are defined in Table 2-9:

Table 2-9 GMT Time Zones.

Time Zone Option
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)* Universal, Zulu, GMT+0, UCT, UTC, GMT-0, GMT0, Greenwich, GMT
East of GMT GMT - x
West of GMT GMT + x
* Multiple options denote the GMT time zone. Each of the listed options identifies the same time zone.
x = Number of hours from GMT.

6 At the Date/Time screen, change the time and date by selecting the individual fields, Figure 2-
82 (B).

16-020832
 2-50 Chapter 2: Software Installation

A numeric touchpad displays, Figure 2-85.

Figure 2-85 Date/Time numeric touchpad.

A
B
C

7 Using the numeric touchpad, enter a valid integer for the selected field, Figure 2-85.
8 Select Enter on the touchpad, Figure 2-85 (A), to save the setting.
9 If required for sychronization, reset the seconds to zero by selecting Reset Seconds,
Figure 2-85 (B).

Setting Up Devices Complete the following procedure to set up the devices installed in the game:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | Device
Setup, Figure 2-86.
Figure 2-86 Cabinet Setup Menu.

January 2015
 Configuring the Game 2-51
The Device Configuration screen displays, Figure 2-87.
Figure 2-87 Device Configuration screen.

A
B

2 Select each device field to scroll through the available device options until the correct device is
selected.
3 Test the Printer configuration by selecting Print Void Voucher, Figure 2-87 (A).
The Printer prints a void voucher.
4 When each device is correctly set, select Save and Exit, Figure 2-87 (B).
5 Select Exit. The Administration Menu displays.

16-020832
 2-52 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Setting Up Machine The Machine Info settings are optional, and no tilt condition occurs if this setting is not entered
Information during game setup. Machine Information may be used to identify individual games, especially for
voucher printing purposes.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Machine Info Setup,
Figure 2-88.
Figure 2-88 Machine Setup Menu.

The Machine Info Setup screen displays, Figure 2-89.

Figure 2-89 Machine Info Setup screen.

2 Select the Serial Number field, Figure 2-89 (A).

January 2015
 Configuring the Game 2-53
A numeric keypad displays, Figure 2-90.
Figure 2-90 Machine Info Setup screen - Serial Number keypad.

3 Using the numeric keypad, enter the Serial Number for the game, and select Enter on the
numeric window, Figure 2-90 (A).
NOTE: Enter the Serial number carefully, as a RAM clear is required if the incorrect serial
number is entered.
4 Select Set Serial to the right of the Serial Number field, Figure 2-90 (B). The serial number is
saved.
NOTE: For voucher (ticket) systems using the SAS protocol, confirm the information desired to
be printed on the Voucher in the area identified as the Asset # (or Machine #) field. If an Asset
Number is entered in this configuration screen, this is the number that will be printed on the
voucher. If this entry is left blank in the configuration screen, the Host ID will be printed on the
voucher.

16-020832
2-54 Chapter 2: Software Installation

5 If applicable, touch inside the Asset Number field.

A numeric keypad displays, Figure 2-91.
6 Using the numeric keypad, enter the Asset Number for this game and select Enter on the
numeric keypad, Figure 2-91 (A).
Figure 2-91 Machine Information Setup - Asset Number Keypad.

NOTE: Enter this value carefully, as a RAM clear is required if the incorrect asset number is
entered.
7 Select Set Asset to the right of the Asset field, Figure 2-91 (B).
The asset number is saved.

January 2015
 Location Setup Overview 2-55
The Machine Info Setup screen displays the message that both Serial and Asset Numbers are
set, Figure 2-92 (A).
Figure 2-92 Machine Info Setup - complete screen.

8 Select Exit. The Administration Menu displays.

Location Setup The Location Setup screen is used to specify how many games are in a bank, and how the bank is
Overview arranged for Emotive Lighting on Blade, Gamefield xD, BBxD and BB2e games. The information
entered in the Location Setup screen is communicated to the Emotive Lighting Controller to ensure
that the lighting display across the bank matches the lighting show design.
NOTE: Some bank-wide games, such as Pirate Battle, use the Location Setup screen information
without connecting to the Emotive Lighting Controller.
Figure 2-93 shows the Location Setup screen.
Figure 2-93 Location Setup screen.

16-020832
2-56 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Location Setup Table 2-10 describes the Location Setup screen fields.
Screen Fields and
Descriptions Table 2-10 Location Setup screen fields and descriptions.
Field Description
Zone A Zone can be designated as any number, and is determined by the casino for the purpose of
organizing separate Groups of games. A Zone can include multiple groups.
A Zone number must be entered to complete a location setup.
Group The Group field can be any number and is determined by the casino as a means of
designating a specific number of connected games within a Zone. A Group can include
multiple units.
A Group number must be entered to complete a location setup.
Units in Group The number of units in a group of connected games.
Units in Group is a required field that must be entered to complete a location setup.
Unit The number of the specific game within a Group of connected games. This is a required field.
Gaming Machines If the game ends are not touching, the game bank is in a Line bank configuration. For Line
are in a Line. bank configurations, games are configured in the left-to-right direction, beginning with the unit
(with check box) numbered One.
Gaming Machines If the game bank forms a continuous shape, the bank is considered a Circle bank
are in a Circle. configuration. For example, the games in a Circle bank configuration could be set up in
(with check box) various configurations, such as a triangle, circle, rectangle, pentagon, or square shape. For
Circle bank configurations, select a game and work from right-to-left direction.
Tag This field is reserved for future use and not currently used.

NOTE: The following fields are required to complete the Location Setup:

 Zone
 Group
 Units in Group
 Unit
 Location Setup (Line or Circle)

January 2015
 Location Setup Overview 2-57
Zone, Group, and Each game in a bank requires a unique Unit number (1-N), all with the same Zone number and
Unit Number Group number. Each bank that is linked together by means of the Emotive Lighting Controller
Configurations requires a unique Zone/Group number combination. If the banks are not linked, then the Zone and
Unit numbers can be reused. Each game must be configured with a unique combination number
for Zone-Group-Unit. For example, 1-1-1, 1-1-2, 1-1-3 for Zone 1, Group 1, 3 games.
Location Setup Figure 2-94 shows the Location Setup diagram with the Zone, Group, and Units.
Diagram The Zone is comprised of one or more numbered Groups that contain Units (games). The Group is
comprised of one or more banks of Units.
Figure 2-94 Location Setup Diagram with Zone, Group, and Units.

Zone 1

Group 1
Group 2

Unit Unit Unit Unit

Unit
Unit
Unit
Group 3

Unit Unit Unit

Unit
Unit

Figure 2-95 shows that the Groups comprised of two game banks located back-to-back must have
different Group numbers.
Figure 2-95 Group configuration with two banks located back-to-back.
Unit

Unit
Unit
Unit

Group 1 Group 2
Unit
Unit
Unit

Unit

16-020832
 2-58 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Line and Circle Bank The Location Setup screen lists two different types of game bank configuration categories: the
Configurations Circle bank configuration and the Line bank configuration. If the game bank ends are not touching,
the game bank is a Line configuration. If the game bank forms a continuous shape, the game bank
is a Circle configuration.
Circle Bank Circle bank configurations form a continuous shape, not only a circle shape. For example, the
Configurations games in a Circle bank configuration could be set up in various configurations, such as a triangle,
circle, rectangle, pentagon, or square shape. For Circle bank configurations, select a game and
work from right-to-left direction. The cables should not be wired in a loop, instead there should be
a beginning and an end.
Figure 2-96 shows several example game Circle configurations.
Figure 2-96 Example Circle game bank configurations.

For games in the Circle configuration, set up the games in the right-to-left direction,
Figure 2-97.
Figure 2-97 Circle game bank configuration direction.
For Circle configurations, set up the games in the right-to-left direction.

January 2015
 Location Setup Overview 2-59
Line Bank If the game ends are not touching, the game bank is in a Line bank configuration. For Line bank
Configurations configurations, games are configured in the left-to-right direction, beginning with the unit numbered
One.
Figure 2-98 shows several example Line game bank configurations. When configuring the Line
game bank, begin with the left game (numbered 1), and configure the games in the left-to-right
direction.
Figure 2-98 Example Line game bank configurations.

For games in the Line configuration, set up the games in the left-to-right direction starting with the
game numbered one, Figure 2-99.
Figure 2-99 Line game configuration direction.

Unit 1

For Line configurations, set up the games left-to-right direction starting with the game numbered One.

Unit 1

16-020832
2-60 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Location Setup Figure 2-100 shows the Location Setup diagram with the Zone, Group, and Units. The Zone is
Diagram comprised of one or more numbered Groups that contain Units (games). The Group is comprised of
one or more banks of Units.
Figure 2-100 Location Setup Diagram with Zone, Group, and Units.

Zone 1

Group 1 Group 2

Unit Unit Unit Unit

Unit
Unit
Unit
Group 3

Unit
Unit Unit Unit Unit

Figure 2-101 shows that the Groups comprised of two game banks back-to-back that must have
different Group numbers.
Figure 2-101 Group configurations.
Unit

Unit
Unit
Unit

Group 1 Group 2
Unit
Unit
Unit

Unit

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-61

Configuring the Complete the following procedure to configure the Location Setup screen to specify how many
Location Setup games are in a bank, and how the bank is arranged.
Screen 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | Location
Setup, Figure 2-102.
Figure 2-102 Cabinet Setup Menu.

The Location Setup screen displays, Figure 2-103.

Figure 2-103 Location Setup screen.

16-020832
2-62 Chapter 2: Software Installation

2 Select the Zone field, Figure 2-104 (A).

The Zone Keypad displays, Figure 2-104 (B).
Figure 2-104 Location Setup screen - Zone Keypad.
A

3 Enter the Zone number in the keypad, then select Enter, Figure 2-104 (C).
4 Select the Group field, Figure 2-105 (A).
The Group Keypad displays, Figure 2-105 (B).
Figure 2-105 Location Setup - Group Keypad.
A

5 Enter the Group number in the keypad, then select Enter, Figure 2-105 (C).

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-63
6 Select the Units in Group field, Figure 2-106 (A).
The Units in Group keypad displays, Figure 2-106 (B).
Figure 2-106 Location Setup screen - Units in Group keypad.

7 Enter the number of Units in the Group into the keypad and select Enter, Figure 2-106 (C).
8 Select the Unit field, Figure 2-107 (A).
The Unit keypad displays, Figure 2-107 (B).
Figure 2-107 Location Setup screen - Unit keypad.

9 Enter the Unit number in the keypad and select Enter, Figure 2-107 (C).

16-020832
2-64 Chapter 2: Software Installation

10 Select the check box for the appropriate configuration for the location setup:
 Gaming Machines are in a Line, Figure 2-108 (A).
 Gaming Machines are in a Circle, Figure 2-108 (B).

Figure 2-108 Location Setup screen - Line or Circle configuration check box.

A B

A check mark displays in the selected configuration, Figure 2-108 (C).

11 When all of the appropriate fields have been entered, exit the Location Setup Menu by
selecting Return to Game or Exit.

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-65
Setting Up XD The XD Lighting Setup screen is used to adjust the intensity of the Attract and In Play lighting for xD-
Lighting enabled games. Complete the following procedure to set up XD lighting.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | XD Setup |
XD Lighting Setup, Figure 2-109.
Figure 2-109 XD Setup Menu.

The XD Lighting Setup screen displays, Figure 2-110. The XD Lighting Setup screen is used to
adjust the Attract and In Play lighting displays for xD-enabled cabinets.
Figure 2-110 XD Lighting Setup screen.

2 To adjust the lighting intensity for the Attract or In Play lighting, slide the indicator,
Figure 2-110 (A), up or down, or select + (plus) or - (minus).
The game lighting adjusts to reflect the sample each time the lighting setting is modified.
3 When the lighting is set to the preferred level, select Save and Exit, Figure 2-110 (B).

16-020832
2-66 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Setting Up XD Environmental Control Server (ECS) stores events from the EGMs, and based on those events runs
Environmental the casino or area wide lighting and sound shows. The ECS setup involves entering the IP Address
Control Server and Port number for the game.
(ECS) 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | XD Setup |
XD ECS Setup, Figure 2-111.
Figure 2-111 XD Setup Menu.

The Environmental Control Server Setup screen displays, Figure 2-112.

Figure 2-112 Environmental Control Server Setup screen.

2 Select the IPv4 Address field, Figure 2-112 (A).

The IP Address keypad displays, Figure 2-113.

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-67
3 Enter the IP Address for the Environmental Control Server in the IP Address keypad,
Figure 2-113.
Figure 2-113 Environmental Control Server Setup screen - IP Address keypad.

4 Select the Port field, Figure 2-113 (A).

The Port Number keypad displays, Figure 2-114.
Figure 2-114 Environmental Control Server Setup screen - Port keypad.

5 Enter the Port Number for the Environmental Control Server in the Port keypad,
Figure 2-114 (B).
6 Select Save and Exit to save the settings and exit the Environmental Control Server Setup
screen.

16-020832
 2-68 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Configuring Game Credit Setup is extremely important and involves game play money amounts and maximum quantity
Denomination limitations determined by the casino, the taxation authority, and, in some cases, jurisdictional
Settings requirements. The game denomination sets the value of coin that the game accepts and on which it
bases the award value. The Credit Limits screen, Figure 2-116, is used to set limits for the following:
 Bill and Coin-In Limit
 Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) and Voucher-In Limit
 Credit Limit
 Jackpot Limit
 Progressive Limit
 Hopper and Printer Limits
 Upper Jackpot Limit
 Coin Pay Limit

NOTE: Confirm the following before starting this section:

 No credits are on the game before proceeding with these instructions.
 Once set, a RAM clear is required to change these settings.

1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Credit Setup, Figure 2-115.
Figure 2-115 Setup Menu.

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-69
The Credit Limits screen displays, Figure 2-116.
Figure 2-116 Credit Limits screen.

2 If special currency formatting is required, select Denom Formatting, Figure 2-116 (A).
NOTE: This option must be selected after the Bill Acceptor is set, but before a Base
Denomination is assigned.
The Denom Formatting screen displays, Figure 2-117.
Figure 2-117 Denom Formatting screen.

3 Select the appropriate currency formatting for the denomination.

4 Select Save.
The Credit Limits screen displays.

16-020832
2-70 Chapter 2: Software Installation

5 Select the Base Denom field, Figure 2-118 (A).

The numeric keypad displays, Figure 2-118 (B).
Figure 2-118 Credit Limits screen and numeric keypad.
B

Table 2-11 lists the Credit Limit fields and descriptions.

Table 2-11 Credit Limit Fields.

Field Definition
Bill and Coin In Limit The maximum amount of cash that the jurisdictions limit the total value of cash that can be
accepted and this the maximum amount of that value.
AFT and Voucher In Limit Sets the maximum amount that is accepted from an AFT transaction or a single voucher.
NOTE: In most regions, set this field to the Credit Limit amount. DO NOT set this value to
0 (zero) if vouchers are to be accepted by the game.
Credit Limit The maximum amount of credits that may be shown on the credit meter at any time. Set
the maximum amount of credits the machine holds. When exceeded, it triggers an
automatic payout.
NOTE: The maximum acceptable value for the Credit Limit field is 10,000,000.00
(10 million) currency units.
Jackpot Limit The level at which a single win amount will cause the gaming machine to display a
Jackpot Win. Set this field to the amount of money which, when reached or exceeded,
requires the intervention of an attendant.
Multi-Denom If applicable, enables or disables the multi-denomination feature.
Hopper Limit The maximum amount of coins that can be paid by the Hopper during a single
transaction. Set the maximum amount (in dollars) that can be paid by the machine (before
a hand pay is required).
Printer Limit The maximum value that may be printed for a voucher. Set the maximum amount (in
dollars) that the Printer may produce.
Progressive Limit The Progressive Limit Field is used only by certain International Jurisdictions. Progressive
Limit, when enabled in a Jurisdiction, applies to ALL Progressive Awards, SAP (Scaling or
Non-Scaling), WAP, and LAP.
Upper Jackpot The highest amount of money from a Jackpot Handpay that can be put back on the Credit
Meter in High Stakes gaming machines through a Remote Handpay Reset with SAS
systems. The limit must be set equal to or lower than the Credit Limit and equal to or
higher than the Jackpot Limit.
Coin Pay Limit This limit is used in conjunction with the Split Pay option when both a Hopper and a
Printer are enabled on a gaming machine. Set the maximum amount (in dollars) that the
Hopper can pay when split pay is enabled.
NOTE: When both the Hopper and the Printer are enabled, the Coin Pay Limit is
unavailable until Split Pay is enabled.
When the Hopper is enabled and there is no Printer, the Hopper Limit determines the
amount of coins paid.

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-71
6 Using the numeric keypad, enter the denomination for the game, Figure 2-118 (B).
NOTE: Carefully enter this value, as a RAM clear is required if the incorrect denomination is
entered.
7 Select Enter, Figure 2-118 (C), to save the Base Denomination setting.
8 Enter each limit value per your jurisdiction or location. The denominations that are available are
displayed Figure 2-118 (D). See Table 2-11 for field descriptions.
9 Select Set, Figure 2-118 (E).
10 Match a paytable with each desired denomination. Continue to the next section to set the pay
tables.
NOTES:
 The Credit Limits screen displays the valid denominations for the game, Figure 2-118.
 The Progressive Limit field is used only by certain jurisdictions. Progressive Limit, when enabled
in a jurisdiction, applies to ALL Progressive Awards, SAP (Scaling or Non-Scaling), WAP, and
LAP.
 If a field is entered incorrectly, a message displays at the bottom of the screen and the conflicted
field is highlighted in red. Green fields are correctly resolved.

Cash Out and Complete the following steps to configure the cash out and promotional options:
Promotional 1 Select Cash Out Promotional Options on the Credit Limits screen, Figure 2-119 (A).
Options
Figure 2-119 Credit Limits screen - Cash Out and Promotional Options.

The Cash Out Options screen displays, Figure 2-120.

16-020832
2-72 Chapter 2: Software Installation

2 Select the Cash Out Options depending on your jurisdictional requirements.

Figure 2-120 Credit Limits - Cash Out Options.

3 Select Save to save the options selected, Figure 2-120 (A).

The Cash out options screen Save Confirmation screen displays, Figure 2-121.
Figure 2-121 Cash out options screen - Save Confirmation.

4 Select Yes to confirm that data was modified and should be saved, Figure 2-121 (A).

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-73
Setting up Pay In Table 2-12, Paytable naming conventions are listed along with their description, abbreviation, and
Tables an example of the paytable as listed in the Denomination Configuration screen, Figure 2-124.
Table 2-12 Paytable Naming Conventions.
Paytable Description Abbreviations Paytable Example
Wide Area Progressive Prog:WAP MonoATB-40-86-pW-jNV-d1c
Local Area Progressive Prog:LAP MonoATB-20-86 86.12% Prog: LAP Denom: 5c
Stand-alone Progressive (no Prog:SAP Ddublin-9-90 90.12% MaxBetPerLine: 20 Prog: SAP
controller)
Wide area and Local Area Prog:WALAP MonoATB-20-86 86.34% Prog: WALAP Jur: NV Denom: 5c
progressive
Wide area and Stand-alone Prog:WASAP MonoATB-20-86 86.12% Prog: WASAP Denom: 5c
progressive
Wide area, Local area, and Prog:WLSAP MonoATB-20-86 86.12% Prog: WSLAP Denom: 5c
Stand-alone progressive
PORTAL PT ValiantKnight-20-90 90.12% Portal
Nevada Jurisdiction Jur: NV WizardOfOzII-20-92 92.12% Prog: WAP Jur: NV
Native American Jurisdiction Jur: NA MonoATB-20-86 86.12% Prog: WAP Jur: NA Denom: 5c
United Kingdom jur Jur: UK JkptBlockParty-40-96 96.12% Jur: UK
US (Domestic) Domestic GoldFishRFTG-25-90 90.12% Domestic
International International GoldFishRFTG-25-90 90.34% International

NOTE: For Portal games, progressive and non-progressive paytables should not be selected with
the same game.

16-020832
2-74 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Complete the following steps to select the paytable to use for each individual denomination.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Credit Setup, Figure 2-122.
Figure 2-122 Setup Menu.

The Credit Limits screen displays, Figure 2-123.

Figure 2-123 Credit Limits screen.

2 Select Denom Configuration, Figure 2-123 (A).

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-75
The Denom Configuration screen displays, Figure 2-124.
Figure 2-124 Denom Configuration screen.

3 Select the denomination to configure.

The available paytables for the selected denomination display, Figure 2-125.
Figure 2-125 Denom Configuration screen.

A B C

Denoms are sorted by the following criteria:

 All, Figure 2-125 (A), displays all denoms.
 Assigned, Figure 2-125 (B), displays denoms that have been assigned paytables.
 Unassigned, Figure 2-125 (C), displays denoms that have not been assigned paytables.

16-020832
2-76 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Figure 2-126 describes the paytable naming conventions.

Figure 2-126 Paytable Naming Conventions.

Cheese Caper-20-89-MAXBET8 89.06%

game name max coins per exact

line or game percentage
line (view last button
configuration on Top and
Bottom lines)
percentage level

NOTE: If the theme is a LAP/WALAP progressive game, the paytable must match the theme
and max bet amount selected in the Site Controller or Local Controller software configuration.
4 If Multi-Denom is enabled, repeat step 2 and step 3 until all valid denominations are assigned
paytables.
5 When complete, select Save, Figure 2-125 (D).
The Denom Configuration - Warning screen displays, Figure 2-127.
Figure 2-127 Denom Configuration - Warning screen.

6 Select YES to confirm the Reel Strips and Pay Glass match the game configured in the
software, and proceed and save the game configuration options, or NO to return to the
previous screen, Figure 2-127.

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-77
Configuring The Communication (Comm) Setup Menu enables the configuration of protocols and other settings
Protocols with for the host system. Complete this portion of the game configuration based on the specific
Comm Setup jurisdiction and site requirements.
Dual Host Settings
The instructions below provide a generic Dual Host setup, with Host Comm 1 set to SAS Primary.
Complete this portion of the game configuration based on the specific jurisdiction and site
requirements.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | Serial Ports, Figure 2-128.
Figure 2-128 Comm Setup Menu.

The Serial Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 2-129.

Figure 2-129 Serial Comm Setup screen.

A B

2 Select the Host Comm I field to scroll through available options, Figure 2-129 (A).
3 Select Config (to the right of the Host Comm I field), Figure 2-129 (B), to set additional features
for SAS.

16-020832
2-78 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The SAS Setup screen displays, Figure 2-130.

Figure 2-130 SAS Setup screen.

4 Select the correct settings by touching inside the available fields and scrolling or toggling
through the available options until the correct value is selected, Figure 2-130 (A).
5 Select Save, Figure 2-130 (B).
The Serial Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 2-131.
Figure 2-131 Serial Comm Setup screen.

6 Select Set to save the Comm settings, Figure 2-131 (A).

7 Select Host Setup, Figure 2-131 (B).

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-79
The Host Setup screen displays, Figure 2-132.
Figure 2-132 Host Setup screen.

8 Select each field to scroll or toggle through the available options until the correct settings are
selected, Figure 2-132 (A).
9 Select Save, Figure 2-132 (B).
See Table 2-17 for Host Comm Field definitions.
If selecting the SAS Primary host protocol, see Table 2-13 on page 2-80 through Table 2-17 on
page 2-81 for reference.

16-020832
2-80 Chapter 2: Software Installation

NOTE: In general, assign Accounting Host System to Host Comm 1 and Ticketing Host System
on Host Comm 2; or, this may be reversed per customer request.

Table 2-13 Single Host with ticketing.

Host
Host Comm 1 Comm 2

Remote Resend
Ticketing Handpay Handpay
Accounting Host Host Address Protocol Reset Pending Host Config
ACSC none 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Standard, Enhanced,
System
Bally - SAS 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled System
CDS - DOS 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Standard
CDS - Windows 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Enhanced
OASIS
GSI - Crystal Web 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Enhanced
GSI - Signet (SDI) 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Standard
IGS 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Standard, Enhanced
Konami 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Enhanced
Mikohn 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Enhanced

Table 2-14 Single Host without ticketing.

Host
Host Comm 1 Comm 2

Remote Resend
Ticketing Handpay Handpay
Accounting Host Host Address Protocol Reset Pending Host Config
Acres none 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
CDS - DOS 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
CDS - Windows 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
OASIS
GSI - Grips Crystal 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
Web
GSI - Grips Signet 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
(SDI)
IGS 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
Konami 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
Mikohn 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled

Table 2-15 E-Z Pay System.

Remote Resend
Ticketing Handpay Handpay
Accounting Host Host Note Address Protocol Reset Pending Host Config
EZ-Pay* 1 - 50 SAS Disabled** Enabled Enhanced EZ-Pay* 1 - 50 (unique)
(unique)

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-81
Table 2-16 Dual Host Systems - E-Z-Pay.
Remote Resend
Ticketing Handpay Handpay
Accounting Host Host Note Address Protocol Reset Pending Host Config
ACSC EZ-Pay* None Disabled** Enabled
IGS None Disabled** Enabled
Konami None Disabled** Enabled
Mikohn None Disabled** Enabled
GSI None Disabled** Enabled
EDT None Disabled** Enabled

* Unless requested by customer.

** In general, assign Accounting Host System to Host Comm 1 and Ticketing Host System on Host Comm 2; or, this may be
reversed if customer requests.

Table 2-17 Host Comm I Field definitions.

SAS
Slot Accounting System (SAS) is IGT’s proprietary communication protocol. SAS allows for three different
types of validation in support of ticketing.
Field/Term Definition
Address Game identifier. If using point-to-point communication, this setting is usually
1. If using multi-drop (multi-point) communication, this setting must be
assigned by the casino or system administrator.
Validation Standard Validation: Ticket out capabilities supported, with the Ticket
Validation number created by the machine. The Ticket cannot be inserted
into another game, as the system is unable to validate the ticket.
System Validation: Ticket in/Ticket out capabilities supported, with the
Validation number generated by the host.
Enhanced (Secured) Validation: Ticket in/Ticket out capabilities supported
with the Validation numbers generated by the machine and sent to the host.
Exceptions Messages sent by the game to the host to report game events.
General Exceptions Include messages on the general functioning of the game, door openings,
Hopper full, and any hardware or software issues.
Status Exceptions Include messages on the current game status, such as whether the game is
in play, tilt condition, idle, or disabled.
Security Exceptions Include messages that affect game security, such as entering Administrative
options, modifying game setup options, or starting or shutting down game
play.
Tilt Exceptions Include tilts encountered by the game.
Remote Handpay Reset Controls whether the game supports remote handpay reset by the host.
Jackpot Reset to Credit Enable credits over the Jackpot Limit to be reset to the Credit meters.
Resend Handpay Pending Controls whether the game reports handpay pending exceptions every
fifteen seconds until handpay information is recorded by the host.

16-020832
 2-82 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Setting Up Max Bet Some of the Max Bet options are predetermined based on jurisdictional limits and restrictions. The
Max Bet options may be controlled by the SPI, which may set the available denominations, as well
as the Max Bet. Perform the following procedure to set up Bets Per Line, Min Bet Per Line, and Max
Bets.
NOTE: The game must be fully loaded before this option can be set.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Game Setup, Figure 2-133.
Figure 2-133 Setup Menu.

The Game Setup screen displays, Figure 2-134.

Figure 2-134 Game Setup screen.

2 Select the game under Advanced Options, Figure 2-134 (A).

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-83
The Game Setup - Advanced Options screen displays, Figure 2-135.
Figure 2-135 Game Setup - Advanced Options screen.

3 Select Bet Options, Figure 2-135 (A).

The Game Setup - Bet Options screen displays, Figure 2-136.
Figure 2-136 Game Setup - Bet Options screen.

C
A

4 If applicable, select the Must Bet All Lines field, Figure 2-136 (A) and toggle YES to require
the player to bet all the lines.
5 If applicable, select the Min Bet Per Line field, and toggle through the available values for the
desired minimum amount of credits per line, Figure 2-136 (B).
6 Select Denom to choose an available denomination, Figure 2-136 (C).

16-020832
2-84 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The Available Denominations dialog box displays with the available denominations for the
game, Figure 2-137.
Figure 2-137 Game Setup - Available Denominations dialog box.

7 Highlight the appropriate denomination and select Set, Figure 2-137 (A).
8 Select Max Bet value for the denomination, Figure 2-137 (B).
The Max Bet Dialog box displays with the Available Max Bet options, Figure 2-138 (A).
Navigate to additional maximum bets by selecting Next and Prev.
Figure 2-138 Game Setup - Available Max Bet Dialog Box.

9 Highlight the desired Max Bet and select Set, Figure 2-138 (B). The default Max Bet is typically
the number of lines times five.
10 If applicable, repeat steps 6 through 9 until all available denominations are configured.

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-85
NOTE: The OLED Panel is updated automatically during play.
11 Select Save and Exit on the Game Setup screen, Figure 2-139 (A), to save the settings and
exit.

Figure 2-139 Game Setup screen.

NOTE: The Max Bets Not Set tilt is cleared after the settings are saved. A window displays with the
Available Max Bet options.
Setting Up Vouchers If not using this game with a host system that automatically controls the printed voucher information
and validation, this sequence enables the manual entry of the information printed on the voucher.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Voucher/Bill Setup | Voucher Data Setup,
Figure 2-140.
Figure 2-140 Voucher/Bill Setup Menu.

16-020832
2-86 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The Voucher Data Setup screen displays, Figure 2-141.

Figure 2-141 Voucher Data Setup screen.

2 Using the Voucher Data Setup keyboard, Figure 2-141 (A), type the following:
 Location
 Address 1
 Address 2
 Amount of days until voucher Expiration that prints on the voucher.
NOTE: Select Caps Lock to change the keyboard from lower to upper case, and to replace
numbers with symbols, Figure 2-141 (B).
3 If no expiration is desired for vouchers, leave the Expiration field blank, Figure 2-141 (C).
4 Select Save to save your selection, Figure 2-141 (D).
5 Select Exit to go back to the Administration Menu or Return to Game to enter the game mode,
Figure 2-141 (E).

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-87
Game Volume The game volume is preset at a WMS-recommended level, although you may opt to reset the
volume. Complete the following steps to set the volume level:
NOTE: Some game themes may include special features and bonus rounds that play at a volume
that varies from the master setting. Lowering or increasing the setting adjusts the relative volume of
all game sounds, including, if applicable, any special or bonus sounds.
1 Stand directly in front of the Bose® speakers. Position your head where a player's head would
be located during normal game play. Standing off to either side of the game cabinet while
adjusting volume levels results in an inaccurate setting, Figure 2-142.
Figure 2-142 Volume Setup positioning.

2 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Sound Setup, Figure 2-143.
Figure 2-143 Setup Menu.

16-020832
2-88 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The Sound Setup screen displays, Figure 2-144.

Figure 2-144 Sound Setup screen.

3 To adjust the volume, slide the volume indicator, Figure 2-144 (A), up or down, or select
the + (plus) or - (minus) fields.
The game produces a sound sample each time the volume setting is modified.
4 Once the volume is set to the preferred level, select Save, Figure 2-144 (B).

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-89
Configuring If installing the software onto a game with a Progressive system (LAP, WAP, MLP), continue with the
Progressives following steps to configure the Progressive options.
Obtaining MAC Address
Complete the following steps to gather game information and contact Central Operations:
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Unlock and open the Main Door/Hatch.
3 Perform a RAM clear.
4 Press the DIAGNOSTIC button.
The Administration Menu displays.
5 Select Diagnostics | Machine Info | System Information, Figure 2-145.
Figure 2-145 Machine Info Menu.

The System Information screen displays, Figure 2-146.

6 Scroll down to view the MAC Address fields, Figure 2-146.
The MAC Addresses for both ethernet ports (CPU-NXT3.2 and CPU-NXT2) display.
Figure 2-146 System Information screen - MAC Address information.

16-020832
 2-90 Chapter 2: Software Installation

7 Note the MAC Address, as this information is required to connect to the Progressive System,
Figure 2-142 (A).
8 If the Progressive System is a WAP, contact Central Operations to begin the process of
configuring the games in the Central System: 1-800-701-0072 or New Jersey: 609-569-0100.
NOTE: MAC Address is CPU-specific. If you replace the CPU for any reason, the game MAC
address information will change and you must contact Central Operations with this updated
information.
Progressive Options Complete the following steps to configure Progressive options:
Configuration 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | Serial Ports, Figure 2-147.
Figure 2-147 Setup - Comm Setup Menu.

The Serial Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 2-148.

Figure 2-148 Serial Comm Setup screen.

2 Select the Progressive Type field and choose WMSP (WMS Progressive), Figure 2-148 (A).
3 Select Set to save the settings. The WMSP settings are directly transferred from the
Progressive System, Figure 2-148 (B).
4 Select CONFIG, Figure 2-148 (C), to view the protocol feature settings.

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-91
The WMSP Level Setup screen displays, Figure 2-149. This screen lists information on the
game status, MAC Address, protocols, baud rate, and enabled Progressive level(s).
Figure 2-149 WMSP Level Setup screen.

16-020832
 2-92 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Testing Progressive Complete the following steps to test the Progressive settings.
Settings
WMSP Traffic Statistics
Select WMSP Traffic Statistics to view information on the traffic statistics between the game and
the Progressive System. Perform the following procedure to access the WMSP Traffic Statistics
screen.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
WMSP Diagnostics | WMSP Traffic Statistics, Figure 2-150.
Figure 2-150 WMSP Diagnostics Menu.

The WMSP/WSLL Traffic Statistics screen displays, Figure 2-151. View data transfer
information between the game and the Progressive System.
Figure 2-151 WMSP/WSLL Traffic Statistics screen.

2 Select Exit.

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-93
WMSP Link Statistics
Select WMSP Link Statistics to view information on the link statistics between the game and the
Progressive System. Perform the following procedure to access the WMSP Link Statistics screen.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
WMSP Diagnostics | WMSP Link Statistics, Figure 2-152.
Figure 2-152 WMSP Diagnostics Menu.

The WMSP Link Statistics screen displays, Figure 2-153.

Figure 2-153 WMSP Link Statistics screen.

2 Select Exit.

16-020832
2-94 Chapter 2: Software Installation

SPN Traffic Statistics

Select SPN Traffic Statistics to view data transfer information between the game and the SPN
devices.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
SPN Diagnostics | SPN Traffic Statistics, Figure 2-154.
Figure 2-154 SPN Diagnostics Menu.

The SPN Traffic Statistics screen displays, Figure 2-155.

Figure 2-155 SPN Traffic Statistics.

2 Select Exit.

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-95
SPN Link Statistics
Select SPN Link Statistics to view information on the link between the game and the SPN
device(s).
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
SPN Diagnostics | SPN Link Statistics, Figure 2-156.
Figure 2-156 SPN Diagnostics Menu.

The SPN Link Statistics screen displays, Figure 2-157.

Figure 2-157 SPN Link Statistics.

2 Select Exit.

16-020832
2-96 Chapter 2: Software Installation

SPN Device Diagnostics

Select SPN Device Diagnostics from the menu to test SPN devices.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
SPN Diagnostics | SPN Device Diagnostics, Figure 2-158.
Figure 2-158 SPN Diagnostics Menu.

The SPN Device Diagnostics screen displays. The SPN Device Diagnostics screen lists all
available SPN devices, Figure 2-159.
Figure 2-159 SPN Device Diagnostics screen.

2 To perform an SPN device diagnostic test, select Start next to the appropriate device,
Figure 2-159 (A).
The Device Diagnostics screen displays the device actively running its diagnostic test,
Figure 2-160.
Figure 2-160 Active SPN Device Diagnostic example.

3 To end the diagnostic test, select Stop, Figure 2-160 (A).

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-97
4 Select Exit to return to the Diagnostics Menu, Figure 2-158.
See Table 2-18 for information on the individual SPN device diagnostic tests.

Table 2-18 SPN Device Diagnostic tests.

Test Description
Mech Reels The Mechanical Reels spin to the home position and then revolve from symbol
to symbol. The lights for the Mechanical Reels also light in sequence.
Payline Lights up all the paylines.
Progressive Meter Changes the color of the Progressive Meter display.
Reel Illuminator Lights up all Reel Illuminator LEDs.

Configuring WMSP Complete the following procedures to configure the Scaling Progressive options.
Options Enabling WMSP as the Serial Protocol
In this procedure the Serial Comm Setup screen is used to enable WMSP as the Serial Protocol.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | Serial Ports, Figure 2-161.
Figure 2-161 Comm Setup Menu.

The Serial Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 2-162. The Serial Comm Setup screen allows
configuration of the Progressive Type WMSP.
Figure 2-162 Serial Comm Setup screen.

B
B

NOTE: Perform Steps 2 and 3 if applicable.

2 Select the Host Comm I Field, and select Config, Figure 2-162 (A).

16-020832
2-98 Chapter 2: Software Installation

3 Select the Host Comm II Field, and select Config, Figure 2-162 (A).
4 Select Progressive Type WMSP, and select Config, Figure 2-162 (B).
5 Select Set, Figure 2-162 (C) to save the Host Comm I, Host Comm II, and Progressive
settings.
The following message displays on the Serial Comm Setup screen:
CommI/CommII will be disabled. Do you want to save these settings? Figure 2-163.
Figure 2-163 Serial Comm Setup Screen - Dialog.

6 Select Yes to save the settings, Figure 2-163 (A).

Setting Up WMSP WMSP setup is performed using the WMSP Level Setup screen, Figure 2-164.
NOTE: The WMSP Level Setup screen by default displays with some fields automatically set up.
1 After configuring the Serial Ports, the WMSP Level Setup screen displays with a dialog box
displaying the following message: Some options were automatically set for you. Select OK,
Figure 2-164 (A).
Figure 2-164 WMSP Level Setup - Options Setup Dialog Box.

The WMSP Level Setup screen, Figure 2-164, displays information for each progressive level
defined in the selected paytable. The WMSP Level Setup screen allows you to configure
certain parameters for each Standalone Progressive (SAP) level.
NOTE: These parameters are one-time settable only. Once settings are saved, a RAM clear is
required to change the settings.

January 2015
 Configuring the Location Setup Screen 2-99
The Next and Prev buttons on the WMSP Level Setup screen, Figure 2-164 (B), are used to
switch Progressive Pools. For pools that are split by denom, the title contains the name of the
pool, the paytable, and the denomination.
2 Perform the actions indicated by the messages in the red Status Bar, Figure 2-165 (A). These
messages indicate what actions need to be performed before you can save your settings.
Figure 2-165 WMSP Level Setup screen - Status Bar Messages.

After all required updates are made, the Save button becomes enabled, Figure 2-166 (A).
Figure 2-166 WMSP Level Setup screen - Enabled.

3 After the changes are complete in the WMSP Level Setup screen, select Save,
Figure 2-166 (A).

16-020832
2-100 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The WMSP Level Setup Confirmation Dialog Box displays, Figure 2-167.
Figure 2-167 WMSP Level Setup - Save Request Confirmation Dialog Box.

4 Select Yes to confirm if all changes have been made, or No if you have not completed the
changes, Figure 2-167 (A).
The WMSP Level Setup Max Bets dialog box, Figure 2-168, displays.
Figure 2-168 WMSP Level Setup - Max Bets Dialog

The Max Bets dialog box states that the progressive configuration is not complete until the Max
Bets are saved after the game finishes loading. The settings in the screen are cached once
Max Bets are set. If the machine is power cycled prior to configuring the Max Bets, you need to
reconfigure progressives using the WMSP Level Setup screen.
5 Select OK to continue, Figure 2-168 (A).
NOTE: If the you fail to enable all SAP levels by the WMSP Level Setup screen, the game is
disabled with a “Progressive Unconfigured” message, but not a “Progressive disabled machine”
message.

January 2015
 Network Gaming Setup and Configuration 2-101

Network Network Gaming setup and configuration is required in order to use a Portal game such as Ultra Hit
Gaming Setup Progressive, or to perform remote configuration from an on site G2S Host. In these procedures the
and EGM acquires certificates from the Certificate Authority for secure network communications, and
Configuration the EGM is configured to connect to the Central Game Controller (CGC).
NOTE: Certificate enrollment is performed only if IGT’s SBX is the Primary Host. Certificate
generation must be completed before proceeding to the Ethernet IP setup and configuration
procedures.
There are two procedures associated with the Network Gaming Setup and Configuration:
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with the WMS AOM as the Primary Host
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with IGT SBX as the Primary Host

Network Gaming The following terms are used in the Network Gaming Setup and Configuration procedures,
Terms Table 2-19.
Table 2-19 Network Gaming Terms.
Term Definition
AOM (WMS) Administration, Operations, and Maintenance system. This refers to the network component
that implements Game-to-System capabilities and communicates with the EGMs.
Base Game What WMS has referred to in the past as the theme. A Base Game is differentiated from a
Portal Game in that Base Games can be played by themselves, whereas a Portal game can
only be played if a Base game is also played.
CGC Central Game Controller is a server connected to the AOM, Media Controller, and the EGM by
means of casino network.
EGM Electronic Gaming Machine.
G2S Game-to-System protocol used for communications between the AOM and EGM.
Media Controller A WMS network component that controls an Overhead Sign.
Network Name Server or The Network Name Server resolves host names and domain names to IP addresses on
Domain Name Server networks that use the TCP/IP protocol. In the current architecture, the IP address of the
Network Name Server is the same as the IP address of the CGC because it resides on the
same server.
Portal Client The portion of a Portal game that runs on the EGM and is typically the display element of the
Portal game. The Portal Client may also contain minimal logic, but this is typically limited to
general functionality such as ensuring wagers are successfully sent to the Portal Master. The
Portal Client may consist of three independent pieces: 1) art and sound resources, 2) display
logic in the form of Javascript, and 3) a separate executable responsible for implementing the
general functionality.
Portal Game A “theme” or game concept that is implemented as a Portal. It can also refer collectively to all
of the various components needed to implement the game concept, including display and
logic components on the EGM, CGC, and Media Controller, and any configuration files
required at the AOM.
Remote Configuration and The process of delivering software updates and configuration changes by means of a server
Download (RCD) on a network to the EGMs.
SB Director (IGT) IGT’s SB Director (SBX), is a Game-to-System host developed by IGT for Network Gaming.
SBG Server Based Gaming.
SCEP Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol.

16-020832
 2-102 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Certificate The following terms are used in the Certificate Enrollment and Generation procedures, Table 2-20.
Enrollment and Table 2-20 Certificate Terms.
Generation Terms Term/Field Definition
Accept Certificate Button Accept Certificate Button is used to acknowledge that the Certificate’s identity is valid.
After the SCEP URL is entered, and Get Root Button is selected, the Fingerprint displays.
Select Accept Certificate to accept the Certificate, and the Generate Certificate Button
becomes active. Enter the Certificate information such as Country, Organization, etc, and
select Generate Certificate Button to create a new certificate.
Certificate A digital certificate or identity certificate is an electronic document that uses a digital
signature to associate a public key with an identity.
Challenge Password Optional. This is used only if the server requires a challenge password.
Common Name Field The Common Name is the EGM identification. This identification is automatically picked up
and displayed on the Certificates Screen. Note: This name should not be edited or deleted.
Flash Certificate X.509 certificates used for Flash communications.
Fingerprint A short sequence of bytes used to authenticate a longer public key.
Generate Certificate Button Generate Certificate Button is used to create a Certificate.
Get Root Button Get Root Button requests a Root Certificate from the SCEPServer.
G2S Certificate Game-to-System Communication Certificate.
Reject Certificate Button Reject Certificate Button is used to deny the certificate.
Root Certificate Root certificate is the top-most certificate of the tree, the private key of which is used to
"sign" other certificates.
SCEP Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol.
SCEP URL The Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) URL is entered in the Scep Url Field in
the Certificates Screen. The SCEP URL is the IP address of the Certificate Signing Server.

EGM Configuration Table 2-21 describes the components necessary to obtain from the casino operator prior to
Worksheet for beginning the configuration of the EGM for portal gaming.
Network Gaming Table 2-21 Network Gaming EGM Configuration Worksheet.
Component IP Address/URL Host ID Format Example
WMS AOM Enter the WMS AOM IP Address/URL Here 10.100.10.20:55555
IGT SB Director Enter the IGT SB Director Address/URL Here 10.100.72.58:21777
WMS CGC/NNS Enter the WMS AOM IP Address/URL Here N/A 10.100.10.53
SCEP Server/URL Enter the WMS AOM IP Address/URL Here N/A 172.23.48.60:80/crtsrv/mscep

Machine Ethernet IP The Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen is used to configure settings to enable communication from
Setup Screen the EGM to the CGC, Figure 2-169.
Figure 2-169 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

January 2015
 Network Gaming Setup and Configuration 2-103
Table 2-22 describes Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen fields.
Table 2-22 Machine Ethernet IP Setup Fields.
Field Description Action
Interface Name Name of the physical interface device. Automatically populated.
Hardware Address MAC address for the game in hexadecimal Automatically populated.
format.
EGM IP Address Network IP address of the game. Automatically populated.
Subnet Mask Subnet mask of the game. Automatically populated.
Gateway Address IP address of the router. Automatically populated.
Enable CGC This option allows the EGM to connect to Select YES to enable this option.
the CGC.
CGC Communication This option enables the CGC to Select Required.
communicate with the EGM.
Portal Reconfiguration This option controls the reconfiguration of This option defaults to NO to restrict
Allowed the EGM. Certain jurisdictions do not allow reconfiguration of the EGM.
the reconfiguration of the EGM.
Select YES to allow reconfiguration of the EGM.
If the YES option is selected, the EGM can
be reconfigured.
If the NO option is selected, the EGM can
be configured only once, and must be RAM
cleared to be reconfigured.
Network Name Server IP address for the Network Name Server. If the AOM is the primary host, the Network Name
In the current architecture, the Network Server is automatically populated. If the SBX is the
Name Server is running on the CGC Server, primary host, manually enter the Network Name
therefore has the same IP address as the Server IP address.
CGC.
EGM Port Number Ethernet Port number of the game. Enter the Ethernet Port Number.
SSL Secure Socket Layer. Select enabled or disabled for this option.
SB Location The location of where the SB window is  Set the SB Location Field to Top for Lava
placed. This is an optional field that is used machines.
for the Lava and Bluebird games.
 Set the SB Location Field to Right for Video
Bluebird machines.
Host ID The Host ID must be set to either 1 for  If AOM is the Primary Host, select 1 for the
Primary Host, or 2 for Secondary Host. Host ID, and enter WMS for the Vendor.
1 = Primary Host  If AOM is the Secondary Host, select 2 for the
Host ID, and enter WMS for the Vendor.
2 = Secondary Host
 If IGT is the Primary Host, select 1 for the Host
ID, and enter IGT for the Vendor.
 If IGT is the Secondary Host, select 2 for the
Host ID, and enter IGT for the Vendor.
Vendor The name of the Vendor that is associated Select IGT or WMS.
with the Host ID.
URL The IP address and port of the Host. Enter the IP Address and Port of the host.
For example, 10.100.10.52:55558

16-020832
 2-104 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Setup and In the following procedure, the AOM is configured as the Primary Host, and SBX as the Secondary
Configuration of Host.
the EGM with
AOM as the
Primary Host
Configuring the Perform the following procedure to configure the EGM to connect to the CGC with the AOM as the
EGM to Connect to Primary Host:
the CGC 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Machine IP Setup,
Figure 2-170.
Figure 2-170 Machine Setup Menu.

The Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen displays, Figure 2-171.

Figure 2-171 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with AOM as the Primary Host 2-105
Configuring the Machine Ethernet IP Setup Screen for Communication to the CGC
The Enable CGC field must be configured on the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen in order to
allow communication to the CGC. Complete the following procedure to configure the Enable CGC
field.
1 Set the Enable CGC field on the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen to YES in order to connect
to the CGC, Figure 2-172 (A).
Figure 2-172 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

After the Enable CGC Field is set to YES, the AOM updates the CGC Communication field to
Required, and automatically populates the Network Name Server field, Figure 2-173 (A).
Figure 2-173 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen - CGC Communication Field Updated.

2 Set the Portal Reconfiguration Allowed field as needed. This option controls the
reconfiguration of the EGM. Certain jurisdictions do not allow for the reconfiguration of the
EGM.
 If the YES option is selected, the EGM can be reconfigured.
 If the NO option is selected, the EGM can be configured only once, and must be RAM cleared
to be reconfigured.

16-020832
 2-106 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Configuring G2S to G2S (Game-to-System) must be configured in order to communicate with Administration,
Communicate with Operations, and Maintenance (AOM) system.
the AOM The following fields must be configured in order for the AOM to communicate with the EGM.

 Host ID
 Vendor ID
 URL

Perform the following procedure to configure the G2S Configuration fields on the Machine Ethernet
IP Setup screen to establish communication with the AOM system.
1 In the SSL field, select Enabled, Figure 2-174 (A).
Figure 2-174 Machine Ethernet IP screen.

B A

2 Enter the Host Id by selecting the Host Id field, Figure 2-174 (B).
The Host ID Keypad displays, Figure 2-175.
Figure 2-175 Host ID Keypad - Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

3 Enter the Host Id and select Enter, Figure 2-175 (A).

Enter Host Id 1 for the AOM as the Primary Host, and enter the Host Id 2 for the Secondary
Host - IGT.

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with AOM as the Primary Host 2-107
4 Choose WMS for the Vendor for the Host ID 1, Figure 2-176 (A).
Figure 2-176 URL Keyboard - Machine Ethernet IP Screen.

A
B

5 Choose IGT for the Vendor for the Host ID 2, Figure 2-176 (B).
6 Enter the URL by selecting the URL Field on the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.
The URL Keyboard displays, Figure 2-176.
7 Enter the IP Address and the Port Number, Figure 2-176 (C).
For example:
10.100.10.50:55555
NOTE: The Port Number and IP Address must be verified with the casino.
8 Select Set, Figure 2-176 (D), to save the changes.

16-020832
 2-108 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Setup and SB Director (SBX), is a Game-to-System host developed by IGT for remote configuration and
Configuration of download purposes for Network Gaming. The following procedure provides instructions for the
the EGM with configuration and setup of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host.
SBX as the The setup and configuration must be performed in the following order:
Primary Host
 Certificate Generation for the EGM
 Ethernet IP Setup and Network Configuration

NOTE: Certificate generation must be performed before proceeding to the Ethernet IP setup and
configuration process. Certificate generation is only performed if SBX is the Primary Host.
Four certificates must be generated for the EGM, two for G2S communications, and two for Flash
communications.
The following two certificates must be generated for G2S communications:
 Root Certificate
 G2S Certificate (used for G2S communications)
The following two certificates must be generated for Flash communications:
 Root Certificate
 Flash Certificate (used for Flash communications)
Certificate Certificate generation is performed in the following order:
Generation Order  Enter the SCEP URL.
 Select Get Root Button.
 After the Fingerprint displays, select Accept Certificate Button.
 Enter the Certificate Information Fields including Country, State, Location, Organization, etc.
 Select the Generate Certificate Button to create a new Certificate.

Generating G2S The following procedures describe the method of generating the signed SCEP Certificates from the
Certificates for the EGM. The Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) URL is entered in the SCEP Url field in
EGM the Certificates screen. The SCEP URL is the IP address of the Certificate Signing Server.
NOTE: Certificate generation is performed only if SBX is the Primary Host. Network
Communications cannot be established unless the Certificates are generated.

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host 2-109
Generating a Root Certificate for G2S Communications
Perform the following procedure to generate a Root Certificate for G2S communications.
1 Select Setup | Machine Setup | Certificate Setup, Figure 2-177.
Figure 2-177 Machine Setup Menu.

The Certificates screen displays, Figure 2-178.

Figure 2-178 Certificates screen - SCEP Field.

2 Select the SCEP Url field in the Root Certificate section of the Certificates screen,
Figure 2-178 (A).

16-020832
2-110 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The SCEP URL Keyboard displays, Figure 2-179.

Figure 2-179 SCEP URL Keyboard.

A B

3 Enter the SCEP Url, Figure 2-179 (A).

NOTE: The following SCEP URL is shown as an example.
Please contact the administrator to confirm the correct SCEP URL.
For example:
10.100.10.32:80/crtsrv/mscep
4 Select Enter on the SCEP URL keyboard to submit the SCEP URL, Figure 2-179 (B).
The SCEP URL displays in the SCEP URL field of the Certificates screen, Figure 2-180 (A).
Figure 2-180 SCEP URL Field.

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host 2-111
5 Select Get Root, Figure 2-181 (A).
Figure 2-181 Certificates screen - Fingerprint displayed.

The Fingerprint displays in the Fingerprint field, Figure 2-181 (B).

6 Select Accept Certificate to acknowledge the Certificate, Figure 2-182 (A).

Figure 2-182 Certificates screen - Certificate Successfully Downloaded and Installed to EGM.

Generate Certificate button becomes active and the Fingerprint displays,

Figure 2-182 (B).

16-020832
2-112 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Generating a G2S Certificate for G2S Communications

Complete the following procedure to generate a G2S Certificate to establish G2S Communications.
1 Select the fields to enter the certificate information for G2S, Figure 2-183 (A).
Figure 2-183 Certificate Information Fields for G2S.

The Organization Keyboard for entering certificate information displays, Figure 2-184.
Figure 2-184 Organization Keyboard - Certificates screen.
A

2 Enter the Country, State, Location, Organization, Organization Unit, Validation Period (in
days), and Challenge Password (if required), Figure 2-184 (A).
3 Select Enter after each value is entered on the keyboard to submit the information,
Figure 2-184 (B).

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host 2-113
4 Select Generate Certificate, Figure 2-185 (A).
Figure 2-185 Certificates screen.
B

The Fingerprint of the Root Certificate is displayed in the Certificates screen, Figure 2-185 (B).
5 Once the Certificate is generated, the Fingerprints display in the Fingerprints field
Figure 2-186 (A).

Figure 2-186 G2S Certificate Generation Completed.

Two Fingerprints display when the G2S certificate generation process is successfully
completed, Figure 2-186 (A).

16-020832
2-114 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Generating Generating a Root Certificate for Flash Communications

Certificates for Perform the following procedure to generate a Root Certificate for Flash Communications.
Flash
Communications
1 Select Next, Figure 2-187 (A), on the Certificates screen.
Figure 2-187 Certificates Screen - Next Button.

The Certificates screen displays with the Flash Certificate Information fields, Figure 2-188.
Figure 2-188 Certificates screen - Flash.

2 Select the SCEP Url field, located on the Certificates screen, Figure 2-188 (A).

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host 2-115
The SCEP URL Keyboard displays, Figure 2-189.
Figure 2-189 Certificates screen - SCEP URL Keyboard.

3 Enter the SCEP URL, Figure 2-189 (A).

4 Select Enter on the SCEP URL Keyboard to submit the SCEP URL, Figure 2-189 (B).
NOTE: The following SCEP URL is shown as an example.
Please contact the administrator to confirm the correct SCEP URL.
For example:
10.100.10.32:80/crtsrv/mscep
5 Select Get Root, Figure 2-190 (A).
Figure 2-190 Certificates screen.

The Fingerprint displays in the Fingerprint field, Figure 2-190 (B).

6 Select Accept Certificate, Figure 2-190 (C).

16-020832
2-116 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Generating a Flash Certificate for Flash Communications

1 Select the Country field, Figure 2-191 (A).
Figure 2-191 Certificates screen - Country Field.

The Country Keyboard for entering Flash Certificate Information displays, Figure 2-192.
Figure 2-192 Keyboard for Entering Flash Certificate Information.

2 In the keyboard input area enter the appropriate Country for the Certificate, Figure 2-192 (A).
3 Select Enter on the keyboard to submit the information, Figure 2-192 (B).
4 Enter the State, Location, Organization, Organization Unit, Validation Period, and
Challenge Password (if required).

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host 2-117
5 Select Generate Certificate, Figure 2-193 (A).
Figure 2-193 Certificate screen - Generate Certificate.

The Fingerprints display in the Fingerprint fields, Figure 2-194 (A).

Figure 2-194 Certificates screen - Fingerprint displayed.

Two Fingerprints display when the Flash certificate generation process is successfully
completed, Figure 2-194.

16-020832
2-118 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The Certificates - Save Confirmation screen displays, Figure 2-195.

Figure 2-195 Certificates - Save Confirmation screen.

6 Select Yes to Save the Certificates, Figure 2-195 (A).

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host 2-119
Configuring G2S - Perform the following procedure to configure the EGM to connect to a CGC or Bank Controller (for
Configuring the Portal Systems). The following fields must be configured on the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen
EGM to Connect to in order to allow communication to the CGC:
the CGC  Enable CGC field on the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen must be set to YES in order to
connect to the CGC, Figure 2-196 (A).
 G2S Configuration fields on the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen must be configured in
order to communicate with the AOM, Figure 2-196 (B).
Figure 2-196 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Machine IP Setup,
Figure 2-197.
Figure 2-197 Machine Setup Menu.

16-020832
2-120 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen displays, Figure 2-198.

Figure 2-198 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

2 Set the Enable CGC field to YES, Figure 2-199 (A).

Figure 2-199 Enabling CGC on Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

The CGC Communication field automatically sets to Required, Figure 2-200 (A).

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host 2-121
3 Enter the Network Name Server IP Address manually by selecting the Network Name Server
field in the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen, Figure 2-200 (B).
Figure 2-200 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen - CGC Communication field updated.

The Network Name Server Keyboard displays, Figure 2-201 (A).

Figure 2-201 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen - Keyboard.

4 Enter the Network Name Server IP Address, select Enter, Figure 2-201 (B), and then select
Set, Figure 2-201 (C).

16-020832
 2-122 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The Network Name Server IP Address information entered displays in the Network Name
Server field, Figure 2-202 (A).
Figure 2-202 Machine Ethernet IP Setup - Network Name Server.

Configuring G2S G2S (Game-to-System) section of the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen must be configured in
Section on Machine order to communicate with SBX.
Ethernet IP Setup The following fields in the G2S Configuration section of the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen must
Screen to be configured in order to communicate with the EGM:
Communicate with
SBX  Host ID, Figure 2-203 (A)
 Vendor ID Figure 2-203 (B)
 URL Figure 2-203 (C)

1 Enter the Host ID by selecting the Host Id field, Figure 2-203 (A).
Figure 2-203 Machine Ethernet IP screen.

A C

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host 2-123
The Host ID Keypad displays, Figure 2-204 (A).
Figure 2-204 Host ID Keypad - Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

2 Enter the Host ID as 1 and select Enter, Figure 2-204 (B).

The Host ID 1 displays, Figure 2-205 (A).
Figure 2-205 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

A C

3 Enter IGT as the Primary Host Vendor for Host ID 1, Figure 2-205 (B).
4 Enter the URL for the Primary Host ID 1, by selecting the URL field in the Machine Ethernet IP
Setup screen, Figure 2-205 (C).

16-020832
2-124 Chapter 2: Software Installation

The URL Keyboard displays, Figure 2-206.

Figure 2-206 URL Keyboard - Machine Ethernet IP screen.

5 Enter the IP Address and the Port Number, Figure 2-206 (B).
For example:
10.100.10.50:55555
6 Select the second Host ID row. Enter Host ID 2 for WMS.
7 Enter the vendor as WMS.
8 Enter the IP Address and the Port Number, Figure 2-206 (B).
For example:
10.100.10.50:55555
NOTE: The Port Number and IP Address need to be verified with the casino. The examples that
are listed in this procedure are not actual IP Addresses that can be used.
9 Select Set to save the changes, Figure 2-206 (C).
10 Set the type of machine in the SB Location field, Figure 2-207 (A).
 Set the SB Location field to Top for Lava machines.
 Set the SB Location field to Right for Video Bluebird machines.
Figure 2-207 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen - SB Location Field.

January 2015
 Setup and Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host 2-125
Viewing Paytable The following procedures enable verification of the successful application of the portal connection to
Information for a game.
Portal Games Perform the following procedure to view paytable configuration information:

1 From the Administrative Menu, select Portal | Portal Connections, Figure 2-208.
Figure 2-208 Portal Menu.

The Portal Connections screen displays, Figure 2-209.

Figure 2-209 Portal Connections screen.

B A

2 To view the base game paytable associated with the portal paytable, use the arrow on the
Select an Associated Portal field to scroll through available portal paytables, Figure 2-209 (A).
The associated base game paytable(s) display(s) in the Select a Paytable field,
Figure 2-209 (B).

16-020832
2-126 Chapter 2: Software Installation

Viewing Portal Select Portal Meters to view the statistics of money played and won. Portal Master displays values
Meters since the game was installed, and Portal Period displays the data from the last period meter reset.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Portal | Portal Meters | Portal Master, Figure 2-210.
Figure 2-210 Portal Meters Menu.

The Portal Accounting screen displays, Figure 2-211.

Figure 2-211 Portal Accounting screen.

2 View the Portal associated with a base game paytable by using the arrow on the Select an
Associated Portal field to scroll through available portals, Figure 2-211 (A).

January 2015
 Beginning Game Play 2-127

Beginning The game is now configured for play. Complete the following steps to finish this procedure:
Game Play 1 Select Return to Game to close the Administration Menu and return the game to play,
Figure 2-212.
Figure 2-212 Game Play screen.

2 Close the Main Door/Hatch and lock the game.

16-020832
 Chapter 3
Software Administration

Table of  Table of Contents.................................................................................3-1

Contents  Overview...............................................................................................3-5
 Accounting Menu.................................................................................3-5
Accounting - Machine Accounting.............................................................3-5
Accounting - Game Accounting - Game Master........................................3-7
Accounting - Game Accounting - Wager Categories.................................3-8
Accounting - Game Accounting - Game Statistics ....................................3-9
Accounting - Game Accounting - Game Period ...................................... 3-11
Game Accounting - Denomination Master ..............................................3-12
Game Accounting - Denomination Period...............................................3-13
Accounting - Protocol Accounting - Progressive Accounting -
Progressive Master .................................................................................3-14
Accounting - Protocol Accounting - Progressive Accounting ..................3-15
Accounting - Protocol Accounting Progressive Accounting -
Current Amounts .....................................................................................3-16
Protocol Accounting - Protocol Meters....................................................3-17
Accounting - Bill Accounting....................................................................3-19
Accounting - Bill Clearance Accounting ..................................................3-20
Accounting - Security Accounting ...........................................................3-21
Accounting - Error Accounting ................................................................3-22
Accounting - Clear Period Accounting ....................................................3-23
 Diagnostic Menu ................................................................................3-24
Diagnostics - Machine Info - System Information ................................... 3-24
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Program Version Information..................... 3-25
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Hard Drive List (CPU-NXT2, CPU-NXT3.2) 3-26
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Software Validation.................................... 3-28
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Fault Logs.................................................. 3-29
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Boot Log .................................................... 3-30
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Health Monitor ........................................... 3-31
Diagnostics - Machine Info - DRM Information ....................................... 3-32
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Machine Info Commands .......................... 3-33
Diagnostics - Jurisdiction Information - Jurisdiction Limits...................... 3-37
Diagnostics - Jurisdiction Information - Jurisdictional Bit Codes............. 3-38
Diagnostics - Input/Output Diagnostics - Door I/O Diagnostics .............. 3-39
Diagnostics - Input/Output Diagnostics - Lamp Matrix Diagnostic .......... 3-41
Diagnostics - Input/Output Diagnostics - Cabinet I/O Diagnostics .......... 3-42
Diagnostics - Input/Output Diagnostics - Mechanical Arm Diagnostic .... 3-43
Diagnostics - Input/Output Diagnostics - Processor I/O Diagnostics ...... 3-44
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics .................................................. 3-45
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics - Bill Validator ........................... 3-46
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics - Coin Acceptor......................... 3-49
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics -Hopper .................................... 3-50
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics -Printer ..................................... 3-51
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics - Card Reader .......................... 3-53
Diagnostics - Cash Device Diagnostics - DFU........................................ 3-54
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics.............................................................. 3-55
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - Color Purity........................................ 3-55
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - Dot Alignment .................................... 3-58
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - Graph Alignment................................ 3-59

January 2015
16-020832
3-2 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - White Temp .............................................3-60

Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - Contrast ..................................................3-61
Diagnostics - Video Diagnostics - EDID Data ...............................................3-62
Diagnostics - Sound Diagnostics - Speakers................................................3-63
Diagnostics - Sound Diagnostics - Sound Calls ...........................................3-65
Diagnostics - Sound Diagnostics - Playlist Calls ..........................................3-67
Performing Ethernet Diagnostics Using the Message Delay/Loss Screen ...3-68
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - Ethernet Diagnostics |
Network Connection Diagnostics..................................................................3-71
Diagnostics - WMSP Diagnostics - WMSP Traffic Statistics.........................3-72
Diagnostics - WMSP Diagnostics - WMSP Link Statistics............................3-73
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics- SPN Diagnostics -
SPN Traffic Statistics ....................................................................................3-74
Diagnostics - SPN Diagnostics - SPN Link Statistics ...................................3-75
Diagnostics - SPN Diagnostics - SPN Devices Diagnostics .........................3-76
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics - OLED Button Panel3-78
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics - Emotive Controller3-79
Accessing the I2C Lights Diagnostic Screen .....................................................3-81
MUX Port Mapping to Controller Port ................................................................. 3-83
Emotive Lighting Controller EL SyncApp, EL SyncTransport, and
EL SyncMedia...............................................................................................3-84
Emotive Lighting Controller - DMX Fixture ...................................................3-85
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics - USB Mech Panel ..3-87
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics - Motion Chair .........3-88
Diagnostics - Network Diagnostics - Location Diagnostics...........................3-89
Location Setup Diagnostics Screen Fields and Definitions ..........................3-89
Location Diagnostics - Identify Node ............................................................3-91
Location Diagnostics - Restart Bank Shows.................................................3-92
Diagnostics - Emotive Lighting Controller Troubleshooting Chart ................3-93
Diagnostics - G2S Diagnostics -G2S Traffic Statistics..................................3-94
 History Menu .......................................................................................... 3-95
History - Game Play......................................................................................3-95
History - Event ..............................................................................................3-96
History - Bill Acceptor....................................................................................3-98
History - Cash Out ........................................................................................3-99
History - Hand Pay......................................................................................3-100
History - Coin Mech History ........................................................................3-101
History - Voucher In ....................................................................................3-102
History - Voucher Out History .....................................................................3-103
History - Voucher Reject History.................................................................3-104
History - Cashless Bonus History ...............................................................3-105
History - Cashless Funds In........................................................................3-106
History - Cashless Transfer - Cashless Funds Out History ........................3-107
History - SSG History..................................................................................3-108
History - SSG Download History.................................................................3-109
History - Hard Drive Log ............................................................................. 3-110
History - Progressive Events ...................................................................... 3-111
History - DHCP Options Info....................................................................... 3-112
 Setup Menu............................................................................................ 3-113
One-time Settable Parameters ...................................................................3-113
Setup - Touch Screen Setup.......................................................................3-114
Testing Accuracy for the Screen Calibration..................................................... 3-116
Setup - Clock Setup....................................................................................3-118
Setup - Machine Setup - Machine Info Setup ............................................ 3-121

January 2015
 Table of Contents 3-3
Setup - Machine Setup - Cabinet Setup - Device Setup....................... 3-124
Testing Printers .....................................................................................3-125
Setup - Machine Setup - Cabinet Setup - Location Setup ....................3-127
Setup - Machine Setup - Cabinet Setup - EGM Physical Setup ...........3-130
Setup - Machine Setup - Cabinet Setup - XD Setup -
XD Lighting Setup .................................................................................3-131
Setup - Machine Setup - Cabinet Setup - XD ECS Setup ....................3-132
Setup - Machine Setup - Language Setup............................................3-134
Setup - Machine Setup - Machine IP Setup..........................................3-135
Configuring G2S Section on Machine Ethernet IP Setup Screen to
Communicate with SBX .............................................................................3-138
Setup - Machine Setup - Certificate Setup............................................3-141
Generating a G2S Certificate for G2S Communications............................3-144
Generating a Root Certificate for Flash Communications..........................3-146
Generating a Flash Certificate for Flash Communications.........................3-148
Setup - Machine Setup - OCSP Setup..................................................3-151
Setup - Machine Setup - Static IP Setup ..............................................3-152
Setup - Machine Setup - Operating Hours............................................3-153
Setup - Machine Setup - Perform RAM Clear.......................................3-154
Performing a RAM Clear from Administration Mode ..................................3-154
Performing a RAM Clear from a Fault (if permitted in jurisdiction).............3-155
Performing a RAM Clear using the DIAGNOSTIC Button
(if permitted in jurisdiction) .........................................................................3-156
Setup - Machine Setup - Apply G2S Commands..................................3-157
Setup - Credit Setup .............................................................................3-158
Setting up Paytables .............................................................................3-160
Selecting Paytables ..............................................................................3-161
Enabling the Subtoken Wager Feature ......................................................3-164
Setting Up Cash Out and Promotional Options ....................................3-166
Setup - Denom Configuration and Paytable Selection -
Poker xD Games...................................................................................3-170
Setup - Communication Setup - Serial Ports ........................................3-176
Setup - SAS Progressive Setup............................................................3-181
Handpay Reset and Win to Credit Meter Functionality with
SAS Systems ........................................................................................3-184
Set the Jackpot Limits ................................................................................3-184
Set the SAS Options ..................................................................................3-185
Configure the SAS System ........................................................................3-185
Setup - Comm Setup - Wager Account Transfer (WAT) Setup .............3-186
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup:
Registering Games ......................................................................... 3-189
Setup - Comm Setup | Protocol Version ...............................................3-190
Setup - WMSP Setup............................................................................3-191
Obtaining the MAC Address from a Game............................................3-192
Setup - Game Setup - Double Up Autoplay Max Bet Feature
(for Select Themes) ..............................................................................3-194
Game Setup - Advanced Options - Bet Options ...................................3-195
Setup - Game Setup - Advanced Options - Game Options ..................3-199
Setup - Game Setup - Choose Your Style ............................................3-202
Setup - Game Setup - Diagnostic Options - Paytable Test (Video) ......3-205
Setup - Game Setup - Diagnostic Options - Paytable Test
(Blade Mech Reel) ................................................................................3-208
Setup - Voucher/Bill Setup - Voucher Data Setup................................. 3-211
Setup - Voucher/Bill Setup - Bill Validator Denom Setup ......................3-212
Setup - Sound Setup.............................................................................3-213

16-020832
3-4 Chapter 3: Software Administration

 Portal Menu ........................................................................................... 3-215

Portal Connection ....................................................................................... 3-215
Portal - Portal Meters.................................................................................. 3-216
 Out of Service ....................................................................................... 3-217
 X-Series Support (NSW Only) .............................................................. 3-218
Progressive Accounting ...............................................................................3-218
Current Progressive Amounts......................................................................3-219
Diagnostics - Machine Info - Machine Identification ....................................3-220
History - Game History - Game Play Data...................................................3-221
Setup - Credit Setup ....................................................................................3-223
Setup - Comm Setup ...................................................................................3-224
Software Validation......................................................................................3-227
Handpays ....................................................................................................3-228
P1-P6 X-Series Connection Failure.............................................................3-229
 Configuration Mode.............................................................................. 3-231
 Big Event Server Menu......................................................................... 3-232
Big Event Server - Event History .................................................................3-232
Big Event Server - Big Event Sound Calls...................................................3-233
Setting Up Big Event Automatic Sound Schedule .......................................3-234
Big Event Server - BE Server Sound Calls..................................................3-237
Big Event Server - Language Configuration (International Versions Only)..3-238
 Using SVC/GAT ..................................................................................... 3-239
 Key-In Credits (Russia Only) ............................................................... 3-240
 Central Determination .......................................................................... 3-242
Central Determination - Configuration .........................................................3-246
Central Determination - Event History - Central Determ. Event ..................3-247
Central Determination - Event History - Protocol Event ..............................3-248
Power Cycling Central Determination Games .................................................. 3-248
RAM Clearing Central Determination Games .................................................. 3-248
Changing the Game Denom or Type on Central Determination Games .......... 3-248

January 2015
 Overview 3-5

Overview This chapter defines the functionality of all Menu items and provides detailed instructions for using
or setting each option.

Accounting This section defines the functionality of the Accounting Menu items, and provides instructions for
Menu using each entry. The Accounting Menu, (with identical functionality for both Operator and
Attendant) contains sub-menus, Figure 3-1, most of which access screens that are for viewing
purposes only. The data involves statistics about the machine and games completed.
Figure 3-1 Accounting Menu.

Accounting - This function displays machine accounting meter information for both the entire life of a game
Machine Accounting theme, as well as for the period since the last RAM clear. Complete the following steps to view the
meters:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Machine Accounting.
The Machine Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 Machine Accounting screen.

16-020832
3-6 Chapter 3: Software Administration

2 Scroll down to view additional accounting fields, Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-3 Second Machine Accounting screen.

Figure 3-4 Third Machine Accounting screen.

3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Accounting Menu 3-7
Accounting - This function displays game accounting meter information for the entire life of a game theme:
Game Accounting - 1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Game Accounting | Game Master,
Game Master Figure 3-5, to view meter information since the previous RAM clear.
Figure 3-5 Game Accounting Menu.

The Game Master Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Game Master Accounting screen.

If more than one Game is available, the Previous Game ID and Next Game ID fields display,
enabling navigation to the other available games.
2 If applicable, select Progressive Accounting to view Progressive information.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-8 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Accounting - The Wager Categories function displays game accounting meter information for specific wager
Game Accounting - categories. The payout percentage is based on the amount of credits that are bet in a round, and is
Wager Categories not configurable. To display the wager categories statistics, complete the following steps:
This function displays game accounting meter information for specific wager categories:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Game Accounting | Game Master,
Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7 Game Accounting Menu.

2 Select Wager Categories, Figure 3-8 (A).

Figure 3-8 Game Master Accounting screen.

January 2015
 Accounting Menu 3-9
The Wager Categories screen displays, Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-9 Wager Categories screen.

3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Accounting - The Game Statistics function displays game statistics for bonuses and awards.
Game Accounting - 1 From the Administration Menu, select From the Administration Menu, select Accounting |
Game Statistics Game Accounting | Game Master, Figure 3-10.
Figure 3-10 Game Accounting Menu.

16-020832
3-10 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Game Master Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Game Master Accounting screen.

A C

2 If more than one Game is available, select the Previous Game ID and Next Game ID fields
display, enabling navigation to the other available games, Figure 3-11 (A).
3 Select Progressive Accounting, Figure 3-11 (B), to access the Progressive Accounting
screen.
4 Select Game Stats, Figure 3-11 (C), to view the Game Statistics.
The Game Master Accounting screen with statistics displays, Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Game Master Accounting - Statistics.

5 Select Game Meters, Figure 3-12 (A) to return to the Game Master Accounting screen.
6 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Accounting Menu 3-11
Accounting - The Game Period function displays game accounting meter information since the period meters
Game Accounting - were last cleared. Complete the following steps to view the meters:
Game Period 1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Game Accounting | Game Period,
Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 Game Accounting Menu.

The Game Period Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Game Period Accounting screen.

2 If more than one game is available, select the Previous Game ID and Next Game ID fields to
view the other available games, Figure 3-14 (A).
3 Select Progressive Accounting, Figure 3-14 (B), to access the Progressive Accounting
screen.
4 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-12 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Game Accounting - The Game Denomination Master function displays game accounting meter information based on
Denomination the listed denomination for the entire life of a game theme. The Denom Master screen enables you
Master to view meter information since the previous RAM clear.
To display this function, complete the following steps:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Game Accounting | Denom Master,
Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-15 Game Accounting Menu.

The Denom Master Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-16.

Figure 3-16 Denom Master Accounting screen.
B

2 If more than one game is available, select the Previous Game ID and Next Game ID,
Figure 3-16 (A) to view of the other available games.
3 Select Progressive Accounting, Figure 3-16 (B), to allow access to the Progressive
Accounting screen.
4 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Accounting Menu 3-13
Game Accounting - Denom Period Accounting displays denomination accounting meter information since the period
Denomination meters were last cleared. To display this screen, complete the following steps:
Period 1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Game Accounting | Denom Period,
Figure 3-17.
Figure 3-17 Accounting - Game Accounting Menu.

The Denom Period Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-18.

Figure 3-18 Game Denom Period Accounting screen.

2 If more than one game is available, select the Previous Theme and Next Theme, to view
other available games, Figure 3-18 (A).
3 Select Progressive Accounting, Figure 3-18 (B), to access the Progressive Accounting
screen.
4 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-14 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Accounting - The Progressive Master function lists meters for the entire life of a game theme, the total payouts,
Protocol Accounting times hit, last free spins, total free spins awarded, and last award hit for each Progressive Level.
- Progressive To view the screen, complete the following steps:
Accounting - 1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Protocol Accounting |
Progressive Master Progressive Accounting | Progressive Master, Figure 3-19.
Figure 3-19 Progressive Accounting Menu.

The Progressive Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-20.

Figure 3-20 Progressive Accounting screen.

A
B

The list box in the top left corner of the Progressive Accounting screen displays each Pool, and
the Bet Per Lines that are associated with each Pool, Figure 3-20 (A).
When a Pool is selected in the list box, the Progressive Accounting screen displays the
paytable that corresponds to the Pool in the main portion of the Progressive Accounting
screen, Figure 3-20 (B).
2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Accounting Menu 3-15
Accounting - The Progressive Period screen lists the total payouts, times hit, total free spins awarded, last free
Protocol Accounting spins awarded, and last award hit for each Progressive Level since the Period Meters were last
- Progressive cleared. To view the Progressive Period screen, complete the following steps:
Accounting 1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Protocol Accounting |
Progressive Accounting | Progressive Period, Figure 3-21.
Figure 3-21 Progressive Accounting Menu.

The Progressive Period screen displays, Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22 Progressive Period screen.

2 If more than one screen is available, select Next Figure 3-22 (A), to display additional
information.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-16 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Accounting - The Current Amounts screen lists the current progressive amounts for each pool. To view the
Protocol Accounting Current Amounts screen, complete the following steps:
Progressive 1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Protocol Accounting |
Accounting - Progressive Accounting | Current Amounts, Figure 3-23.
Current Amounts Figure 3-23 Progressive Accounting Menu.

The Current Progressive Amounts screen displays, Figure 3-24.

Figure 3-24 Current Progressive Amounts screen.

January 2015
 Accounting Menu 3-17
Protocol Accounting The Protocol Meters screen lists each of the host communication protocol connections and the
- Protocol Meters statistics corresponding to their activities. To view the screen, complete the following steps:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Protocol Accounting | Protocol Meters,
Figure 3-25.
Figure 3-25 Protocol Accounting Menu.

The Protocol Meters screen displays, Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26 Protocol Meters screen.

2 If more than one screen is available, select Next to display additional information,
Figure 3-26 (A).

16-020832
3-18 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Protocol Meters - second screen displays, Figure 3-27 (A).

Figure 3-27 Protocol Meters - second screen.

3 Select Display Currency to view the protocol meters in the currency format.
Figure 3-28 Protocol Meters - Currency View.

4 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Accounting Menu 3-19
Accounting - To view all bill meter information, complete the following steps:
Bill Accounting 1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Bill Meter Accounting | Bill Accounting,
Figure 3-29.
Figure 3-29 Bill Meter Accounting Menu.

The Bill Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-30.

Figure 3-30 Bill Accounting screen.

2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
3-20 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Accounting - To view all bill clearance information, complete the following steps:
Bill Clearance 1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Bill Meter Accounting | Bill Clearance
Accounting Accounting, Figure 3-31
Figure 3-31 Bill Meter Accounting Menu.

The Bill Clearance Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-32.

Figure 3-32 Bill Clearance Accounting screen.

2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Accounting Menu 3-21
Accounting - To view security meters involving such data as last power failure (date and time), door open, total
Security Accounting games played, and other security meters, complete the following steps:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Security Accounting, Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 Accounting Menu.

The Security Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-34.

Figure 3-34 Security Accounting screen.

2 If more than one screen is available, select the Next Page button to display additional
information.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
3-22 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Accounting - To view the Error Accounting screens, complete the following steps:
Error Accounting 1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Error Accounting, Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35 Accounting Menu.

The Error Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-36.

Figure 3-36 Error Accounting screen.

2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Accounting Menu 3-23
Accounting - Complete the following steps to clear all values from period meters and set them to zero.
Clear Period 1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Clear Period Accounting, Figure 3-37.
Accounting
Figure 3-37 Accounting Menu.

The Clear Period Meters screen displays, Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38 Clear Period Meters screen.

2 Select Clear Meters, Figure 3-38 (A).

3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

16-020832
 3-24 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostic The Diagnostic Menu includes a variety of tools for identifying game components and
Menu troubleshooting devices and communications.
Diagnostics - The System Information screen displays the following information:
Machine Info -  Peripherals: Version identification information and release date.
System Information  Software: OS version and part number, game part numbers and currency information
 Hardware: Manufacturer, Machine ID, and Processor ID.
 Network: MAC Address, IP Address, and Subnet Mask.
 Hardware Key: Hardware Key unique serial ID and game theme identification.

Complete the following procedure to view the System Information screen.

1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | System Information,
Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39 Machine Info Menu.

The System Information screen displays, Figure 3-40.

Figure 3-40 System Information screen (1 of 2).

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-25
2 If necessary, scroll down to view additional data, Figure 3-41.
Figure 3-41 System Information screen (2 of 2).

3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Diagnostics - For older OS versions, the Program Version option displays the version information for all software
Machine Info - and firmware installed on the game. For more recent OS versions, this option is no longer used. Use
Program Version the System Information option to view all program data.
Information Complete the following procedure to view the Program Version Information screen.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | Program Version Info,
Figure 3-42.
Figure 3-42 Machine Info Menu.

16-020832
3-26 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Program Version Info screen displays, Figure 3-43.

Figure 3-43 Program Version Info screen.

2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Diagnostics - The Hard Drive List screen displays all the contents of the Hard Drive on CPU-NXT2 and CPU-
Machine Info - NXT3.2. Complete the following steps to access the Hard Drive List:
Hard Drive List 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | Hard Drive List,
(CPU-NXT2, CPU- Figure 3-44.
NXT3.2)
Figure 3-44 Machine Info Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-27

The Hard Drive List screen displays, Figure 3-45.

Figure 3-45 Hard Drive List screen.

16-020832
 3-28 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - The Software Validation option allows for the automatic authentication of software components on
Machine Info - the game against third-party applications, such as GLI-Verify 3.5, Dataman, or Kobetron.
Software Validation Complete the following steps to authenticate the software:

1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | Software Validation,
Figure 3-46.
Figure 3-46 Machine Info Menu.

The Software Validation screen displays, Figure 3-47.

Figure 3-47 Software Validation screen.

2 Select the appropriate validation algorithm option, SHA-1 or HMAC-SHA-1, from the drop-
down Menu, Figure 3-47 (A).
3 Select Validate, Figure 3-47 (B), for each component to authenticate, or select Validate All,
Figure 3-47 (C), to authenticate all available components.
4 The Hex Seed value for the component displays in the Hex Seed column. It may display with a
truncated value, beginning with "...".
5 Compare the Hex Seed value against the value calculated using a third-party validation tool
(GLI-Verify, Kobetron, Dataman, etc.).
6 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-29
Diagnostics - The Fault Logs option displays a history of fault data.
Machine Info - Fault Complete the following steps to access the Fault Logs:
Logs
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | Fault Logs,
Figure 3-48.
Figure 3-48 Machine Info Menu.

The Fault Log screen displays, Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-49 Fault Log screen.

2 To view additional fault logs, select one from the drop-down Menu, Figure 3-49 (A).
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-30 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - The Boot Log option presents the information that displayed during the last game startup.
Machine Info - Boot Complete the following steps to access the Boot Log:
Log
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | Boot Log,
Figure 3-50.
Figure 3-50 Machine Info Menu.

The Boot Log screen displays, Figure 3-51.

Figure 3-51 Boot Log screen.

2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-31
Diagnostics - The Health Monitor option presents detailed status information on the CPU, CPU components,
Machine Info - switches, and electrical systems.
Health Monitor Complete the following steps to access this information:

1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | Health Monitor,
Figure 3-52.
Figure 3-52 Machine Info Menu.

The Health Monitor screen displays, Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53 Health Monitor screen.

To see historical data captured during each collection, select Table Log Data, Figure 3-53 (A).

16-020832
 3-32 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Health Log Data screen displays, Figure 3-54.

Figure 3-54 Health Log Data screen.

2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Diagnostics - The DRM Information option provides display-only information on the digital rights management
Machine Info - DRM (DRM) hardware key (dongle).
Information Complete the following steps to access this information:

1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | DRM Information,
Figure 3-55.
Figure 3-55 Machine Info Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-33
The DRM Information screen displays, Figure 3-56.
Figure 3-56 DRM Information screen.

If the theme is part of a portfolio performance plan (PPP), the Type value is PPP KEY,
Figure 3-56 (A). To view the number of days remaining for the theme/PPP DRM, view the
Status information, Figure 3-56 (B). The theme must be upgraded within this time frame in
accordance with the PPP agreement.
2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.
Diagnostics - The Machine Info Commands Menu allows for the verification that specific processes are running on
Machine Info - the game. This option allows for more technical debugging of the OS, primarily for testing purposes.
Machine Info Complete the following steps to select the Machine Info Commands options:
Commands
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | Machine Info
Commands, Figure 3-57.
Figure 3-57 Machine Info Commands Menu.

16-020832
3-34 Chapter 3: Software Administration

2 Select the process to check, and the status screen displays, Figure 3-58 through Figure 3-65.
Figure 3-58 Dmesg process status screen.

Figure 3-59 Top process status screen.

Figure 3-60 Ps process status screen.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-35
Figure 3-61 Df process status screen.

Figure 3-62 Ifconfig process status screen.

Figure 3-63 Rds process status screen.

16-020832
3-36 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Figure 3-64 Imsvc process status screen.

Figure 3-65 Cmdline process status screen.

3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-37
Diagnostics - Review the Jurisdiction Limits information by completing the following steps:
Jurisdiction 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Jurisdiction Information |
Information - Jurisdiction Limits, Figure 3-66.
Jurisdiction Limits
Figure 3-66 Jurisdiction Information Menu.

The Jurisdictional Limits screen displays, Figure 3-67.

Figure 3-67 Jurisdictional Limits screen.

2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
3-38 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - Review the Jurisdictional Bit Codes by completing the following steps:
Jurisdiction 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Jurisdiction Information |
Information - Jurisdictional Bit Codes from the Diagnostics Menu, Figure 3-68.
Jurisdictional Bit
Codes Figure 3-68 Jurisdiction Information Menu.

The Jurisdictional Bit Codes screen displays, Figure 3-69. Any undefined options are shown in
yellow.
Figure 3-69 Jurisdictional Bit Codes screen.

2 Select Exit to go back to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-39
Diagnostics - Test the inputs and outputs of the game by completing the following steps:
Input/Output 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Input/Output Diagnostics |
Diagnostics - Door I/O Diagnostics, Figure 3-70.
Door I/O
Diagnostics Figure 3-70 Input/Output Diagnostics Menu.

The Front Panel Deck (Button Panel) screen displays, Figure 3-71.
Figure 3-71 Door I/O screen (Front Panel Deck/Button Panel).

2 The settings for various features are listed as either ON (1) or OFF (0). Additional I/O Main
Door test options are listed in Table 3-1.

16-020832
3-40 Chapter 3: Software Administration

3 Select Next Page for additional options, Figure 3-71 (A).

Reference Table 3-1 for information regarding control switches and descriptions.

Table 3-1 Touch Door Diagnostic Options.

Control
1=ON
0=OFF Function
Hold Switches 1-5 Each ‘hold switch’ assigned, for example, would correspond to a card in a video
poker hand.
Coin-in Switches 1-5 Coin-in 1: Top optical coin-in sensor.
Coin-in 2: Lower optical coin-in sensor.
Coin-in 3: Sensor for the coin comparator.
Coin-in 4-6: Not implemented.

4 Test each individual mechanism by selecting its field, or automatically cycle through them all by
selecting Auto Cycle, Figure 3-72 (A).
Figure 3-72 Front Panel Board Outputs I/O screen - second screen.

5 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-41
Diagnostics - Test the inputs and outputs of the lamp matrix by completing the following steps:
Input/Output 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Input/Output Diagnostics |
Diagnostics - Lamp Lamp Matrix Diagnostic, Figure 3-73.
Matrix Diagnostic
Figure 3-73 Input/Output Diagnostics Menu.

The Lamp Matrix Diagnostic screen displays, Figure 3-74.

Figure 3-74 Lamp Matrix Diagnostic screen.

2 Select the individual lamps to test.

3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
3-42 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - Test the inputs and outputs of the cabinet by completing the following steps:
Input/Output 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Input/Output Diagnostics |
Diagnostics - Cabinet I/O Diagnostics, Figure 3-75.
Cabinet
I/O Diagnostics Figure 3-75 Input/Output Diagnostics Menu.

The Cabinet Inputs screen displays, Figure 3-76.

Figure 3-76 Cabinet Inputs screen.

2 Select Next Page to go to the Cabinet Outputs screen, Figure 3-76 (A).
3 Switch settings ON (1) or OFF (0) for various mechanisms, as listed in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Cabinet I/O Options.

Control
1=ON
0=OFF Function
Diverter Present Indicates Diverter is present.
Diverter Position Indicates the Diverter position.
Hopper Full "0" indicates Hopper bowl full; sensor not making contact with tokens
"1" indicates Hopper bowl full; sensor is making contact with tokens

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-43
4 Test each individual mechanism by selecting its field, or automatically cycle through them all by
selecting Auto Cycle, Figure 3-77 (A).
Figure 3-77 Cabinet Outputs screen.

5 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Diagnostics - Test the inputs and outputs of the Mechanical Arm by completing the following steps:
Input/Output 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Input/Output Diagnostics |
Diagnostics - Mechanical Arm Diagnostic, Figure 3-78.
Mechanical Arm
Diagnostic Figure 3-78 Input/Output Diagnostics Menu.

16-020832
3-44 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Mechanical Arm Diagnostic screen displays, Figure 3-79.

Figure 3-79 Mechanical Arm Diagnostic screen.

2 In the Mechanical Arm Lock field, lock and unlock the Mechanical Arm by selecting Locked or
Unlocked, Figure 3-79 (A).
3 With the Mechanical Arm Lock field set to Unlocked, pull the arm and monitor the Mechanical
Arm Position field to confirm the arm switch is accurately reading the position of the arm.
4 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Diagnostics - Test the inputs and outputs of the Processor and its operating temperature by completing the
Input/Output following steps:
Diagnostics - 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Input/Output Diagnostics |
Processor I/O Processor I/O Diagnostics, Figure 3-80.
Diagnostics
Figure 3-80 Input/Output Diagnostics Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-45
The Processor Inputs screen displays, Figure 3-81. This screen presents the settings for
Processor-related functions: ON (1) or OFF (0), as well as the Processor temperature.
Figure 3-81 Processor Inputs screen.

The Processor temperature typically does not exceed 129°F (54°C) when the game is
operating at room temperature, 68°F to 73°F (20°C to 23°C). If the temperature reading on the
Processor Inputs screen exceeds this value, verify the following:
 The Processor fan and CPU Enclosure fan are operating normally.
 The CPU Enclosure and game cabinet vents are not obstructed.
2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Diagnostics - Cash The Cash Device Diagnostics options, Figure 3-82, allow for the testing of any cash-handling
Device Diagnostics devices.
Figure 3-82 Cash Device Diagnostics Menu.

16-020832
 3-46 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - Cash Select the Bill Validator option to perform a Bill or Voucher test, or to validate (perform a CRC
Device Diagnostics - check) on the Bill Acceptor firmware. Complete the following steps to access and test the Bill
Bill Validator Acceptor:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Cash Device Diagnostics |
Bill Validator, Figure 3-83.
Figure 3-83 Cash Device Diagnostics Menu.

The Bill Validator Diagnostics screen displays, Figure 3-84. This screen presents the current
Bill Acceptor firmware and release information, Figure 3-84 (A).
Figure 3-84 Bill Validator Diagnostics screen.

2 Insert a bill or voucher to test the Bill Acceptor.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-47
The bill or voucher type displays, Figure 3-85 (A).
Figure 3-85 Bill inserted screen.

The bill or voucher is automatically rejected, Figure 3-86 (A).

Figure 3-86 Bill rejected screen.

3 Select Compute CRCs, Figure 3-86 (B), to check the value.

16-020832
3-48 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The CRC value displays, Figure 3-87 (A).

Figure 3-87 CRC value.

4 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-49
Diagnostics - Cash Complete the following steps to test the Coin Acceptor:
Device Diagnostics - 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Cash Device Diagnostics |
Coin Acceptor Coin Acceptor, Figure 3-88.
Figure 3-88 Cash Device Diagnostics Menu.

The Coin Acceptor Diagnostic screen displays, Figure 3-89.

Figure 3-89 Coin Acceptor Diagnostics screen.

2 Touch inside the Coin Acceptor field to toggle the setting to Enabled,
Figure 3-89 (A).
3 Touch inside the Coin Diverter field to toggle the setting to Coin To Drop to indicate where the
coins are being routed, Figure 3-89 (B).
4 Insert coins.
5 The number of coins inserted increments each of the fields as follows:
 Coin to Hopper = Coins routed to the Hopper.
 Coin To Drop = Coins routed to the Drop.
 Coin Total = The total number of coins.

16-020832
 3-50 Chapter 3: Software Administration

6 Verify that the coin count increments each time a coin is inserted.
NOTE: The coin count accumulated during this Diagnostic Test does not affect the Accounting
Coin In meter. This coin count is for the purpose of testing the Coin Acceptor only.
7 When the test is complete, select Exit.
Diagnostics - Cash Complete the following steps to test the Hopper:
Device Diagnostics - 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Cash Devices Diagnostics | Hopper,
Hopper Figure 3-90.
Figure 3-90 Cash Devices Diagnostics Menu.

The Hopper Diagnostic screen displays, Figure 3-91.

Figure 3-91 Hopper Diagnostics screen.

2 Perform a 1-Coin test by selecting Paid 1 Coin.

The Hopper dispenses a single coin and the Coin Paid counter increments to 1.
3 Perform a 10-Coin test by selecting Paid 10 Coins.
The Hopper dispenses 10 coins and the Coin Paid counter increments to 10.
4 If necessary, select Hopper Shutoff to stop the Hopper from dispensing coins.
5 When the test is complete, select Exit.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-51
Diagnostics - Cash Complete the following steps to test the Printer:
Device Diagnostics - 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Cash Devices Diagnostics | Printer,
Printer Figure 3-92.
Figure 3-92 Cash Device Diagnostics Menu.

The Printer Diagnostic screen displays, Figure 3-93.

Figure 3-93 Printer Diagnostics screen.

2 Select Print Void Ticket.

16-020832
3-52 Chapter 3: Software Administration

A ticket prints while displaying a message on the screen, Figure 3-94.

Figure 3-94 Printer Diagnostics screen.

3 Verify that a ticket printed.

4 Select Exit once the test is complete.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-53
Diagnostics - Cash Complete the following steps to check the status of the Card Reader and to perform a test:
Device Diagnostics - 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Cash Device Diagnostics |
Card Reader Card Reader, Figure 3-95.
Figure 3-95 Cash Device Diagnostics Menu.

The Card Reader Diagnostics screen displays, Figure 3-96. This screen presents the current
Card Reader status, Figure 3-96 (A).
Figure 3-96 Card Reader Diagnostics screen.

2 Insert a card in the Card Reader to test the device.

3 The status changes to reflect the card inserted.
4 The card automatically ejects.
5 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-54 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - Cash In select jurisdictions, the Device Firmware Update (DFU) option allows for the manual download of
Device Diagnostics - peripheral firmware from the USB drive on the component. Complete the following steps to
DFU download new firmware:
1 Seat the USB storage device or connect the download tool to the peripheral.
2 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Cash Device Diagnostics |
DFU, Figure 3-97.
Figure 3-97 Cash Device Diagnostics Menu.

The DFU Diagnostics screen displays, Figure 3-98. This screen presents the current Bill
Acceptor and Printer firmware information, Figure 3-98 (A).
Figure 3-98 DFU screen.

3 To download the firmware from the USB drive, select the Start button for the peripheral.
4 Once complete, a status message displays.
5 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-55
Diagnostics - The Video Diagnostics sub-menus, Figure 3-99, are used to check the purity of color and verify
Video Diagnostics screen alignment. If there is a problem with the color or alignment, and the video input is through a
VGA cable, the LCD can be adjusted to obtain the correct effect. If the video input is through a DVI
cable, the color or alignment cannot be adjusted. Refer to your monitor documentation.
Diagnostics - The Color Purity screens test color output of the LCD. The entire screen should appear solid red,
Video Diagnostics - green, or blue, with uniform color. Complete the following steps:
Color Purity 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Video Diagnostics | Red Purity,
Figure 3-99.
Figure 3-99 Video Diagnostics Menu.

The Red Purity screen displays, Figure 3-100.

Figure 3-100 Red Purity screen.

2 Touch the screen to exit.

16-020832
3-56 Chapter 3: Software Administration

3 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Video Diagnostics | Green Purity,
Figure 3-101.
Figure 3-101 Video Diagnostics Menu.

The Green Purity screen displays, Figure 3-102.

Figure 3-102 Green Purity screen.

4 Touch the screen to exit.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-57
5 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Video Diagnostics | Blue Purity,
Figure 3-103.
Figure 3-103 Video Diagnostics Menu.

The Blue Purity screen displays, Figure 3-104.

Figure 3-104 Blue Purity screen.

6 To exit, touch the screen.

7 Report any variation to a factory-authorized technician.

16-020832
 3-58 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - Complete the following steps to view the dot (pixel) alignment and verify the spacing is regular.
Video Diagnostics - 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Video Diagnostics | Dot Alignment,
Dot Alignment Figure 3-105.
Figure 3-105 Video Diagnostics Menu.

The Dot Alignment screen displays, Figure 3-106.

Figure 3-106 Dot Alignment screen.

2 To exit, touch the screen.

3 Report any variation to a factory-authorized technician.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-59
Diagnostics - Complete the following steps to view the graph alignment and verify the lines are straight and
Video Diagnostics - regularly spaced.
Graph Alignment 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Video Diagnostics | Graph Alignment.,
Figure 3-107.
Figure 3-107 Video Diagnostics Menu.

The Graph Alignment screen displays, Figure 3-108.

Figure 3-108 Graph Alignment screen.

2 To exit, touch the screen.

3 Report any variation to a factory-authorized technician.

16-020832
 3-60 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - A completely white screen with no color tint indicates a successful White Temp test. Complete the
Video Diagnostics - following steps:
White Temp 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Video Diagnostics | White Temp,
Figure 3-109.
Figure 3-109 Video Diagnostics Menu.

The White Temp screen displays, Figure 3-110.

Figure 3-110 White Temp screen.

2 To exit, touch the screen.

3 Report any variation to a factory-authorized technician.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-61
Diagnostics - A black screen with a centered white rectangle indicates a successful contrast test. Complete the
Video Diagnostics - following steps:
Contrast 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Video Diagnostics | Contrast,
Figure 3-111.
Figure 3-111 Video Diagnostics Menu.

The Contrast screen displays, Figure 3-112.

Figure 3-112 Contrast screen.

2 To exit, touch the screen.

3 Report any variation to a factory-authorized technician.

16-020832
 3-62 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - Complete the following steps to perform the Enhanced Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)
Video Diagnostics - diagnostic tests:
EDID Data 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Video Diagnostics | EDID data,
Figure 3-113.
Figure 3-113 Video Diagnostics Menu.

1 The EDID data screen displays, Figure 3-114.

Figure 3-114 EDID Data screen.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-63
Diagnostics - This function enables listening to the individual speakers at different volume levels. Complete the
Sound Diagnostics - following steps:
Speakers 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Sound Diagnostics | Speakers,
Figure 3-115.
Figure 3-115 Sound Diagnostics Menu.

The Speaker Diagnostics screen displays, Figure 3-116.

Figure 3-116 Speaker Diagnostics screen.

2 Select the speaker on which to conduct the test.

16-020832
3-64 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The test speaker is highlighted, Figure 3-117 (A).

Figure 3-117 Speaker Diagnostics screen for 2-channel sound - Highlighted screen.

If there are four channels, the Speaker Diagnostics screen displays four speakers,
Figure 3-118.
Figure 3-118 Highlighted Speaker screen for 4-channel sound - Highlighted screen.

3 Select the volume field to change the volume level, Figure 3-118 (A).
4 Select Exit to complete the test.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-65
Diagnostics - This function enables listening to the individual sound files at different volume levels. Complete the
Sound Diagnostics - following steps:
Sound Calls 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Sound Diagnostics | Sound Calls,
Figure 3-119.
Figure 3-119 Sound Diagnostics Menu.

The Sound Call Diagnostics screen displays, Figure 3-120.

Figure 3-120 Sound Call Diagnostics screen.

2 Select the sound file to test, and select Play, Figure 3-120 (A).

16-020832
3-66 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The sound file is highlighted, and plays through the game speakers, Figure 3-121.
Figure 3-121 Highlighted Sound file.

3 Select the volume field to change the volume level, Figure 3-121 (A).
4 Select Exit to complete the test.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-67
Diagnostics - This function enables listening to the individual sound files at different volume levels. Complete the
Sound Diagnostics - following steps:
Playlist Calls 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Sound Diagnostics | Playlist Calls,
Figure 3-122.
Figure 3-122 Sound Diagnostics Menu.

The Playlist Diagnostics screen displays, Figure 3-123.

Figure 3-123 Playlist Diagnostics screen.
A

2 View the State of each Playlist, Figure 3-123 (A). Active Playlists show as PLAYING, and
Playlists not currently in use display a status of STOPPED.
3 Select Exit.

16-020832
 3-68 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Performing Ethernet Complete the following procedure to perform Ethernet Diagnostics using the Message Delay/Loss
Diagnostics Using Test screen. Ethernet diagnostics provides a method for WMS technicians to test the network
the Message Delay/ infrastructure in the casinos for the Big Event Server, Ultra Hit Progressive, or Portal games.
Loss Screen
NOTE: If testing the Big Event Server, use the Big Event Server IP Address: 10.10.1.1
This procedure can be performed when the games are first installed, or if there are networking
infrastructure issues that are causing the EGMs and CGC to lose communication and cause an
EGM tilt.
The Message Delay/Loss Test screen performs the following functions:
 Verifies that the EGMs tested are physically connected to the Local Area Network (LAN).
 Verifies that the network address is correct for the EGMs tested.
 Determines if packets are lost between EGMs tested.
 Verifies ethernet connectivity between two EGMS.
 Measures (on a graph) how long it takes to send a message between two EGMs,
(Transmission Rate).
 Verifies Big Event Server ethernet connectivity.
The Message Delay/Loss Test screen allows testing of the ethernet connectivity between two
EGMs, or the ethernet connectivity between an EGM and the Big Event Server. This procedure
requires the use of two different EGMs to test the network infrastructure between EGMs.
Figure 3-124 displays the two network testing scenarios for the Message Delay/Loss Test.
Figure 3-124 Ethernet Diagnostics testing scenarios.

See Table 3-3 for Ethernet Diagnostic - Message Delay/Loss screen fields.

Table 3-3 Ethernet Diagnostic Message Delay/Loss Test Fields/Descriptions.

Field Description
TX Status Transmission status.
RX Status Receive status.
TX Rate Transmission rate.
Local IP The IP Address of the EGM.
Remote IP The Remote IP Address of the peer EGM or server that is tested.
Run time How long the test has been running.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-69
This procedure is performed using two different EGMs on the Local Area Network (LAN). Set the
Remote IP address on each EGM to point to the other test EGM.
1 Open the Ethernet Diagnostics - Message Delay/Loss Test screen on two different EGMs.
From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Ethernet Diagnostics | Delay/Loss Diagnostics, Figure 3-125.
Figure 3-125 Ethernet Diagnostics Menu.

The Message Delay/Loss Test screen displays, Figure 3-126.

Figure 3-126 Message Delay/Loss Test screen.

2 The Local IP Address field automatically populates with the IP address of the local EGM.
3 Select a peer EGM on the network to test the ethernet connectivity for the LAN.
4 Select Change Remote IP to enter the IP address of the peer EGM, Figure 3-126 (A).

16-020832
3-70 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Remote IP Keypad displays, Figure 3-127.

Figure 3-127 Message Delay/Loss Test - Remote IP keypad.

5 Enter the IP Address of the peer EGM in the Remote IP Address keypad, Figure 3-127.
NOTE: If testing the Big Event Server, enter the Big Event Server IP Address: 10.10.1.1
6 Open the Message Delay/Loss screen on the peer EGM.
7 Select Change Remote IP, Figure 3-126 (A).
8 Enter the IP Address of the peer EGM.
9 Select Start Test, Figure 3-127 (A), for both EGMs.
Figure 3-128 Message Delay/Loss Test screen.

The Message Delay/Loss Test graph plots latencies for the messages received, indicating how far
apart (in milliseconds) the messages are received from the peer EGM. If the Ethernet
communications is normal, the graph plot line displays as in Figure 3-128 (A).

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-71
See Performing Ethernet Diagnostics Using the Message Delay/Loss Screen on page 4-34 for
detailed information and procedures regarding the Message Delay/Loss Test screen.
10 Select Stop Test, Figure 3-128 (B), for both EGMs when the tests are completed.
11 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Diagnostics - The Network Connection Diagnostics option tests the EGM connectivity to the host system, Online
Network Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) Host, or other network. Complete the following steps to check
Diagnostics - the network connection:
Ethernet 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Diagnostics | Ethernet Diagnostics | Network Connection Diagnostics, Figure 3-129.
Network Connection
Figure 3-129 Ethernet Diagnostics Menu.
Diagnostics

The Network Connectivity Diagnostics screen displays, Figure 3-130.

Figure 3-130 Ethernet Diagnostics Menu.

2 Select an available host, Figure 3-130 (A), to check the connection status, or select Other
Host to enter the IP Address of the server or other network device. If necessary, contact a
network administrator for the host system network details.
3 The connection status and transfer of data information displays, Figure 3-130 (B).
4 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-72 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - This function displays WMS Progressive traffic data between the Progressive Controller and the
WMSP Diagnostics - game. View this screen to verify that communication between the Progressive Controller and the
WMSP Traffic game is active. Complete the following steps:
Statistics 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
WMSP Diagnostics | WMSP Traffic Statistics, Figure 3-131.
Figure 3-131 WMSP Diagnostics Menu.

The WMSP/WSLL Traffic Statistics screen displays, Figure 3-132.

Figure 3-132 WMSP/WSLL Traffic Statistics screen.

2 Select Update Data to refresh the displayed data, Figure 3-132 (A).
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-73
Diagnostics - This function displays WMS Progressive statistical link data corresponding to the game. Complete
WMSP Diagnostics - the following steps:
WMSP Link 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Statistics WMSP Diagnostics | WMSP Link Statistics, Figure 3-133.
Figure 3-133 WMSP Diagnostics Menu.

The WMSP Link Statistics screen displays, Figure 3-134.

Figure 3-134 WMSP Link Statistics screen.

2 Select Update Data to refresh the displayed data, Figure 3-134 (A).
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
3-74 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - This function displays SPN traffic data corresponding to the game. Complete the following steps:
Network 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Diagnostics- SPN SPN Diagnostics | SPN Traffic Statistics, Figure 3-135.
Diagnostics - SPN
Traffic Statistics Figure 3-135 SPN Diagnostics Menu.

The SPN Traffic Statistics screen displays, Figure 3-136.

Figure 3-136 SPN Traffic Statistics screen.

2 Select Update Data to refresh the displayed data, Figure 3-136 (A).
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-75
Diagnostics - This function displays SPN link data corresponding to the game. Complete the following steps:
SPN Diagnostics - 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
SPN Link Statistics SPN Diagnostics | SPN Link Statistics, Figure 3-137.
Figure 3-137 SPN Diagnostics Menu.

The SPN Link Statistics screen displays, Figure 3-138.

Figure 3-138 SPN Link Statistics screen.

2 Select Update Data to refresh the displayed data, Figure 3-138 (A).
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
3-76 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - This function displays data for each individual SPN device in the game. Complete the following
SPN Diagnostics - steps:
SPN Devices 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Diagnostics SPN Diagnostics | SPN Device Statistics, Figure 3-139.
Figure 3-139 SPN Diagnostics Menu.

The SPN Device Diagnostics screen displays with installed SPN devices and their firmware
version data, Figure 3-140.
Figure 3-140 SPN Device Diagnostics screen.

2 To perform an SPN device diagnostic test, select Start next to the desired device,
Figure 3-140 (A).

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-77
The Device Diagnostics screen displays the device actively running its diagnostic test,
Figure 3-141.
Figure 3-141 SPN Device Diagnostics Test screen.

3 To end the diagnostic test, select Stop, Figure 3-141 (A).

4 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

See Table 3-4 for information on the individual SPN device diagnostic tests.

Table 3-4 SPN device diagnostic tests.

Test Description
Mech Reels The Mechanical Reels spin to the home position and then revolve from symbol to
symbol. The lights for the Mechanical Reels are also lit in sequence.
Payline Lights up all the paylines.
Progressive Meter Changes the color of the Progressive Meter display.
Reel Illuminator Lights up all Reel Illuminator LEDs.
Universal Lights up all the LEDs in the Animator Button.
Animator

16-020832
 3-78 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - If applicable, this function displays data for the OLED USB Button Panel in the game. Complete the
Network following steps:
Diagnostics - USB 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Diagnostics - OLED USB Diagnostics | OLED Button Panel, Figure 3-142.
Button Panel
Figure 3-142 Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics Menu.

The USB OLED Button Panel Information screen displays, Figure 3-143.
Figure 3-143 USB OLED Button Panel Information screen.

2 To update the refresh the data, select Update Data, Figure 3-143 (A).
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-79
Diagnostics - Complete the following procedure to access the Emotive Lighting Controller Diagnostics screens.
Network 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Diagnostics - USB USB Diagnostics | Emotive Controller, Figure 3-144.
Diagnostics -
Emotive Controller Figure 3-144 Diagnostics Menu.

The Emotive Lighting Controller Diagnostic screen displays, Figure 3-145.

Figure 3-145 Emotive Lighting Controller Diagnostic screen

16-020832
3-80 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Emotive Lighting Controller Diagnostic screen shows the Light Bar status buttons for each
Emotive Lighting Panel. If an Emotive Lighting Panel is not operational, the corresponding button is
not lit, Figure 3-146 (A). Note that Port 8, Figure 3-146 (B), is not available, not connected, or there
is no communication from the Port 8, so the status indicates Not Present.
Figure 3-146 Emotive Lighting Controller Diagnostic screen

If the Emotive Lighting Controller is not connected, or unavailable for any reason, the Emotive
Lighting Controller Diagnostic screen shows the status Not Present. Light Bars are not shown if the
Lighting Controller status is Not Present, Figure 3-147.
Figure 3-147 Emotive Lighting Controller Diagnostic screen.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-81
2 Select Auto Cycle to test the PCB Emotive Lighting Panels, Figure 3-148 (A). This option
lights each PCB Emotive Lighting Panel to test connectivity and light panel integrity. This
screen is automatically refreshed.
Figure 3-148 Emotive Lighting Controller Diagnostic screen - Auto Cycle.

Accessing the I2C From the Emotive Lighting Controller Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-148, select Next to view the
Lights Diagnostic Emotive Lighting Controller - I2C Lights Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-149. This screen displays
Screen statistics concerning how long it takes the Emotive Lighting Controller to update all of the lights.
The values are in micro-seconds and a typical fully populated controller takes about 15000 μs (15
ms) to update all the lights. A high number over 20000 μs (20 ms) may be an indication of a
problem communicating to the Emotive Lighting Panels.
Figure 3-149 Emotive Lighting Controller - I2C Lights Diagnostic screen.

16-020832
3-82 Chapter 3: Software Administration

From the Emotive Lighting Controller - I2C Lights Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-149, select Next to
view the Emotive Lighting Controller I2C-0 Driver Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-150. This screen
displays statistics for bus 0 and bus 1 of the I2C controller. The txCt fields are the number of write
transactions on the bus, and the rxCt field shows the number of read transactions. The aNakCt and
dNakCt fields show the number of address naks and data naks on the bus. On a properly
functioning system, the aNak and dNak counts should be zero or a very low number. If the counts
climb with each update, this indicates a problem with one of the Emotive lights.
Figure 3-150 Emotive Lighting Controller - I2C-0 screen.

Select Next from Emotive Lighting Controller I2C-0 Driver Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-150 to view
the Emotive Lighting Controller - I2C-0 MUX-0 Driver Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-151, and I2C-0
MUX-1 Driver Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-152.
Figure 3-151 Emotive Lighting Controller - I2C-0 MUX-0.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-83
Figure 3-152 Emotive Lighting Controller - I2C-0 MUX-1.

These screens display the statistics for the multiplexers on each of the I2C busses. Any error in
switching the I2C bus to one of the lights bars is reflected on the screen. On a typical system the
numbers are usually all zero. Values other than zero may be an indication of a problem with an
Emotive Lighting Panel or cabling.
MUX Port Mapping to Controller Port
Reference the following to map an MUX port to a controller port:
R1/R2 Controller
 I2C0 MUX-0 Port 0 = Port 2
 I2C0 MUX-0 Port 1 = Port 3
 I2C0 MUX-0 Port 2 = Port 6
 I2C0 MUX-0 Port 3 = Port 8

R1 Controller
 I2C0 MUX-1 Port 0 = Port 7
 I2C0 MUX-1 Port 1 = Port 5
 I2C0 MUX-1 Port 2 = Port 4
 I2C0 MUX-1 Port 3 = Port 1

R2 Controller
 I2C1 MUX-0 Port 0 = Port 7
 I2C1 MUX-0 Port 1 = Port 5
 I2C1 MUX-0 Port 2 = Port 4
 I2C1 MUX-0 Port 3 = Port 1

16-020832
 3-84 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Emotive Lighting The EL Sync screens show statistics for the communication for the EL Sync network. These
Controller screens are used to diagnose problems with the EL Sync network.
EL SyncApp, From the I2C-0 MUX-1 Driver Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-152, select Next to view the Emotive
EL SyncTransport, Lighting Controller - ElSyncApp Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-153.
and EL SyncMedia
Figure 3-153 Emotive Lighting Controller - ElSyncApp.

Emotive Lighting Controller - ElSyncApp Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-153, select Next to view the
Emotive Lighting Controller - ElSyncMedia Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-154. This screen shows the
Media layer of the EL Sync network.
Figure 3-154 Emotive Lighting Controller - EISyncMedia Diagnostic screen.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-85
From the Emotive Lighting Controller - ElSyncMedia Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-154, select Next to
view the Emotive Lighting Controller - ElSyncTransport Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-155. This
screen shows the Transport layer of the EL Sync network.
Figure 3-155 Emotive Lighting Controller - ElSyncTransport Diagnostic screen.

See Table 3-5 for EL Sync fields and descriptions.

Table 3-5 EL Sync Fields and Descriptions.ED Label Description

Field Description
EL Sync App Application layer of the EL Sync network.
MyAddr: The MAC address of the controller
MasterAddress The MAC address of the master controller on the EL Sync network. All EGMs
connected to the same EL Sync network should display the same address.
IsElSyncMaster If value is 1 this controller is the master on the EL Sync network.
PromoteCt The number of times this controller has attempted to become the EL Sync master. If
this number grows with each update indicates intermittent communication on the EL
Sync network.
txPktFailCt The number of failed transmissions on the EL Sync network.

Emotive Lighting If DMX is enabled, the DMX Fixture screen shows the status of the communication over the
Controller - corresponding outgoing DMX port. From the Emotive Lighting Controller - ElSyncTransport
DMX Fixture Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-155, select Next to view the Emotive Lighting Controller - DMX
Fixture Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-156. This screen shows the statistics for the DMX feature.
Figure 3-156 Emotive Lighting Controller - DMX Fixture Diagnostic screen.

16-020832
3-86 Chapter 3: Software Administration

From the Emotive Lighting Controller - DMX Fixture Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-156, select Next to
view the Emotive Lighting Controller - DMX-2 Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-157.
Figure 3-157 Emotive Lighting Controller - DMX-2 Diagnostic screen.

Select Next to view the Emotive Lighting Controller - DMX-3 Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-158.
Figure 3-158 Emotive Lighting Controller - DMX-3 Diagnostic screen.

See Table 3-6 for DMX fields and descriptions.

Table 3-6 DMX Fields and Descriptions.ED Label Description

Field Description
Status Displays if the feature is enabled or disabled via the XD Setup Menu.
Signal: Displays if the controller sees an incoming DMX signal.
Address Current address set via the XD Setup Menu.
rxCt Number of DMX frames the controller has received
rxErrCt Number of errors seen on the line.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-87
Diagnostics - If applicable, this function displays data for the OLED USB Button Panel in the game. Complete the
Network following steps:
Diagnostics - USB 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Diagnostics - USB USB Diagnostics | USB Mech Panel, Figure 3-159.
Mech Panel
Figure 3-159 Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics Menu.

The USB Mech Button Panel screen displays, Figure 3-160.

Figure 3-160 USB Mech Button Panel screen.

2 To update the refresh the data, select Update, Figure 3-160 (A).
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-88 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - If applicable, this function displays data for the SI 2.0 Motion Chair connected to the game.
Network Complete the following steps to check the status of the chair:
Diagnostics - USB 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Diagnostics - Motion USB Diagnostics | Motion Chair, Figure 3-161.
Chair
Figure 3-161 Network Diagnostics - USB Diagnostics Menu.

The Motion Chair Diagnostics screen displays, Figure 3-162.

Figure 3-162 Motion Chair Diagnostics screen.

2 To update the refresh the data, select Update, Figure 3-162 (A).
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-89
Diagnostics - This section describes how to use the Location Setup Diagnostics screen, Figure 3-163.
Network The Location Setup Diagnostics screen lists the Location Setup Diagnostic error codes,
Diagnostics - Figure 3-163 (A), for the EGMs on the network.
Location
Diagnostics Location Setup Diagnostics Button functions, Figure 3-163 (B), provide a way to locate,
troubleshoot, diagnose, reset, and synchronize the Emotive Lighting shows bank-wide.
Figure 3-163 Location Setup Diagnostics screen.

Location Setup Table 3-7 lists the Location Setup Diagnostic screen field(s) and button(s) usage.
Diagnostics Screen Table 3-7 Location Setup Diagnostics screen field(s) and button(s) usage.
Fields and Field Usage
Definitions Error Codes Lists the error code(s) that are associated with Location Setup problems.
This EGM An asterisk displays in the row for the EGM that is accessed.
ELSync Master An asterisk displays in the row with the MAC Address of the Emotive Lighting Controller that is
designated the EL Sync Master.
The network has only one master Emotive Lighting Controller which is randomly designated as
the EL Sync Master.
MAC Address The Media Access Control (MAC) Address for the EGM is a unique identifier for the EGM.
Zone Zone number associated with the Unit.
Group Group number associated with the Unit.
Unit Unit number designated for the EGM.
Units in Group The number of Units in the Group.
Configuration Type of configuration for the EGM (Circle or Line).
Button Usage
Scan EL Sync Select the Scan EL Sync button to discover the EGMs located on the network. The EGM MAC
Network Address displays along with the Zone number, Group number, the number of Units in the
Group, and the configuration type (circle or line) for each EGM.
Identify Node Select the row for the EGM that has an error, and select the Identify Node button to physically
identify the location of the EGM on the network. The EGM white Emotive Lights flash on and
off rapidly for approximately 35 seconds to detect the location of an EGM.
Restart Bank Shows Select the Restart Bank Shows button to restart the Emotive Lighting shows for all of the
EGMs on the network.

NOTE: For information regarding how to use the Location Setup screen, see Setup - Machine Setup
- Cabinet Setup - Location Setup on page 3-127.

16-020832
3-90 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Complete the following procedure to use the Location Setup Diagnostics screen to diagnose and
troubleshoot Location Setup problems for bank-wide BBxD games.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Location Diagnostics, Figure 3-164.
Figure 3-164 Network Diagnostics Menu.

The Location Setup Diagnostics screen displays with the Location Setup diagnostic fields
unpopulated, Figure 3-165 (A).
Figure 3-165 Location Diagnostic screen.

Location Setup error codes and definitions are listed on the bottom-left corner of the Location
Setup Diagnostic screen, Figure 3-165 (B).

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-91
2 Select the Scan ELSync Network button to discover the EGMs on the network,
Figure 3-166 (A).
Figure 3-166 Location Setup Diagnostic screen.
B

After the scan is complete, the number of nodes found on the network display on the Location
Diagnostics screen. The Location Setup Diagnostic screen displays the MAC Address for the
EGMs that are located on the network, Figure 3-166 (B).
If there are Location Setup problems, the error codes display in the Error Codes field,
Figure 3-166 (C).
Location The Identifying Node function is used to physically identify an EGM in order to troubleshoot a
Diagnostics - Location Setup problem. The selected EGM white Emotive Lights flash on and off for
Identify Node approximately 35 seconds when the Identify Node button is selected.
1 Select the row for the EGM that displays error codes, Figure 3-167 (A).
Figure 3-167 Location Diagnostics screen.

The selected row highlights in green.

2 Select Identify Node, Figure 3-166 (B).
The EGM white Emotive Lights flash on and off rapidly for approximately 35 seconds to identify
the physical location of the EGM.

16-020832
 3-92 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Location Complete the following procedure to restart BBxD bank-wide Emotive Lighting shows using the
Diagnostics - Restart Bank Show button on the Location Setup Diagnostics screen.
Restart Bank Shows The Restart Bank Show function is used to synchronize the bank-wide Architectural Emotive
Lighting shows. The Emotive Lighting shows on the EGMs in the bank are reset to the blue start-up
Architectural Emotive Lighting sequence. This function is useful when an EGM is power-cycled and
must be restarted and the Emotive Lighting shows must be synchronized quickly.
1 Select Restart Bank Shows, Figure 3-168 (A).
Figure 3-168 Location Setup Diagnostics screen - Restart Bank Shows.

The Architectural Emotive Lighting shows for each EGM on the network are reset to the blue start-
up Architectural Emotive Lighting sequence.

January 2015
 Diagnostic Menu 3-93
Diagnostics - See Figure 3-169 for the Emotive Lighting Controller troubleshooting steps.
Emotive Lighting Figure 3-169 Emotive Lighting Controller (ELC) Troubleshooting Chart
Controller
Troubleshooting Start Contact WMS to report the incident.
Chart This problem may be a game theme issue.

Railroad Lights are on the EGM Yes

when the EGM Hatch is open.

No
Is the ELC Yes Check the. RJ45 EL Sync
Verify the ELC state using .
cable(s). Replace the RJ45
the ELC Diagnostic screen. state: Present &
Connected? EL Sync cable(s) if necessary.

No
Check the USB cable
connection to the ELC. Yes
Are the Railroad
Lights on?

Is the USB Yes No

Press Reset on the
cable connected ELC Board.
to the ELC? Disconnect all Emotive
Lighting Panel cables.
Reconnect the cables one at
No a time to isolate the faulty
Update the firmware for the
cable or Lighting Panel.
ELC (1.65 or greater).
Connect the USB cable
and press Reset on the
ELC Board.

Is the ELC Yes Yes

Are the Railroad
state: Present &
Connected? Lights on?

Replace the USB cable

No No
to the ELC and press
Reset on the ELC Board.
Disconnect all USB devices
from the CPU except the
ELC USB cable, then reset
the ELC.
Is the ELC
Yes Done
state: Present &
Connected &
Railroad Lights
on?
Yes Is the ELC
state: Present &
No Connected &
Railroad Lights
The Power Supply, USB Hub, or on?
Replace the ELC Board. EMU Lighting Panel cables may
be faulty. See the BBxD No
Manual for replacement
instructions.

16-020832
3-94 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Diagnostics - This function displays System Supported Gaming (SSG) protocol traffic data corresponding to the
G2S Diagnostics - game. Complete the following steps to access the G2S Traffic Statistics:
G2S Traffic 1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | G2S Diagnostics |
Statistics G2S Traffic Statistics, Figure 3-170.
Figure 3-170 G2S Diagnostics Menu.

The G2S Traffic Statistics screen displays, Figure 3-171.

Figure 3-171 G2S Traffic Statistics screen.

2 Select Update Data to refresh the data, Figure 3-171 (A).

3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 History Menu 3-95

History Menu History options are logs of important game and machine-related information.
History - Game Play Use the Game Play History option to review the twenty most recently played games in the order in
which they were played. This valuable feature verifies the outcome of a game to resolve disputes.
Other statistics shown include game name, denomination, date, and type of pay out, (hopper pay,
voucher pay, or hand pay).
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Game Play History, Figure 3-172.
Figure 3-172 History Menu.

The previous game screen displays, or the reels return to the previous spin. Additional
information also displays. An example of the Game Play History screen is shown in
Figure 3-173.
Figure 3-173 Game Play History screen.

2 To navigate the recorded games, select Previous Game / Next Game, Figure 3-173 (A).

3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

16-020832
3-96 Chapter 3: Software Administration

History - Event An event is a specific action of input or output coming to or from a component within the system.
Event logs are particularly useful for troubleshooting problems occurring on a game. Some events
are routine status reports about common events like “Main Door Open,” and others are procedural
or security related, such as “Setup Menu Entered”. Other types of events report error conditions that
prevent game play, such as “Denomination Not Set”. The event history log is a chronological listing
of the last 500 events.
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Event History, Figure 3-174.
Figure 3-174 History Menu.

The Event History screen displays, Figure 3-175.

Figure 3-175 Event History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.

January 2015
 History Menu 3-97
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.
Table 3-8 displays a list of sample Events.

Table 3-8 Sample List of Events.

Events
Attendant Menu Entered Coin Acceptor Tamper Logic Door Closed
Attendant Menu Exited Coin Acceptor Tamper Logic Door Open
Cleared
Bill Rejected Date/Time Not Set Main Door Closed
Bill Rejection Limit Exceeded Date/Time Set Main Door Open
BillVal Acceptor Jam Denomination Not Set Memory Check Passed
BillVal Acceptor Jam Cleared Denomination Set Meter Display Entered
BillVal Com Error Devices Not Set Meter Display Exited
BillVal Com Error Cleared Devices Set Nvram Battery Low
BillVal Device Error Diagnostics Entered Nvram Battery Ok
BillVal Device Error Cleared Diagnostics Exited Pay Win Hand Pay Cleared
BillVal Door Closed End of Game Pay Win Hand Pay Lockup
BillVal Door Open Hard Meter 1 Connected Pay Win Jackpot Hand Pay
Cleared
BillVal Stacker Closed Hard Meter 1 Disconnected Pay Win Jackpot Hand Pay Lockup
BillVal Stacker Full Hard Meter 2 Connected Payable Not Set
BillVal Stacker Full Cleared Hard Meter 2 Disconnected Payable Set
BillVal Stacker Jam Hard Meter 3 Connected Performing Memory Check
BillVal Stacker Jam Cleared Hard Meter 3 Disconnected Power Up Restart
BillVal Stacker Open Hopper Device Error Ready After Restart
BillVal Tamper Hopper Device Error Cleared Setup Menu Entered
BillVal Tamper Cleared Hopper Empty Setup Menu Entered
Cash In Hopper Empty Cleared Setup Menu Exited
Cash Out Hand Pay Cleared Hopper Full Start of Game
Cash Out Hand Pay Lockup Hopper Full Cleared Voucher Printer Comm Error
Cash Out Voucher Failed Hopper Jam Voucher Printer Comm Error
Cleared
Cashout Complete Hopper Jam Cleared Voucher Printer Out of Paper
Coin Acceptor Device Error Hopper Runaway Voucher Printer Paper Loaded
Coin Acceptor Device Error Hopper Runaway Cleared Touch Screen Com Error
Cleared
Coin Acceptor Jam Hopper Tamper Touch Screen Com Error Cleared
Coin Acceptor Jam Cleared Hopper Tamper Cleared Valid Bill Cleared Rejection Count

16-020832
3-98 Chapter 3: Software Administration

History - Each time-stamped line shows the total money taken in by the Bill Acceptor. Cash In events are
Bill Acceptor used as the basis of this log.
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Money In/Out History | Bill Acceptor History,
Figure 3-176.
Figure 3-176 Money In/Out History Menu.

The Bill Acceptor History screen displays, Figure 3-177.

Figure 3-177 Bill Acceptor History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

January 2015
 History Menu 3-99
History - Cash Out Each time-stamped line shows Cash Out Complete events and the totals for the machine. Both
player and casino-initiated cash outs are included.
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Money In/Out History | Cash Out History,
Figure 3-178.
Figure 3-178 Money In/Out History Menu.

The Cash Out History screen displays, Figure 3-179.

Figure 3-179 Cash Out History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

16-020832
3-100 Chapter 3: Software Administration

History - Hand Pay Hand pay refers to money awarded by a casino attendant instead of being dispensed by the game.
This may result from mechanical trouble or casino policy to hand pay amounts over a certain limit.
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Money In/Out History | Hand Pay History,
Figure 3-180.
Figure 3-180 Money In/Out History Menu.

The Hand Pay History screen displays, Figure 3-181.

Figure 3-181 Hand Pay History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

January 2015
 History Menu 3-101
History - Coin Mech Each time-stamped line shows the total money accepted by the Coin Mechanism. Cash In events
History are used as the basis of this log.
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Money In/Out History | Coin Mech History,
Figure 3-182.
Figure 3-182 Money In/Out History Menu.

The Coin Mech History screen displays, Figure 3-183.

Figure 3-183 Coin Mech History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

16-020832
 3-102 Chapter 3: Software Administration

History - Voucher In The Voucher In History logs all accepted voucher events. Up to thirty-five events are stored in this
log.
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Money In/Out History | Voucher History |
Voucher In History, Figure 3-184.
Figure 3-184 Voucher History Menu.

The Voucher In History screen displays, Figure 3-185.

Figure 3-185 Voucher In History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

January 2015
 History Menu 3-103
History - The Voucher Out History logs all printed voucher events. Up to thirty-five events are stored in this
Voucher Out History log.
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Money In/Out History | Voucher History |
Voucher Out History, Figure 3-186.
Figure 3-186 Voucher History Menu.

The Voucher Out History screen displays, Figure 3-187.

Figure 3-187 Voucher Out History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

16-020832
3-104 Chapter 3: Software Administration

History - The Voucher Reject History logs all reject events. Up to thirty-five events are stored in this log.
Voucher Reject 1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Money In/Out History | Voucher History |
History Voucher Reject History, Figure 3-188.
Figure 3-188 Voucher History Menu.
s

The Voucher Reject History screen displays, Figure 3-189.

Figure 3-189 Voucher Reject History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

January 2015
 History Menu 3-105
History - Cashless This option displays the Cashless Bonus History.
Bonus History 1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Money In/Out History | Cashless Transfer |
Cashless Bonus History, Figure 3-190.
Figure 3-190 Cashless Transfer Menu.

The Cashless Bonus History screen displays, Figure 3-191.

Figure 3-191 Cashless Bonus History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

16-020832
3-106 Chapter 3: Software Administration

History - Cashless This option displays the Cashless Funds In History.

Funds In 1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Money In/Out History | Cashless Transfer |
Cashless Funds In History, Figure 3-192.
Figure 3-192 Cashless Transfer Menu.

The Cashless Funds In History screen displays, Figure 3-193.

Figure 3-193 Cashless Funds In History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

January 2015
 History Menu 3-107
History - Cashless This option displays the Cashless Funds Out History.
Transfer - Cashless 1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Money In/Out History | Cashless Transfer |
Funds Out History Cashless Funds Out History, Figure 3-194.
Figure 3-194 Cashless Transfer Menu.

The Cashless Funds Out screen displays, Figure 3-195.

Figure 3-195 Cashless Funds Out History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

16-020832
3-108 Chapter 3: Software Administration

History - SSG This option displays a log of SSG event. Complete the following steps to view the SSG History:
History 1 From the Administration Menu, select History | SSG History | SSG History, Figure 3-196.
Figure 3-196 SSG History Menu.

The SSG History screen displays, Figure 3-197.

Figure 3-197 SSG History screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

January 2015
 History Menu 3-109
History - SSG This option displays a log of downloads of SSG-based game content. Complete the following steps
Download History to view the SSG Download History:
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | SSG History | SSG Download History,
Figure 3-198.
Figure 3-198 SSG History Menu.

The SSG Download History screen displays, Figure 3-199.

Figure 3-199 SSG Download History.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

16-020832
 3-110 Chapter 3: Software Administration

History - Hard Drive The Hard Drive Log lists all actions pertaining to the Hard Drive.
Log 1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Hard Drive Log, Figure 3-200.
Figure 3-200 History Menu.

The Hard Drive Log screen displays, Figure 3-201.

Figure 3-201 Hard Drive Log screen.

2 If necessary, use the scroll buttons on the right side of the screen to view additional events.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

January 2015
 History Menu 3-111
History - This procedure provides information for accessing the Progressive Event History Log. All Scaling
Progressive Events Standalone Progressive wins are logged to the Progressive Event History Log. However, machine
disables related to progressives are still posted to the main Event History Log, in addition to the
Progressive Event History Log.
The Progressive Event History Log stores approximately 100 events in chronological order. When
the Progressive Events History Log fills, the oldest events are purged to make room for new events.
The Progressive Event Log writes a Start of Event Log event to the log when it is initially created so
that the Progressive Event Log screen is never blank. The Start of Event Log event itself is purged
once the log becomes full.
Perform the following procedure to access the Progressive Events Log:
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Progressive Events, Figure 3-202.
Figure 3-202 History Menu.

The Progressive Events History screen displays, Figure 3-203.

Figure 3-203 Progressive Events History screen.

2 Select Next and Previous to scroll through the events.

3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

16-020832
3-112 Chapter 3: Software Administration

History - DHCP The DHCP Options Info Log lists all DCHP and SCEP events for jurisdictions that utilize a static IP
Options Info definition for EGMs. Complete the following steps to view DHCP event information:
1 From the Administration Menu, select History | DHCP Options Info, Figure 3-204.
Figure 3-204 History Menu.

The DHCP-SCEP Log screen displays, Figure 3-205.

Figure 3-205 DHCP-SCEP Log screen.

2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-113

Setup Menu The Setup Menus displayed for the operator and attendant are virtually identical except for some
security-related options. This section describes the sub-menus found in the operator and attendant
Setup Menu, Figure 3-206.
NOTES:
 Confirm that no credits are on the game before proceeding with these instructions.
 Clock Setup, Machine Setup, Credit Setup, Comm Setup, Game Setup, and Voucher/Bill Setup
sub-menus, as shown in Figure 3-206, are not accessible from the Attendant Menu.

Figure 3-206 Operator Setup Menu.

One-time Settable One-time settable parameters cannot be modified once they are initially set without performing a
Parameters RAM clear. Table 3-9 list the one-time settable parameters and descriptions.
NOTE: Carefully set each of the following parameters, as these values may only be set one time,
requiring a RAM clear to reset.
Table 3-9 One-Time Settable Parameters.
Parameter Description
Denomination Enter game Base Denomination
Multiple Denominations Set game for Multiple Denominations
Pay Table Percentage Set game Pay Table Percentage
Machine Serial Number Enter game cabinet Serial Number
Asset Number Enter asset number for machine
Host Comm None, SAS Primary or SAS Secondary
Remote Hand Pay Reset Off, Enabled or Disabled
Remote Hand Pay Pending Off, Enabled or Disabled
Legacy Bonusing Off, Enabled or Disabled

NOTE: The following parameters can only be reset if the parameter was set to an option other than
None the first time the game was configured.
Table 3-10 Parameters/Descriptions.
Parameter Description
Ticket Printer Enable & Type Enter Ticket Printer model
Coin Acceptor Enable & Type Enter Coin Acceptor model
Hopper Enable & Type Enter Hopper model
Bill Validator Enable & Type Enter Bill Validator model
Button Panel Enable & Type Enter Button Panel model

16-020832
3-114 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - Touch Calibrating the touch screen is a two-step process used to test the accuracy of screen placement.
Screen Setup The actual calibration is performed first, then the accuracy is tested using the Test Touch Screen
option.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Touch Screen Setup, Figure 3-207.
Figure 3-207 Setup Menu.

NOTE: If the touch screen is not functional at this point, turn the Attendant Key three times to
perform the calibration. See the Administration Menus for further information regarding the
Attendant Key.
The Touchscreen Calibration screen displays, Figure 3-208.
Figure 3-208 Touchscreen Calibration screen.

2 Turn the Attendant Key to calibrate the screen.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-115
3 Select the + (cross) symbol in the lower left-hand corner, Figure 3-209 (A).
Figure 3-209 Touchscreen Test screen.

Touch at the Cross

4 Select the + (cross) symbol in the upper right-hand corner, Figure 3-210 (A). The screen is
now calibrated.
Figure 3-210 Touchscreen Test screen.

Touch at the Cross

A

5 Turn the Attendant Key to exit and return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
3-116 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Testing Accuracy for the Screen Calibration

Perform the following procedure to test the accuracy of the screen calibration.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Touch Screen Setup, Figure 3-211.
Figure 3-211 Setup Menu.

2 Select Test Touch Screen, Figure 3-212 (A), to test the accuracy of the calibration.
Figure 3-212 Touchscreen Calibration screen.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-117
3 Touch a single location on the touch screen. The selected pixels display, Figure 3-213 (A).
Figure 3-213 Touchscreen Test screen: selected pixels.

4 Turn the Attendant Key to exit and return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-118 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - Clock Setup The date and time must be set to maintain accuracy of game logs and other items. Complete the
following steps to set the date and time.
NOTE: OS versions SSOS-000-14A0, SSOS-000-1530, SSOS-000-1620, SSOS-000-1730, SSOS-
000-1830, SSOS-000-1910, SSSG-000-1200, and subsequent releases incorporate the new
Daylight Savings Time (DST) definitions for US and Canadian jurisdictions, per Energy Policy Act of
2005 (PUBLIC LAW 109-58-AUG. 8, 2005). Beginning in 2007, DST begins at 2 a.m. on the second
Sunday of March and ends at 2 a.m. on the first Sunday of November.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Clock Setup, Figure 3-214.
Figure 3-214 Setup Menu.

The Date/Time screen displays, Figure 3-215. Time is on a 12 or 24-hour clock.

Figure 3-215 Date/Time screen.

NOTE: For SSG, the time and date are set automatically.
2 Select Change Time Zone, Figure 3-215 (A).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-119
The Time Zone List screen displays, Figure 3-216.
Figure 3-216 Time Zone List screen.

3 Choose the appropriate time zone from the list and select Set, Figure 3-216 (A). The yellow
text indicates that there is a secondary Time Zone List screen, Figure 3-216.
4 To access Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) Time Zones, select Etc, Figure 3-216 (B). Selecting
Etc displays a Secondary Time Zone List screen with multiple GMT options, Figure 3-217.
Figure 3-217 GMT Time Zone List screen.

5 Choose the appropriate time zone and select Set, Figure 3-217 (A).
NOTE: GMT Time Zone designations are defined in Table 3-11:

Table 3-11 GMT Time Zones.

Time Zone Option
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)* Universal, Zulu, GMT+0, UCT, UTC, GMT-0, GMT0, Greenwich, GMT
East of GMT GMT - x
West of GMT GMT + x
* Multiple options denote the GMT time zone. Each of the listed options identifies the same time zone.
x = Number of hours from GMT.

6 At the Date/Time screen, change the time and date by selecting the individual fields,
Figure 3-215 (B).

16-020832
3-120 Chapter 3: Software Administration

A numeric touchpad displays, Figure 3-218.

Figure 3-218 Date/Time numeric touchpad.

A
B
C

7 Using the numeric touchpad, enter a valid integer for the selected field, Figure 3-218.
8 Select Enter on the touchpad, Figure 3-218 (A), to save the setting.
9 If required for sychronization, reset the seconds to zero by selecting Reset Seconds,
Figure 3-218 (B).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-121
Setup - Machine The Machine Info settings are optional, and no tilt condition occurs if this setting is not entered
Setup - Machine Info during game setup. Machine Info may be used to identify individual games, especially for ticket
Setup printing purposes. When the machine is turned on for the first time, navigate through the enrollment
procedure as outlined below.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Machine Info Setup,
Figure 3-219.
Figure 3-219 Machine Setup Menu.

The Machine Info Setup screen displays, Figure 3-220. The information entered into this
screen is viewable on the Host System and the AOM Server.
Figure 3-220 Machine Info Setup screen.

16-020832
3-122 Chapter 3: Software Administration

2 On the Machine Info Setup screen, select the Set Serial field. The numeric keypad displays,
Figure 3-221.
Figure 3-221 Setting the Serial Number using the numeric keypad.

3 Use the keypad to enter the machine Serial Number and select the keypad Enter field,
Figure 3-221 (A).
4 Select Set Serial, Figure 3-222 (A), to save the serial number. The machine Serial Number is
now set, and the Set Serial field is disabled.
Figure 3-222 Set Serial Number field.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-123
5 Select the Asset Number field.
The Asset Number Keypad displays, Figure 3-223.
Figure 3-223 Asset Number keypad.

6 Use the keypad to enter the machine Asset Number, and then select the keypad Enter field,
Figure 3-223 (A).
7 Select the Set Asset field to save the asset number. The machine Asset Number is now set
and the Set Asset field is disabled, Figure 3-224 (A).
Figure 3-224 Machine Info Setup (completed) screen.

8 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play,
Figure 3-224.

16-020832
3-124 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - Machine This function configures the peripherals on this machine. Complete the following steps to set the
Setup - Cabinet devices:
Setup - Device 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | Device
Setup Setup, Figure 3-225.
Figure 3-225 Cabinet Setup Menu.

The Device Config screen displays, Figure 3-226.

Figure 3-226 Device Config screen.

2 In the Device Config screen, select an option field next to the device type to scroll through the
list of available devices and select the appropriate device for each category, Figure 3-226 (A).
The Button Panel options are described in Table 3-12.

Table 3-12 Button Panel options.

Option Description
Standard Button panel contains the basic button configuration.
USB OLED Button panel is a programmable configuration with Organic Light Emitting Diode (OLED)
display buttons. Use this option for the new Blade s23 button panel 2.0.
Common Button panel contains UP and DOWN buttons for number of lines and bets per line.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-125
NOTE: Changing components on the Device Config screen may require a power cycle or a RAM
clear depending on the following in Table 3-13:
Table 3-13 Device Change specifications
If... then...
a device is changed to none a RAM clear is required.
no device is changed to a device a RAM clear is required.
a device is changed to a different device a power cycle is required.

3 All devices on this screen must be set simultaneously. Once the Save field is selected, all the
options are saved and cannot be changed without a RAM clear, Figure 3-227.
Figure 3-227 Device Config data modification screen.

4 Select Yes to save the selections, Figure 3-227 (A).

A screen displaying the selected configuration displays.
5 Select Exit to return to the Menu.

Testing Printers When a printer is installed and configured, complete the following steps to confirm functionality:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | Device
Setup, Figure 3-228.
Figure 3-228 Cabinet Setup Menu.

16-020832
3-126 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Device Config screen displays, Figure 3-229.

Figure 3-229 Device Config screen.

A B

2 Select Print Void Voucher to print a void voucher, Figure 3-229 (A).
A void voucher prints.
NOTE: The feature described in the next step supports Episodic Gaming and may not apply to
all themes.
3 For Episodic Gaming themes, each player can create a unique login ID that is stored in a
national database. A barcoded reminder slip corresponding to that unique login ID may be
printed. Select Print Test Reminder to print a layout example of the reminder slip,
Figure 3-229 (B).
A test reminder slip prints.
4 Select Exit to return to the Menu.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-127
Setup - Machine Complete the following procedure to configure the Location Setup screen to specify how many
Setup - Cabinet games are in a bank, and how the bank is arranged.
Setup - Location 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | Location
Setup Setup, Figure 3-230.
Figure 3-230 Cabinet Setup Menu.

The Location Setup screen displays, Figure 3-231.

Figure 3-231 Location Setup screen.

16-020832
3-128 Chapter 3: Software Administration

2 Select the Zone field, Figure 3-232 (A).

The Zone Keypad displays, Figure 3-232 (B).
Figure 3-232 Location Setup screen - Zone Keypad.
A

3 Enter the Zone number in the keypad, then select Enter, Figure 3-232 (C).
4 Select the Group field, Figure 3-233 (A).
The Group Keypad displays, Figure 3-233 (B).
Figure 3-233 Location Setup - Group Keypad.
A

5 Enter the Group number in the keypad, then select Enter, Figure 3-233 (C).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-129
6 Select the Units in Group field, Figure 3-234 (A).
The Units in Group Keypad displays, Figure 3-234 (B).
Figure 3-234 Location Setup screen - Units in Group keypad.

7 Enter the number of Units in the Group into the keypad and select Enter, Figure 3-234 (C).
8 Select the Unit field, Figure 3-235 (A).
The Unit Keypad displays, Figure 3-235 (B).
Figure 3-235 Location Setup screen - Unit keypad.

9 Enter the Unit number in the keypad and select Enter, Figure 3-235 (C).

16-020832
3-130 Chapter 3: Software Administration

10 Select the check box for the appropriate configuration for the location setup:
 Gaming Machines are in a Line, Figure 3-236 (A).
 Gaming Machines are in a Circle, Figure 3-236 (B).

Figure 3-236 Location Setup screen - Line or Circle configuration check box.

A B

A check mark displays in the selected configuration, Figure 3-236 (C).

11 When all of the appropriate fields have been entered, exit the Location Setup Menu by entering
selecting Return to Game, or Exit.

Setup - Machine The EGM Physical Setup options allow for descriptive information about the EGM to be set. This
Setup - Cabinet information is provided to the AOM Application for Network Gaming and Portal System
Setup - EGM configurations for ease of game identification.
Physical Setup 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | EGM
Physical Setup, Figure 3-237.
Figure 3-237 Cabinet Setup Menu.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-131
The EGM Physical Setup screen displays, Figure 3-238.
Figure 3-238 EGM Physical Setup screen.

2 Define the cabinet attributes, Figure 3-238 (A).

3 Select Set, Figure 3-238 (B).
4 Press Exit to return to the Administration Menu.
Setup - Machine The XD Lighting Setup screen is used to adjust the intensity of the Attract and In Play lighting for xD-
Setup - Cabinet enabled games. Complete the following procedure to set up XD lighting.
Setup - XD Setup - 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | XD Setup |
XD Lighting Setup XD Lighting Setup, Figure 3-239.
Figure 3-239 XD Setup Menu.

16-020832
3-132 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The XD Lighting Setup screen displays, Figure 3-240. The XD Lighting Setup screen is used to
adjust the Attract and In Play lighting displays for xD-enabled cabinets.
Figure 3-240 XD Lighting Setup screen.

2 To adjust the lighting intensity for the Attract or In Play lighting, slide the indicator,
Figure 3-240 (A), up or down, or select + (plus) or - (minus).
The game lighting adjusts to reflect the sample each time the lighting setting is modified.
3 When the lighting is set to the preferred level, select Save and Exit, Figure 3-240 (B).

Setup - Machine Environmental Control Server (ECS) stores events from the EGMs, and based on those events runs
Setup - Cabinet the casino or area wide lighting and sound shows. The ECS setup involves entering the IP Address
Setup - XD ECS and Port number for the game.
Setup 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | XD Setup |
XD ECS Setup, Figure 3-241.
Figure 3-241 XD Setup Menu.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-133
The Environmental Control Server Setup screen displays, Figure 3-242.
Figure 3-242 Environmental Control Server Setup screen.

2 Select the IPv4 Address field, Figure 3-242 (A).

The IP Address keypad displays, Figure 3-243.
3 Enter the IP Address for the Environmental Control Server in the IP Address keypad,
Figure 3-243, and select Enter.
Figure 3-243 Environmental Control Server Setup screen - IP Address keypad.

4 Select the Port field, Figure 3-242 (B).

16-020832
3-134 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Port Number keypad displays, Figure 3-244.

Figure 3-244 Environmental Control Server Setup screen - Port keypad.

5 Enter the Port Number for the Environmental Control Server in the Port keypad,
Figure 3-244 (B), and select Enter.
6 Select Save and Exit to save the settings and exit the Environmental Control Server Setup
screen.

Setup - Machine Use the Language Setup option to set operator and player languages, and to view which languages
Setup - Language are available on the game CompactFlash. Complete the following steps to configure the language:
Setup 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Language Setup,
Figure 3-245.
Figure 3-245 Machine Setup Menu.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-135
The Language Configuration screen displays, Figure 3-246.
Figure 3-246 Language Configuration Menu.

A B

2 Select inside the Operator Language field to set the language of the Administration Menu
options and system messages. The default language is English.
3 Select inside the Default Player Language field to set the default language for player options
and message. The default language is English.
NOTE: If the game does not support the selected Operator or Default Player language, English
is used.
4 The Player Language options allow you to select additional languages. If the language is
available in the game software, it is marked as Yes in the Installed (CF) column, Figure 3-246
(B). If a language is set to Allow, Figure 3-246 (A), and is available in the game software, the
player can select that language during play. To not offer a language, set it to Disallow.
5 Select Save, Figure 3-246 (C), to capture the settings.
6 Press Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Setup - Machine The Machine IP Setup option is used to configure the EGM to connect to a CGC or Bank Controller
Setup - Machine IP (for Portal Systems).
Setup 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Machine IP Setup,
Figure 3-247.
Figure 3-247 Machine Setup Menu.

16-020832
3-136 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen displays, Figure 3-248.

Figure 3-248 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

2 Set the Enable CGC field to YES, Figure 3-249 (A).

Figure 3-249 Enabling CGC on Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-137
The CGC Communication field automatically sets to Required, Figure 3-250 (A).
3 Enter the Network Name Server IP Address manually by selecting the Network Name Server
field in the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen, Figure 3-250 (B).
Figure 3-250 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen - CGC Communication field updated.

The Network Name Server Keyboard displays, Figure 3-251 (A).

Figure 3-251 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen - Keyboard.

4 Enter the Network Name Server IP Address, select Enter, Figure 3-251 (B), and then select
Set, Figure 3-251 (C).

16-020832
3-138 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Network Name Server IP Address information entered displays in the Network Name Server
field, Figure 3-252 (A).
Figure 3-252 Machine Ethernet IP Setup - Network Name Server.

Configuring G2S Section on Machine Ethernet IP Setup Screen to Communicate with

SBX
G2S (Game-to-System) section of the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen must be configured in
order to communicate with SBX.
The following fields in the G2S Configuration section of the Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen must
be configured in order to communicate with the EGM:
 Host ID, Figure 3-253 (A)
 Vendor ID, Figure 3-253 (B)
 URL, Figure 3-253 (C)

1 Enter the Host ID by selecting the Host Id field, Figure 3-253 (A).
Figure 3-253 Machine Ethernet IP screen.

A C

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-139
The Host ID Keypad displays, Figure 3-254 (A).
Figure 3-254 Host ID Keypad - Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

2 Enter the Host ID as 1 and select Enter, Figure 3-254 (B),

3 Select Set, Figure 3-254 (C).
The Host ID 1 displays, Figure 3-255 (A).
Figure 3-255 Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen.

A C

4 Enter IGT as the Primary Host Vendor for Host ID 1, Figure 3-255 (B).
5 Enter the URL for the Primary Host ID 1, by selecting the URL field in the Machine Ethernet IP
Setup screen, Figure 3-255 (C).

16-020832
3-140 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The URL Keyboard displays, Figure 3-256.

Figure 3-256 URL Keyboard - Machine Ethernet IP screen.

6 Enter the IP Address and the Port Number, Figure 3-256 (B).
For example:
10.100.10.50:55555
7 Select the second Host ID row. Enter Host ID 2 for WMS.
8 Enter the vendor as WMS.
9 Enter the IP Address and the Port Number, Figure 3-256 (B).
For example:
10.100.10.50:55555
NOTE: The Port Number and IP Address need to be verified with the casino. The examples that
are listed in this procedure are not actual IP Addresses that can be used.
10 Select Set to save the changes, Figure 3-256 (C).
11 Set the type of machine in the SB Location field, (A).
 Set the SB Location field to Top for Lava machines.
 Set the SB Location field to Right for Video Bluebird machines.
Machine Ethernet IP Setup screen - SB Location Field.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-141
Setup - Machine Use the Certificate Setup option to configure games for SBX. For more information, see Setup and
Setup - Certificate Configuration of the EGM with SBX as the Primary Host on page 2-108.
Setup 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Certificate Setup,
Figure 3-257.
Figure 3-257 Machine Setup Menu.

The Certificates screen displays, Figure 3-258.

Figure 3-258 Certificates screen - SCEP Field.

2 Select the SCEP Url field in the Root Certificate section of the Certificates screen,
Figure 3-258 (A).

16-020832
3-142 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The SCEP URL Keyboard displays, Figure 3-259.

Figure 3-259 SCEP URL Keyboard.

A B

3 Enter the SCEP Url, Figure 3-259 (A).

NOTE: The following SCEP URL is shown as an example.
Please contact the administrator to confirm the correct SCEP URL.
For example:
10.100.10.32:80/crtsrv/mscep
4 Select Enter on the SCEP URL keyboard to submit the 7SCEP URL, Figure 3-259 (B).
The SCEP URL displays in the SCEP URL field of the Certificates screen, Figure 3-260 (A).
Figure 3-260 SCEP URL Field.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-143
5 Select Get Root, Figure 3-261 (A).
Figure 3-261 Certificates screen - Fingerprint displayed.

The Fingerprint displays in the Fingerprint field, Figure 3-261 (B).

6 Select Accept Certificate to acknowledge the Certificate, Figure 3-262 (A).

Figure 3-262 Certificates screen - Certificate Successfully Downloaded and Installed to EGM.

Generate Certificate button becomes active and the Fingerprint displays,

Figure 3-262 (B).

16-020832
3-144 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Generating a G2S Certificate for G2S Communications

Complete the following procedure to generate a G2S Certificate to establish G2S Communications.
1 Select the fields to enter the certificate information for G2S, Figure 3-263 (A).
Figure 3-263 Certificate Information Fields for G2S.

The Organization Keyboard for entering certificate information displays, Figure 3-264.
Figure 3-264 Organization Keyboard - Certificates screen.
A

2 Enter the Country, State, Location, Organization, Organization Unit, Validation Period (in
days), and Challenge Password (if required), Figure 3-264 (A).
3 Select Enter after each value is entered on the keyboard to submit the information,
Figure 3-264 (B).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-145
4 Select Generate Certificate, Figure 3-265 (A).
Figure 3-265 Certificates screen.
B

The Fingerprint of the Root Certificate is displayed in the Certificates screen, Figure 3-265 (B).
5 Once the Certificate is generated, the Fingerprints display in the Fingerprints field
Figure 3-266 (A).

Figure 3-266 G2S Certificate Generation completed.

Two Fingerprints display when the G2S certificate generation process is successfully
completed, Figure 3-266 (A).

16-020832
3-146 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Generating a Root Certificate for Flash Communications

Perform the following procedure to generate a Root Certificate for Flash Communications.
1 Select Next, Figure 3-267 (A), on the Certificates screen.
Figure 3-267 Certificates screen - Next Button.

The Certificates screen displays with the Flash Certificate Information fields, Figure 3-268.
Figure 3-268 Certificates screen - Flash.

2 Select the SCEP Url field, located on the Certificates screen, Figure 3-268 (A).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-147
The SCEP URL Keyboard displays, Figure 3-269.
Figure 3-269 Certificates screen - SCEP URL Keyboard.

3 Enter the SCEP URL, Figure 3-269 (A).

4 Select Enter on the SCEP URL Keyboard to submit the SCEP URL, Figure 3-269 (B).
NOTE: The following SCEP URL is shown as an example. Please contact the administrator to
confirm the correct SCEP URL.
For example: 10.100.10.32:80/crtsrv/mscep
5 Select Get Root, Figure 3-270 (A).
Figure 3-270 Certificates screen.

The Fingerprint displays in the Fingerprint field, Figure 3-270 (B).

6 Select Accept Certificate, Figure 3-270 (C).

16-020832
3-148 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Generating a Flash Certificate for Flash Communications

Complete the following steps to generate a certificate for flash communications:
1 Select the Country field, Figure 3-271 (A).
Figure 3-271 Certificates screen - Country Field.

The Country Keyboard for entering Flash Certificate Information displays, Figure 3-272.
Figure 3-272 Keyboard for Entering Flash Certificate Information.

2 In the keyboard input area enter the appropriate Country for the Certificate, Figure 3-272 (A).
3 Select Enter on the keyboard to submit the information, Figure 3-272 (B).
4 Enter the State, Location, Organization, Organization Unit, Validation Period, and
Challenge Password (if required).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-149
5 Select Generate Certificate, Figure 3-273 (A).
Figure 3-273 Certificate screen - Generate Certificate.

The Fingerprints display in the Fingerprint fields, Figure 3-274 (A).

Figure 3-274 Certificates screen - Fingerprint displayed.

Two Fingerprints display when the Flash certificate generation process is successfully
completed, Figure 3-274.

16-020832
3-150 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Certificates - Save Confirmation screen displays, Figure 3-275.

Figure 3-275 Certificates - Save Confirmation screen.

6 Select Yes to Save the Certificates, Figure 3-275 (A).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-151
Setup - Machine OCSP Setup is available for limited jurisdictions (VLT), and allows for the definition of the Online
Setup - OCSP Setup Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) that secures communications between the game and a remote
server. Use the OCSP Setup screen to define the server and related settings. Complete the
following steps to set the OCSP options:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | OCSP Setup, Figure 3-276.
Figure 3-276 Machine Setup Menu.

The OCSP Setup screen displays, Figure 3-277.

Figure 3-277 OCSP Setup screen.

2 Enter the required settings as specified by jurisdictional requirements.

3 Select Save to capture the settings.
4 Press Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
3-152 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - Machine Static IP Setup is available for limited jurisdictions (VLT), and allows for the definition of an IP
Setup - Static IP address for the EGM. Use the Static IP Setup screen to define the address and related settings.
Setup Complete the following steps to set the Static IP settings:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Static IP Setup, Figure 3-278.
Figure 3-278 Machine Setup Menu.

The Static IP Setup screen displays, Figure 3-279.

Figure 3-279 Static IP Setup screen.

2 Enter the settings as specified by your network administrator.

3 Select Set to capture the settings.
4 Press Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-153
Setup - Machine The definition of Operating Hours is available for limited jurisdictions (VLT), and allow the EGM to be
Setup - Operating operation only for select times during each day of the week.Complete the following steps to set the
Hours Operating Hours:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Operating Hours,
Figure 3-280.
Figure 3-280 Machine Setup Menu.

The Operating Hours Setup screen displays, Figure 3-281.

Figure 3-281 Operating Hours Setup screen.

2 Enter the required settings and select Save, or select Change Schedule to modify the hours.
3 Press Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
3-154 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - Machine Starting with OS NSOS-000-3000 and SSSG-000-16C0, an automated RAM clear option is
Setup - Perform available if allowed in the jurisdiction, as dictated by the SPI. Complete the automated RAM clear in
RAM Clear one of three ways. If necessary, a manual RAM clear using a CompactFlash card may also be
completed.
Performing a RAM Clear from Administration Mode
1 Open the Main Door/Hatch.
2 Open the CPU Logic Door.
3 Press the DIAGNOSTIC button.
The Administration Menu displays. If the CPU Logic Door is not open, a message displays to
indicate that the Logic Door must be open.
4 Select Setup | Machine Setup | Perform RAM Clear, Figure 3-282.
Figure 3-282 Machine Setup Menu.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-155
5 Depending on Jurisdictional SPI chip settings, up to four RAM clear options may be available,
Figure 3-283.
Figure 3-283 RAM clear options.

Table 3-14 RAM clear options.

Option Definition
Cancel Does not initiate a RAM clear.
RAM Clear Retain Performs a partial RAM clear. The game image is retained on the CPU hard drive, so that game
Images and content does not need to be downloaded after the RAM clear. All game configuration options,
Configuration including all Setup options, remain unchanged and do not need to be reset after the RAM clear.
Game Play History, Event History, Money In/Out History, and Hard Drive Logs are also retained.
RAM Clear Retain Performs a partial RAM clear. The game image is retained on the CPU hard drive, so that game
Images content does not need to be downloaded after the RAM clear.
RAM Clear Performs a full RAM clear. The game will need to be fully reconfigured after a reboot.

6 If applicable, select a RAM clear option.

7 Select Yes at the confirmation message.
The RAM clear initiates. When complete, the game reboots.
8 If applicable, insert new Game and/or OS CompactFlash cards after initiating the RAM clear,
and the EGM will boot with the new OS and/or game version(s).
Performing a RAM Clear from a Fault (if permitted in jurisdiction)
If the CPU Logic Door is open, the EGM can perform a RAM clear from a fault condition.
1 If the CPU Logic Door is open, the option to initiate a RAM clear displays on the Fault screen,
Figure 3-284 (A).
Figure 3-284 RAM clear option on Fault screen.

2 Press the DIAGNOSTICS button to toggle between the available options and select Ram Clear.
3 Turn the Attendant Key.
The RAM Clear initiates. When complete, the game reboots.

16-020832
3-156 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Performing a RAM Clear using the DIAGNOSTIC Button (if permitted in jurisdiction)
1 Open the Main Door/Hatch.
2 If necessary, power the game OFF.
3 Open the CPU Logic Door.
4 Power the game ON.
5 A message in the boot sequence displays a Please PRESS DIAG button NOW for RAMCLEAR
message, Figure 3-285.
Figure 3-285 RAM clear during game boot up, close-up (right).

6 Press the DIAGNOSTIC button.

The RAM clear initiates. When complete, the EGM boots and loads the game.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-157
Setup - Machine Starting with OS NSOS-000-4021, the option to execute G2S commands that require user input is
Setup - Apply G2S available. Complete the following steps to access and execute G2S commands:
Commands 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Apply G2S Commands,
Figure 3-286.
Figure 3-286 Machine Setup Menu.

The G2S Commands To Apply screen displays, Figure 3-287.

Figure 3-287 G2S Commands to Apply screen.

2 Select Accept or Reject to respond to an available commands as needed.

3 Press Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-158 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - Credit Setup Credit Setup settings are extremely important and involve game play money amounts and maximum
quantity limitations determined by the casino, the taxation authority, and, in some cases,
jurisdictional requirements. Credit setup is restricted to operators and technicians (attendants are
not permitted access). Each category, when selected, opens a keypad for changing that particular
amount. After entering the new amount, for added security, a warning message displays, verifying
whether or not to save the modified amount(s). The game denomination sets the value of the coin
that the game accepts and on which the game bases the award value.
NOTE: All fields where denomination or monetary entries are applied support three digits past the
decimal.
 Confirm that no credits are on the game before proceeding with these instructions.
 Once set, a RAM clear is required to change these settings.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Credit Setup, Figure 3-288.
Figure 3-288 Setup Menu.

The Credit Limits screen displays, Figure 3-289.

Figure 3-289 Credit Limits screen.

2 Select the Base Denom field, Figure 3-289 (A).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-159
The Base Denom keypad displays, Figure 3-290 (A).
Figure 3-290 Credit Limits screen and Base Denom numeric touchpad window.

3 Using the Base Denom keypad, enter the Base Denomination for the machine, then select
Enter, Figure 3-290 (B), to save the Base Denomination amount.
NOTE: Carefully enter this value, as a RAM clear is required if the incorrect denomination is
entered.
4 The Base Denomination field is now populated with the Base Denomination Amount on the
Credit Limits screen, Figure 3-291 (A).
Figure 3-291 Credit Limits screen - Base Denom Set.

5 Enter each limit value that is appropriate for the jurisdiction or location, Figure 3-291.
See Table 3-15 on page 3-160 for descriptions of the Input Limits and Output Limits fields.
6 If applicable, Select the Multi-Denom field to toggle Enable or Disable for the setting,
Figure 3-291 (B).
7 Select Set, Figure 3-291 (C).
8 Select Denom Configuration to select the paytables to configure, Figure 3-291 (D).

16-020832
 3-160 Chapter 3: Software Administration

9 Match a paytable with each desired denomination. Continue to the next section to set the pay
tables.

NOTE: The Progressive Limit Field is used by select jurisdictions. Progressive Limit, when enabled,
applies to ALL Progressive Awards, SAP (Scaling or Non-Scaling), WAP, and LAP.
Table 3-15 details the Credit Limit screen fields.

Table 3-15 Credit Limit Screen Fields.

Field Definition
Bill and Coin In Limit The maximum amount of cash that the jurisdictions limit the total value of cash that can
be accepted and this the maximum amount of that value.
AFT and Voucher In Limit Limits the amount of credit that can be added to a game with an Advanced Funds
Transfer (AFT) or with a printed voucher that can be added to the game.
Credit Limit The maximum amount of credits that may be shown on the credit meter at any time.
Set the maximum amount (in dollars) of credits the machine holds. When exceeded, it
triggers an automatic payout.
Jackpot Limit The level at which a single win amount will cause the gaming machine to display a
Jackpot Win. Set this field to the amount of money which, when reached or exceeded,
requires the intervention of an attendant.
Multi-Denom If applicable, enables or disables the multi-denomination feature.
Progressive Limit The Progressive Limit Field is used by certain International Jurisdictions. Progressive
Limit, when enabled in a Jurisdiction, applies to ALL Progressive Awards, SAP (Scaling
or Non-Scaling), WAP, and LAP.
Hopper Limit The maximum amount of coins that can be paid by the Hopper during a single
transaction. Set the maximum amount (in dollars) that can be paid by the machine
(before a hand pay is required).
Printer Limit The maximum value that may be printed for a voucher. Set the maximum amount (in
dollars) that the Printer may produce.
Upper Jackpot The highest amount of money from a Jackpot Handpay that can be put back on the
Credit Meter in High Stakes gaming machines through a Remote Handpay Reset with
SAS systems. The limit must be set equal to or lower than the Credit Limit and equal to
or higher than the Jackpot Limit.
Coin Pay Limit This limit is used in conjunction with the Split Pay option when both a Hopper and a
Printer are enabled on a gaming machine. Set the maximum amount (in dollars) that
the Hopper can pay when split pay is enabled.

Setting up Paytables Table 3-16 lists the paytable descriptions, abbreviations, and examples.
Table 3-16 Paytable Naming Conventions.

Paytable Description Abbreviations Paytable Example

Wide Area Progressive Prog:WAP MonoATB-40-86-pW-jNV-d1c
Local Area Progressive Prog:LAP MonoATB-20-86 86.12% Prog: LAP Denom: 5c
Stand-alone Progressive (no Prog:SAP Ddublin-9-90 90.12% MaxBetPerLine: 20 Prog: SAP
controller)
Wide area and Local Area Prog:WALAP MonoATB-20-86 86.34% Prog: WALAP Jur: NV Denom: 5c
progressive
Wide area and Stand-alone Prog:WASAP MonoATB-20-86 86.12% Prog: WASAP Denom: 5c
progressive
Wide area, Local area, and Prog:WLSAP MonoATB-20-86 86.12% Prog: WSLAP Denom: 5c
Stand-alone progressive
PORTAL PT ValiantKnight-20-90 90.12% Portal
Nevada Jurisdiction Jur: NV WizardOfOzII-20-92 92.12% Prog: WAP Jur: NV
Native American Jurisdiction Jur: NA MonoATB-20-86 86.12% Prog: WAP Jur: NA Denom: 5c
United Kingdom jur Jur: UK JkptBlockParty-40-96 96.12% Jur: UK
US (Domestic) Domestic GoldFishRFTG-25-90 90.12% Domestic
International International GoldFishRFTG-25-90 90.34% International

NOTE: Paytable names and game names are not translated.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-161
Figure 3-292 shows the paytable naming convention.
Figure 3-292 Paytable Naming convention.

Cheese Caper-20-89-MAXBET8 89.06% exact

percentage
game name max coins per line or game
(view last button on Top and Bottom lines)
line configuration
percentage level

Selecting Paytables Complete the following steps to select paytables:

1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Credit Setup, Figure 3-293.
Figure 3-293 Setup Menu.

The Credit Limits screen displays, Figure 3-294.

Figure 3-294 Credit Limits screen.

2 Select Denom Configuration to begin the process of selecting paytables, Figure 3-294 (A).

16-020832
3-162 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Denom Configuration screen displays, Figure 3-295.

Figure 3-295 Denom Configuration screen.

3 Select Unassigned to view the denominations that are not assigned to a paytable,
Figure 3-295 (A).
4 Select the denomination to configure, Figure 3-295 (B).
The available paytables for the selected denomination display in the Denom Configuration
screen, Figure 3-296.
Figure 3-296 Denom Configuration screen.

A B C

Denoms may be sorted by the following criteria:

 All, Figure 3-296 (A) which displays all denoms,
 Assigned, Figure 3-296 (B), which displays denoms that have been assigned paytables.
 Unassigned, Figure 3-296 (C) which displays denoms that have not been assigned
paytables.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-163
5 Choose the correct pay table from the options and select Set, Figure 3-296 (D).
6 If Multi-Denom is enabled, repeat step 4 and step 5 until all valid denominations are assigned
pay tables.
NOTES:
Until Save is selected, the recently set denominations pay tables are highlighted, with the


field changed to a green background, Figure 3-296.

 If this theme is a progressive game, the pay table must match the theme and max bet amount
selected in the Site Controller or Local Controller software configuration.
7 When complete, select Save, Figure 3-296 (D).
8 The Pay Glass Warning displays with a reminder that the Pay Glass and the Reel Strips are
required to match the game configuration, Figure 3-297.

9 Read the warning information and select Yes to save the configuration, or No to return to the
Denom Configuration screen, Figure 3-297 (A).
Figure 3-297 Pay Glass Warning.
B

B C

10 If Multi-Denom is enabled, repeat until all valid denominations are assigned paytables. Until
Save is selected, the denominations for which you are setting pay tables are highlighted, with
the field changed to a green background, Figure 3-297 (B).
11 To calculate the CRC for each denomination selected, select CRC Check,
Figure 3-297 (C).
12 When complete, select Save to set the denomination pay tables, Figure 3-297 (B).
The Pay Glass Warning may display with a reminder that the Pay Glass and the Reel Strips are
required to match the game configuration, Figure 3-297.
13 Confirm that the Pay Glass and the Reel Strips correspond to the configuration and select YES,
Figure 3-297 (A).

16-020832
3-164 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Multi-Game Configuration screen displays, Figure 3-298.

Figure 3-298 Multi-Game Configuration screen.

14 Repeat this procedure for each episode requiring denomination configuration.

Enabling the Subtoken Wager Feature

Complete the following steps to enable the Subtoken Wager Feature:
1 Select a game under Subtoken Games to configure a game for fractional credits,
Figure 3-298 (B).
The Subtoken Wager Setup screen displays, Figure 3-299.
Figure 3-299 Subtoken Wager Setup screen.

NOTE: Subtoken Wager Feature - If the base denomination is one dollar, and the casino patron
has a credit of fifty cents on the EGM (or any fractional credit), the Subtoken Wager feature
enables the patron to play off the fractional credit, or play to win an amount to reach the full
credit amount.
2 Select Subtoken Wager Feature Enabled checkbox to enable the Subtoken Wager Feature
option, Figure 3-299 (A).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-165
3 Select Save to save the Subtoken Wager Feature option, Figure 3-299 (B).
4 Select Save for All Paytables to lock the settings of the multiple episodes,
Figure 3-298 (A).

NOTE: Denomination paytables cannot be configured after saving the settings. Configuration
for the denomination pay tables of added episodes or changes to the existing episodes requires
a RAM clear.
A confirmation save request prompt displays, Figure 3-300.
Figure 3-300 Game Configuration - Save Confirmation screen.

5 Select Confirm to save the paytables, Figure 3-300 (A).

6 The Credit Limits screen displays, Figure 3-301.

Figure 3-301 Credit Limits screen.

7 Continue to the next procedure to set up cash out options, Setting Up Cash Out and
Promotional Options on page 3-166

16-020832
 3-166 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setting Up Cash Out The Cash Out Options are used to set up pay (Split Pay), and hand pay (Validation and/or Receipt).
and Promotional These features are either Enabled or Disabled.
Options 1 Select Cash Out and Promotional Options, Figure 3-302 (A), from the Credit Limits screen to
set multiple payout options.
Figure 3-302 Credit Limits - Cash Out and Promotional Options.

2 The Cash Out Options screen displays, Figure 3-303.

Figure 3-303 Cash Out Options screen.

3 Toggle each option to Disabled or Enable, as required. See Table 3-17 on page 3-167 for a
description of the fields on the Cash Out and Promotional Options screen, Figure 3-303 (A).
NOTE: The “Jackpot Celebration Mode” is intended to be used only with Gaming Related
Intelligent Products and Systems, Inc. (GRiPs) host systems. The use of this option will have an
adverse impact for any other host system. For non-GRiPs systems, use the “Disabled” setting.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-167
Table 3-17 describes the Cash Out Options screen fields.

Table 3-17 Cash Out and Promotional Options.

Field Definition
Split Pay Only affects gaming machines that have both Hopper and Printer devices
enabled. When Split Pay is enabled, if the amount to be paid from the Hopper
exceeds the Coin Pay Limit, the Hopper dispenses coins in an amount equal to
the Coin Pay Limit and the machine prints a barcode voucher to pay the
remainder.
Hand Pay Validation Determines whether or not the gaming machine will be backward compatible with
SAS protocol versions prior to v5.10.
Hand Pay Receipt Only affects gaming machines that are configured to use SAS Enhanced
Validation with the Validation Security option enabled.
Restricted Set to Enable to accept restricted promotional credits. Restricted credits are
Promotional Credits credits awarded to the player that must be wagered and may not be cashed out.
Print Restricted Set to Enable to allow for the printing of a restricted promotional credit voucher.
Promotional Credits This voucher remains a restricted promotional credit which must be wagered.
However, the credit may be transferred between multiple games for wagering.
Non Restricted Set to Enable to allow players to cash out non-restricted promotional credits.
Promotional Credits Non-restricted promotional credits are awarded to players and may be either
wagered or cashed out.
Credits Remain On This is a SAS feature that works in configurations that use the SAS Shutdown
Machine During (0x01) Long poll. When the feature is enabled, the SAS HOST disables the EGM
Disable from SAS and does not allow the player to initiate a cash out. The “Machine Disabled” Tilts
message will not have a Cashout button.
Jackpot Celebration Used only with Gaming Related Intelligent Products and Systems, Inc. (GRiPs)
Mode (GRiPS Only) host systems. If set to Enable, this option allows the game to report when a
Jackpot is hit between the lower Jackpot limit and the Upper Jackpot limit. This
option is intended to be used only with GRiPs host systems, and will have an
adverse impact if enabled for any other host system. For non-GRiPs systems, use
the Disabled setting.
Printer Paper Out/ If set to Enable, game play will continue even during a printer paper out or
Comm Loss (Non communication loss condition. The default setting is Disabled for most
Suspend Tilt) jurisdictions. If a cashout occurs, a handpay will be required.

4 To display the WMS logo when a player is cashing out, select Cash Out Features,
Figure 3-304 (A).
Figure 3-304 Cash Out Options screen.

16-020832
3-168 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Cash Out Features screen displays, Figure 3-305.

Figure 3-305 Cash Out Features screen.

5 Toggle the Logo Cash Out Window field to Enabled, Figure 3-305 (A).
6 Select Save to return to the Cash Out and Promotional Options screen, Figure 3-305 (B).
The Cash Out Options screen displays, Figure 3-306.
Figure 3-306 Cash Out Options screen.

7 Once the appropriate Cash Out Options are set, select Save to save the settings,
Figure 3-306 (A).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-169
The Cash Out Options screen displays with the following message: Should the data be saved?
8 Select YES, Figure 3-307 (A).
Figure 3-307 Cash Out Options screen.

The Credit Limits screen displays, Figure 3-308.

Figure 3-308 Credit Limits screen.

9 When the credit settings are complete on the Credit Limits screen, select Set, Figure 3-308 (A).

16-020832
 3-170 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Credit Limits screen displays with the following message:

Data was modified. Should the data be saved?, Figure 3-309.
Figure 3-309 Credit Limits - confirmation prompt.

10 Select Yes to save the changes and close the screen, Figure 3-309 (A).

Setup - Denom Complete the following steps to configure Poker xD games:

Configuration and  Confirm that no credits are on the game before proceeding with these instructions.
Paytable Selection -
 Once set, perform a RAM clear to change these settings.
Poker xD Games
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Credit Setup, Figure 3-310.
Figure 3-310 Setup Menu.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-171
The Credit Limits screen displays, Figure 3-311.
Figure 3-311 Credit Limits screen.

2 Select the Base Denom field, Figure 3-311 (A).

The Base Denom keypad displays, Figure 3-312 (A).
Figure 3-312 Credit Limits screen and Base Denom numeric touchpad window.

3 Using the Base Denom keypad, enter the Base Denomination for the machine, then select
Enter, Figure 3-312 (B), to save the Base Denomination amount.
NOTE: Carefully enter this value, as a RAM clear is required if the incorrect denomination is
entered.

16-020832
3-172 Chapter 3: Software Administration

4 The Base Denomination field is now populated with the Base Denomination Amount on the
Credit Limits screen, Figure 3-313 (A).
Figure 3-313 Credit Limits screen - Base Denom Set.

A
B

5 Enter each limit value that is appropriate for the jurisdiction or location, Figure 3-313.
See Table 3-15 on page 3-160 for descriptions of the Input Limits and Output Limits fields.
6 If applicable, Select the Multi-Denom field to toggle Enable or Disable for the setting,
Figure 3-313 (B).
7 Select Set, Figure 3-313 (C).
8 Select Denom Configuration to select the paytables to configure, Figure 3-313 (D).
The Feature Game Configuration screen displays, Figure 3-314.
Figure 3-314 Feature Game Configuration screen.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-173
9 Select the Feature Game to configure.
The Multi-Game Configuration screen displays, Figure 3-315.
Figure 3-315 Multi-Game Configuration screen.

10 Select the Base Game to configure.

The Denom Configuration screen displays, Figure 3-316.
Figure 3-316 Denom Configuration screen.

D A

11 Select Unassigned to view the denominations that are not assigned to a paytable,
Figure 3-316 (A).
12 Select the denomination to configure, Figure 3-316 (B).

16-020832
3-174 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The available paytables for the selected denomination display in the Denom Configuration
screen, Figure 3-317.
Figure 3-317 Denom Configuration screen.

A B C

Denoms may be sorted by the following criteria:

 All, Figure 3-317 (A) which displays all denoms,
 Assigned, Figure 3-317 (B), which displays denoms that have been assigned paytables.
 Unassigned, Figure 3-317 (C) which displays denoms that have not been assigned
paytables.
13 Choose the correct pay table from the options and select Save, Figure 3-317 (D).
14 If Multi-Denom is enabled, repeat step 12 and step 13 until all valid denominations are
assigned pay tables.
NOTE: Until Save is selected, the recently set denominations pay tables are highlighted, with
the field changed to a green background, Figure 3-317.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-175
15 The Pay Glass Warning displays with a reminder that the Pay Glass and the Reel Strips are
required to match the game configuration, Figure 3-318.
Figure 3-318 Pay Glass Warning.
B

B C

16 Read the warning information and select Yes to save the configuration, or No to return to the
Denom Configuration screen, Figure 3-318 (A).
17 If Multi-Denom is enabled, repeat until all valid denominations are assigned paytables.
18 To calculate the CRC for each denomination selected, select CRC Check,
Figure 3-318 (C).
19 When complete, select Save to set the denomination pay tables, Figure 3-318 (B).
The Pay Glass Warning may display with a reminder that the Pay Glass and the Reel Strips are
required to match the game configuration, Figure 3-318.
20 Confirm that the Pay Glass and the Reel Strips correspond to the configuration and select YES,
Figure 3-318 (A).
21 Repeat this procedure for each Feature Game requiring denomination configuration. Proceed
to step 9 on page 3-173.

16-020832
 3-176 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - To configure the serial ports, complete the following steps:

Communication 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | Serial Ports, Figure 3-319.
Setup - Serial Ports
Figure 3-319 Comm Setup Menu.

The Serial Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 3-320.

Figure 3-320 Serial Comm Setup screen.

2 Select the Host Comm I field to scroll through available options, Figure 3-320 (A).
3 Select Config (to the right of the Host Comm I field) to set additional features for SAS,
Figure 3-320 (B).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-177
See Table 3-18 for details about the Host Comm Field settings.

Table 3-18 Host Comm field definitions.

SAS

Slot Accounting System (SAS) is IGT’s proprietary communication protocol. SAS allows for three different types of
validation in support of ticketing.

Field/Term Definition
Address Game identifier. If using point-to-point communication, this setting is usually 1. If using
multi-drop (multi-point) communication, this setting must be assigned by the casino or
system administrator.
Validation  Standard Validation: Ticket out capabilities supported, with the Ticket Validation
number created by the machine. The Ticket cannot be inserted into another game, as
the system is unable to validate the ticket.
 System Validation: Ticket in/Ticket out capabilities supported, with the Validation
number generated by the host.
 Enhanced (Secured) Validation: Ticket in/Ticket out capabilities supported with the
Validation numbers generated by the machine and sent to the host.
Exceptions Messages sent by the game to the host to report game events.
General Exceptions Include messages on the general functioning of the game, door openings, Hopper full,
and any hardware or software issues.
Status Exceptions Include messages on the current game status, such as whether the game is in play, tilt
condition, idle, or disabled.
Security Exceptions Include messages that affect game security, such as entering Administrative options,
modifying game setup options, or starting or shutting down game play.
Tilt Exceptions Include tilts encountered by the game.
Remote Handpay Controls whether the game supports remote handpay reset by the host.
Reset
Resend Handpay Controls whether the game reports handpay pending exceptions every fifteen seconds
Pending until handpay information is recorded by the host.
Send Reel Stops Controls whether or not the game issues the Reel Stop information at the end of each
spin. The default setting is Enabled. Jurisdictions that use real-time reporting and do not
need Reel Stop data may prefer to disable this option. The game theme must support
issuing Reel Stop data in order for the EGM to report this information though SAS.

If selecting the SAS Primary host protocol, see Table 3-19 through Table 3-21 for reference.

Table 3-19 Single Host with Ticketing.

HOST
HOST COMM 1 COMM 2
Remote Resend
Ticketing Handpay Handpay
Accounting Host Host Address Protocol Reset Pending Host Config
ACSC none 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Standard, Enhanced,
System
Bally - SAS 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled System
CDS - DOS 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Standard
CDS - Windows 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Enhanced
OASIS
GSI - Crystal Web 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Enhanced
GSI - Signet (SDI) 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Standard
IGS 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Standard, Enhanced
Konami 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Enhanced
Mikohn 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled Enhanced

16-020832
3-178 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Table 3-20 Single Host without ticketing.

HOST
HOST COMM 1 COMM 2
Remote Resend
Ticketing Handpay Handpay
Accounting Host Host Address Protocol Reset Pending Host Config
Acres none 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
CDS - DOS 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
CDS - Windows 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
OASIS
GSI - Grips Crystal 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
Web
GSI - Grips Signet 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
(SDI)
IGS 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
Konami 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled
Mikohn 001 SAS Disabled** Enabled

Table 3-21 E-Z Pay System.

Remote Resend
Ticketing Handpay Handpay
Accounting Host Host Note Address Protocol Reset Pending Host Config
EZ-Pay* 1 - 50 SAS Disabled** Enabled Enhanced EZ-Pay* 1 - 50 (unique)
(unique)

NOTE: EZ-Pay is responsible for Ticket-In/Ticket-Out (TITO) only. Accounting Host System is
responsible for all other events.
Table 3-22 Dual Host Systems - E-Z-Pay.

Acct Remote Resend

Ticketing Addr / Handpay Handpay
Accounting Host Host Note Tkt Addr Protocol Reset Pending Host Config
ACSC EZ-Pay* None Disabled** Enabled
IGS None Disabled** Enabled
Konami None Disabled** Enabled
Mikohn None Disabled** Enabled
GSI None Disabled** Enabled
EDT None Disabled** Enabled

* In general, assign Accounting Host System to Host Comm 1 and Ticketing Host System on Host Comm 2; or, this
may be reversed if customer requests.
**Unless requested by customer.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-179
4 The SAS Setup screen displays, Figure 3-321.
Figure 3-321 SAS Setup screen.

5 Select the correct settings by selecting inside the available fields and select Enabled to
activate the field, Figure 3-321.
6 Select Save, Figure 3-321 (A).
The Serial Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 3-322.
Figure 3-322 Serial Comm Setup screen.

7 Select Set to save the Comm settings, Figure 3-322 (A).

8 Select Host Setup, Figure 3-322 (B).

16-020832
3-180 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Host Setup screen displays, Figure 3-323.

Figure 3-323 Host Setup screen.

9 Select inside each field to scroll or toggle through the available options until the correct settings
are selected, Figure 3-323.
10 Select Save, Figure 3-323 (A).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-181
Setup - SAS SAS progressive support was added starting in OS version NSOS-000-4021. SAS progressives are
Progressive Setup supported in select jurisdictions, and the configuration option is only available if configured in the
Jurisdictional SPI. Only select LAP themes support SAS progressives.
Complete the following steps to configure a game as a SAS progressive game:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | Serial Ports, Figure 3-324.
Figure 3-324 Comm Setup Menu.

The Serial Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 3-325.

Figure 3-325 Serial Comm Setup screen.

2 Set the appropriate Host Comm field to SAS Primary or SAS Secondary, Figure 3-325 (A).
3 Select Config (to the right of the Host Comm I field) to set additional features for SAS,
Figure 3-325 (B).

16-020832
3-182 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The SAS Setup screen displays, Figure 3-326.

Figure 3-326 SAS Setup screen.

4 Establish the correct settings by touching inside the available fields to scroll through available
option. Select Enabled to activate the field, Figure 3-326.
5 Select Save, Figure 3-326 (A).
The Serial Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 3-327.
Figure 3-327 Serial Comm Setup screen.

6 Select Set to save the Comm settings, Figure 3-327 (A).

7 Select Host Setup, Figure 3-327 (B).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-183
The Host Setup screen displays, Figure 3-328.
Figure 3-328 Host Setup screen.

8 Select inside each field to scroll or toggle through the available options until the correct settings
are selected, Figure 3-328.
9 Set the Progressive field, Figure 3-328 (A), to SAS Primary or SAS Secondary (if a second
host is configured).
The Group Id field displays, Figure 3-329 (A).
Figure 3-329 Setting the Group Id field.

10 Touch within the Group Id field, and use the numeric keypad to set the Group Id value to a
number between 1 and 255. If necessary, contact your network administrator to identify the
correct value.
11 Select Save, Figure 3-329 (B).

16-020832
 3-184 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Handpay Reset and When a game is configured for a SAS host system, Administration Mode settings can be used to
Win to Credit Meter allow Jackpot Limit wins to be transferred to the Credit Meter following a remote Handpay Reset.
Functionality with Complete the following steps to set a WMS game to this configuration:
SAS Systems Set the Jackpot Limits
Complete the following steps to set Jackpot Limits:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Credit Setup.
The Credit Limits screen displays, Figure 3-330.
Figure 3-330 Credit Limits screen.

2 Set the two Jackpot Limit fields:

 Lower Jackpot Limit: Single wins above this setting a trigger a Handpay lock up condition,
such as a win above $1200 (W2G) in the United States.
 Upper Jackpot Limit: Credit amounts above this limit cannot be transferred to the Credit
Meter following a Handpay Reset.
3 Set all other Credit and denomination settings and select Set. For more information on Credit
Setup, see Setup - Credit Setup on page 3-158.
4 Select Set.
5 Select Exit.

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-185
Set the SAS Options
Complete the following steps to set SAS options:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | Serial Ports, Figure 3-319.
2 Select the appropriate Host Comm field to SAS Primary or SAS Secondary.
3 Select Config (to the right of the Host Comm field) to set additional features for SAS.
The SAS Setup screen displays, Figure 3-331.
Figure 3-331 SAS Setup screen.

4 Set Remote Handpay Reset to Enabled.

5 Set Jackpot Reset to Credit to Enabled.
6 Set all other options as needed. For more information, refer to Setup - Communication Setup -
Serial Ports on page 3-176
7 Select Save.
8 Select Return to Game.

Configure the SAS System

Complete the following steps to configure the SAS system.
1 Configure the host system to provide SAS messages for the following:
 Remote handpay reset
 Transfer handpay credits to the credit meter following handpay reset
2 On the game, insert the Admin card into the host system Card Reader, and enter information to
request the Remote Handpay Reset from the host system.
3 Turn the Admin Key on the game.

16-020832
 3-186 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - Comm Setup To configure Wager Account Transfer (WAT) settings, complete the following steps:
- Wager Account 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | WAT Setup, Figure 3-332.
Transfer (WAT)
Setup Figure 3-332 Comm Setup Menu.

The Wager Account Transfer Options screen displays, Figure 3-333.

Figure 3-333 Wager Account Transfer Options screen.
A

2 To activate the available WAT options, select Enable for each option, Figure 3-333 (A).
3 Select Save when all desired WAT options are enabled, Figure 3-333 (B).

January 2015
 Setup Menu 3-187
4 Select Exit to return to the Comm Setup Menu, Figure 3-333.
See Table 3-23 for Wager Account screen field definitions.

Table 3-23 WAT options.

Field Definition
In-House Transfer Game accepts funds from wager accounts. The wager accounts may be local
(casino-specific), or remote (multi-casino). In-house transfers include all non-
debit and non-bonus win transactions.
Debit Transfer Game accepts funds from the player’s external bank account.
Partial Transfer Game accepts funds from wager accounts in increments less than a full
transfer amount.
Bonus Coin Out Win Game accepts bonus transfers, which are win amounts awarded to a player
Transfer by an external bonusing system (such as Legacy/AFT Bonusing).
Bonus Jackpot Win Game accepts bonus transfers, which are jackpots awarded to a player by an
Transfer external bonusing system (such as Legacy/AFT Bonusing). These transfers
require Attendant confirmation.
Promo Transfer Game accepts promotional credits. Promotional credits are awarded to
players as incentive or reward. Complete the steps in the section History -
Cash Out on page 3-99 to configure the limits for this feature.
Transfer to GM Game accepts fund transfers from the Host System.
Transfer from GM Game sends fund transfers to the Host System.
Card Eject from GM Actives Cashout button when there is no money on the machine but the Bill
Acceptor is enabled.
GM Cash In Control Host System controls the cash in ability (example: Bill Acceptor) of the game.
Cash Out to Host- These options are available:
Control
 Enable Hard: Host System is able to transfer money to a Smart Card.
 Enable Soft - No Host Attempt: Game payment is through the game if
defined; if not available, a hand payment is required.
 Enable Soft - Host Attempt: Host System regulates the game payment; if
not available, payment is made through the game if defined. If the
previous payment options fail, a hand payment is required and a tilt is
triggered.
 Host Control: Host System regulates Hard or Soft payment.

5 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | WAT Limits, Figure 3-334.
Figure 3-334 Comm Setup Menu.

16-020832
3-188 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The WAT Limits Setup screen displays, Figure 3-335.

Figure 3-335 WAT Limits Setup screen.

A B

6 Based on jurisdictional or location-specific requirements, set each of the WAT limits,

Figure 3-335.
7 Select the InHouse IN field, Figure 3-335 (A).
The Debit IN Keypad displays, Figure 3-336 (A).
Figure 3-336 WAT Limits Setup - Debit IN keypad.

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-189
See Table 3-24 for WAT Limits Setup screen field definitions.

Table 3-24 WAT Limits.

Field Definition
InHouse IN Maximum single transfer amount accepted by the game.
InHouse OUT Maximum single transfer amount sent by the game.
Debit IN Maximum single debit transfer amount.

8 Select Set Limit as you set each limit to save the setting, Figure 3-335 (B).
9 Select Exit to display the Administration Menu.

Setup - Comm To utilize Debit transfers to the game, register each game as a Point of Sale (POS) Terminal. This
Setup - registers each game with the Host System. Complete the following steps to configure AFT:
Advanced 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | AFT Reg/Unreg, Figure 3-337.
Funds Transfer
(AFT) Setup: Figure 3-337 Comm Setup Menu.
Registering
Games

The AFT Registration screen displays, Figure 3-338.

Figure 3-338 AFT Registration screen.

16-020832
 3-190 Chapter 3: Software Administration

2 Depending on the Host System setup, the registration is completed automatically or requires
an acknowledgement. Complete the registration as directed, and verify the GM Status field
changes to Registered.
3 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Setup - Comm Setup In select OS versions, a Protocol Version setting determines the protocol used to communicate on
| Protocol Version the network. If set incorrectly, the game will not communicate with servers or controllers on the
network.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | Protocol Version, Figure 3-339.
Figure 3-339 Comm Setup Menu.

The Network Communications Protocol Setup screen displays, Figure 3-340.

Figure 3-340 Network Communications Protocol Setup screen.

2 Select the protocol version:

If ... select ...
a controller or server on the network (Big Event Controller, Version 1, Figure 3-340 (A).
Media Controller, CGC, Bank Controller) is using an OS
version 169X or earlier,
all network devices are running 16AX or later, Version 2, Figure 3-340 (A).

3 Select Save to capture the setting, Figure 3-340 (B).

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-191
Setup - WMSP Setup Complete the following steps to set a game as a WMSP progressive:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | Serial Ports, Figure 3-341.
Figure 3-341 Comm Setup Menu.

The Serial Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 3-342.

2 Select the Progressive Type field and select WMSP (WMS Progressive), Figure 3-342.
Figure 3-342 Serial Comm Setup screen.

3 Select Set to save the settings, Figure 3-342 (A).

The WMSP settings are directly transferred from the Progressive System.
4 Select CONFIG (to the right of the Progressive Type field) to view the protocol features,
Figure 3-342 (C).

16-020832
3-192 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The WMSP Level Setup screen displays, Figure 3-343. This screen lists information on the
Game Status, Protocols, Baud Rate, and Enabled Progressive level(s).
Figure 3-343 WMSP Level Setup screen.

Obtaining the MAC To configure a Progressive System, the MAC address from each game in the Progressive System is
Address from a required. Complete the following steps to obtain the MAC address from a game:
Game 1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Unlock and open the Main Door.
3 If the game is not already running, power the game ON at the Power Switch and wait for the
game to boot.
4 Press the DIAGNOSTIC button.
The Administration Menu displays.
5 Select Diagnostics | Machine Info | System Information, Figure 3-344.
Figure 3-344 Machine Info Menu.

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-193
The System Information screen displays, Figure 3-345. The MAC Addresses for both ethernet
ports (CPU-3.2X, CPU-NXT3.2, and CPU-NXT2) display.
Figure 3-345 System Information screen - MAC Address information.

NOTE The MAC Address information is required for the Progressive applications.
If applicable for Local Area Progressive (LAP), the MAC Address information is required for the LAP
User Interface application. For Wide Area Progressive (WAP), contact Central Operations and
provide the MAC Address to begin the process of configuring the games in the Central System: 1-
800-701-0072 or New Jersey: 609-569-0100.
NOTE: The MAC Address is CPU-specific. If the CPU is replaced for any reason, the game
MAC address information changes. Repeat the steps in this section for updated information.

16-020832
 3-194 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - Game Setup The Doubleup Autoplay Max Bet feature is included in select game themes, as determined by the
- Double Up Jurisdictional SPI chip. It enables players to attempt to double their wins with a short game between
Autoplay Max Bet spins. For games that have the Doubleup Autoplay Max Bet feature, complete the following steps:
Feature
(for Select Themes)
NOTE: The features described in this section support Episodic Gaming and may not apply to all
themes.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Game Setup, Figure 3-346.
Figure 3-346 Setup Menu.

The Game Setup screen displays, Figure 3-347.

Figure 3-347 Game Setup with Options screen.

2 Select the game to configure, Figure 3-347 (A).

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-195
The Game Setup Standard Options screen displays, Figure 3-348.
Figure 3-348 Game Setup - Standard Options screen.

3 Configure the fields as described in Table 3-25.

Table 3-25 Game Options fields.

Field Description Action
MaxBet Button Functionality of the largest button on the Select the field to set Option Enabled or
Function Button Panel. Option Disabled.

4 Select Save and Exit, Figure 3-348 (A) to save the configuration and return to the Menu.
5 Select Exit field to go back to the Menu or Return to Game to enter the game mode,
Figure 3-348.
Game Setup - The Game Setup screen sets the available denominations and the available maximum bets. Some
Advanced Options - of the max bet options are predetermined based on jurisdictional limits and restrictions. The max bet
Bet Options options may be controlled by the Jurisdictional ID (SPI) chip, which may set the available
denominations, as well as the max bet.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Game Setup, Figure 3-349.
Figure 3-349 Setup Menu.

16-020832
3-196 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Game Setup screen displays, Figure 3-350.

Figure 3-350 Game Setup screen.

2 Select Advanced Options and the game to configure, Figure 3-350 (A).
The Advanced Options Game Setup screen displays, Figure 3-351.
Figure 3-351 Game Setup - Advanced Options screen.

3 Select Bet Options, Figure 3-351 (A).

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-197
The Bet Options screen displays, Figure 3-352.
Figure 3-352 Bet Options screen.

D
A
B

4 If applicable, select the Must Bet All Lines? field, and toggle YES to require the player to bet all
the lines, Figure 3-352 (A).
5 If applicable, select the Min Bet Per Line field and toggle through the available values for the
desired minimum amount of credits per line, Figure 3-352 (B).
6 Starting with SSSG-000-4031, if the Must Bet All Lines? field is set to YES, the option to
Convert All OLED Buttons to Bet Buttons, Figure 3-352 (C), may be available. Set to YES to
map each OLED button to a bet value button, Figure 3-353.
Figure 3-353 Example OLED Button Panel display with Convert All OLED Buttons To Bet Buttons set to YES.

7 Select Denom to choose an available denomination, Figure 3-352 (D).

16-020832
3-198 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Available Denominations Dialog Box displays with the available denominations for the
game, Figure 3-354.
Figure 3-354 Denominations - Game Setup screen.

8 A window displays with the Available Denominations, Figure 3-354 (A).

9 Highlight the appropriate denomination and select Set, Figure 3-354 (B).
10 Select Max Bet, Figure 3-354 (C).
The Max Bet window displays, Figure 3-355.
Figure 3-355 Game Setup - Available Max Bet window.

A
B

Select the appropriate Max Bet, Figure 3-355 (A).

11 Highlight the desired Max Bet and select Set (the default Max Bet is the number of lines times
five), Figure 3-355 (B).
12 If applicable, repeat steps until all available denominations are configured.

13 Select Save and Exit on the Game Setup screen, Figure 3-355 (C), to commit the settings.
NOTE: The OLED Panel updates automatically during play.

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-199
Setup - Game Setup Advanced Game options, including AutoPlay and DoubleUp features and other options are
- Advanced Options available on select games, as is determined by the SPI chip or theme software. The Double Up
- Game Options feature enables players to attempt to double their wins with a short game between spins.
If available for the game, complete the following steps to set Advanced Game options:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Game Setup, Figure 3-356.
Figure 3-356 Setup Menu.

The Game Setup screen displays, Figure 3-357.

Figure 3-357 Game Setup screen.

2 On the Standard Options tab, choose the game to configure, Figure 3-357 (A).

16-020832
3-200 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Game Setup - Bet and Game Options screen displays, Figure 3-358.
Figure 3-358 Game Setup - Bet and Game Options screen.

3 Select Game Options, Figure 3-358 (A).

The Game Setup Game Options screen displays, Figure 3-359.
Figure 3-359 Game Setup Game Options screen.

4 Select the fields to configure, as defined in Table 3-26.

Table 3-26 Game Setup options.

Field Definition
Allow Auto Play? Set to ENABLE to allow the player to set the game to play automatically.
Double Up Game Determines the game that is played when the Double Up feature is active.
Double Up Amount Limit The maximum amount of the win award allowed in the Double Up games. Set to
$0.00 for no maximum amount.
Max Consecutive The maximum number of consecutive Double Up games that may be played
Double Up Limit between spins.

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-201
Table 3-26 Game Setup options.
Field Definition
Double Up Push on Set to ENABLE to exit Double Up game with a push/tie on Machine Disable.
Machine Disable
Keno Quick Pick/Auto Set to ENABLE to allow the player to randomly generate Keno spot picks
Pick automatically.
Hardware Max Bet Sets the function of the mechanical button. Options are MAX BET, which plays the
Button maximum bet and spins the reels or REPEAT BET, which spins the reels at the
current bet.
Player Initiated Autoplay Set to ENABLE to allow the player to set the game to play automatically.
Allow Player Assistance Applies to poker themes. Set to ENABLE to allow the player to hold cards of a
winning combination with a single button press.
Auto Hold Applies to poker themes. Set to ENABLE to automatically hold cards according to
optimal strategy.
Card Discard Mode Applies to poker themes. Settings are:
TOUCH TO HOLD - all cards will be discarded by default after the deal, player
selects cards to hold
TOUCH TO DISCARD - all cards are held by default after the deal; player selects
cards to hold.
Skill Stop Set to ENABLE to allow the player to stop all reels using the Video or Mechanical
buttons, or to stop individual reels by touching them.
Game Speed Sets the play speed settings: SLOW, MEDIUM (default), FAST
Initiate Play On Max Bet Set to ENABLE to start a game when the Max Bet button is pressed. DISABLE sets
the bet to Max Bet without starting a game.
Current Time Display Set to ENABLE to display an on-screen clock.
Play Interruption Set to ENABLE to display an on-screen notification to the player of their current time
on device at predetermined intervals.
Fast Bang up Set to ENABLE to increase credit bang up speed by 2X.
Default Cover All Lines Set to ENABLE to have all paylines active by default.
Play Button Hold Down Set to ENABLE to allow the mechanical button to be held down for continuous play.
When enabled and active, the following occurs at the end of a spin:
 all paylines are evaluated simultaneously
 any wins are instantly added to the Credit Meter
 Reels immediately respin.
NOTE: The Double Up feature is inactivated between spins.
Hot New Game Attract Blade theme feature only. Automatically set to SUPPORTED for themes that include
Behavior this feature. Set to NOT AVAILABLE for unsupported themes.
By default, supported themes exhibit the Hot New Game Attract Behavior for 60
days from the date of the first boot up. Performing a RAM clear does not reset the
60-day period. To turn the feature off at any time, select Setup | Game Setup |
Advanced Options | <theme> | Game Options | Hide Hot New Game. Then,
select Save and Exit.
To turn the Ho t New Game Attract Behavior on after hiding it, or to restart the 60-
day period after it expires, select Setup | Game Setup | Advanced Options |
<theme> | Game Options | Show Hot New Game. Then, select Save and Exit.
The Hot New Game Attract Behavior displays and automatically expires after 60
days.
Wager Saver Blade theme feature only. The default setting is determined by the Jurisdictional SPI.
If ENABLED, the Wager Saver feature presents the player with an option to Play
Wager Saver if the credit balance falls below the amount of the last wager. For
instance, if the player's last spin was at $2.00, and the credit balance falls to $1.00,
the Play Wager Saver option is presented. The feature awards a chance at one
spin of the reels at the bet configuration of the last wagered spin for the cost of the
remaining credits ($1.00 in the example). If the Pointer stops on the green WIN Zone
of the wheel, one spin of the reels at the last wagered amount is immediately
awarded. If the Pointer stops on the white LOSE Zone of the wheel, the game ends
and the remaining credit balance is lost.
The Wager Saver feature does not affect the overall game payout percentage.

5 Select Save and Exit, Figure 3-359 (A), to save the configuration and return to the
Administration Menu.

16-020832
 3-202 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - Game Setup The Choose Your Style options present the player with an opportunity to control a variety of player
- Choose Your Style experience settings. When enabled, the player is presented with multiple options, Figure 3-360.
Figure 3-360 Player-presented Choose Your Style screen.

A
B

To enable the Choose Your Style options, complete the following steps:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Game Setup, Figure 3-361.
Figure 3-361 Setup Menu.

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-203
The Game Setup screen displays, Figure 3-362.
Figure 3-362 Game Setup screen.

2 Select Choose Your Style, Figure 3-362 (A).

The Game Setup screen displays, Figure 3-363.
Figure 3-363 Game Setup - Choose Your Style screen.

A B

3 For each option, set the Visible to Player value to ON or OFF, Figure 3-363 (A).

16-020832
3-204 Chapter 3: Software Administration

4 Set the Default Value for each option, Figure 3-363 (B). Reference Table 3-27 for more
information on each option and setting.

Table 3-27 Game Setup - Choose Your Style options.

Field Definition and Settings
Win Tunes Displays special animations and plays win music for celebrations.
 Set the Default Value option to CLASSIC to use Blade 1.0 celebrations: credit
meter bangs up, coins jump up from bottom of screen, coins fly from sides of
screen, spotlight appears on credit meter, and coins turn into gems.
 Set the Default Value option to MODERN to use updated win music and play all
celebration animations simultaneously.
Growing Reels Controls whether the reels grow larger as they slow down.
 Set the Default Value to OFF for the reel size to remain unchanged.
 Set the Default Value to ON for the reels to grow 20% larger.
Reel Spin Music Determines the music that plays while the reels are spinning.
 Set the Default Value to ALL to turn base game and freespin music ON.
 Set the Default Value to FREESPIN to turn base game music OFF and freespin
music ON.
 Set the Default Value to OFF to turn base game and freespin music OFF.
Anticipation Spins Controls whether the reels spin for a longer time when the player is close to hitting a
bonus.
 Set the Default Value to OFF to keep the reel spin period unchanged.
 Set the Default Value to ON to have a reel spin for a longer period of time when
close to hitting a bonus to build anticipation.
Symbol Art Sets the reel symbols to be a standard symbol family.
Depending on the theme, the options may include ROYALS (face card characters);
SUITS (card suits, such as Diamonds, Hearts, Clubs, Spades); FRUITS (various
fruits, such as cherries, oranges, berries), or other custom options.
Spin Speed Controls the speed at which the reels spin.
 Set the Default Value to STANDARD to keep the standard reel spin period, 3.2
seconds.
 Set the Default Value to QUICK to set the reel spin period to 2.6 seconds.

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-205
Setup - Game Setup If the Paytable Test option is available, complete the following steps to review the paytable awards
- Diagnostic Options and the corresponding reel combinations:
- Paytable Test 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Game Setup, Figure 3-364.
(Video)
Figure 3-364 Setup Menu.

The Game Setup screen displays, Figure 3-365.

Figure 3-365 Game Setup screen.

2 Select Diagnostic Options, Figure 3-365 (A).

16-020832
3-206 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Game Setup - Diagnostic Options screen displays, Figure 3-366.

Figure 3-366 Game Setup Diagnostic Options screen.

3 Select the game, Figure 3-366 (A), to view the Diagnostic Options.
The Game Setup Paytable Test screen displays, Figure 3-367.
Figure 3-367 Game Setup Diagnostic screen.

4 Select Paytable Test, Figure 3-367 (A).

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-207
The Game Setup Paytable Test screen displays, Figure 3-368.
5 Select the denom to test, Figure 3-368 (A).
Figure 3-368 Paytable Test Display Window.

B A

6 To start the sequence of displaying winning combinations and the corresponding awards,
select Start Test, Figure 3-368 (B).
The Paytable Test screen displays, Figure 3-369.
Figure 3-369 Paytable Test screen example.
A

7 To display other winning combinations and the corresponding awards, select PrevCombo and
NextCombo, Figure 3-369 (A).
8 Select Save and Exit to save the settings and return to the Administration Menu or Return to
Game to enter the game to play.

16-020832
 3-208 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Setup - Game Setup For Blade Mechanical Reel themes, complete the following steps to perform a Paytable Test:
- Diagnostic Options 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Game Setup, Figure 3-370.
- Paytable Test
(Blade Mech Reel) Figure 3-370 Setup Menu.

The Game Setup screen displays, Figure 3-371.

Figure 3-371 Game Setup screen.

2 Select Diagnostic Options, Figure 3-371 (A).

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-209
The Game Setup - Diagnostic Options screen displays, Figure 3-372.
Figure 3-372 Game Setup Diagnostic Options screen.

3 Select the theme, Figure 3-372 (A).

The Game Setup Paytable Test screen displays, Figure 3-373.
Figure 3-373 Game Setup Diagnostic screen.

4 Select Paytable Test, Figure 3-373 (A).

16-020832
3-210 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Game Setup Paytable Test screen displays, Figure 3-374.

5 Select the denom to test, Figure 3-374 (A).
Figure 3-374 Paytable Test Display Window.

The paytable Payback Percentage and Game ID display, Figure 3-375 (A).
Figure 3-375 Paytable Test Display Window.

6 Select Start, Figure 3-375 (B), to initiate the test.

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-211
7 Use the physical button panel to select a bet. Or, select Panel, Figure 3-376 (A), to view an on-
screen version of the button panel and select a bet.
Figure 3-376 Paytable Test Display Window.

8 The reels spin and game play is evaluated based on the middle payline on the glass.
Reference the theme PAR sheet to verify winning results.
9 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Setup - Voucher/Bill The Voucher Data setup options control the information that prints on tickets/vouchers if the game is
Setup - Voucher not connected to a host system. Expiration (in number of days) may also be defined.
Data Setup 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Voucher/Bill Setup | Voucher Data Setup,
Figure 3-377.
Figure 3-377 Voucher/Bill Setup Menu.

16-020832
 3-212 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Voucher Data Setup screen displays, Figure 3-378.

Figure 3-378 Voucher Data Setup screen.

2 Use the keyboard to add Location and Address information.

3 Set the Expiration value in number of days.
4 Select Save.
5 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.
Setup - Voucher/Bill The Bill Validator Denom option controls which bills are accepted by the Bill Acceptor.
Setup - Bill Validator 1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Voucher/Bill Setup | Bill Validator Denom
Denom Setup Setup, Figure 3-379.
Figure 3-379 Voucher/Bill Setup Menu.

January 2015
 Setup - Comm Setup - Advanced Funds Transfer (AFT) Setup: Registering Games 3-213
The Bill Validator Accepted Denominations screen displays, Figure 3-380.
Figure 3-380 Bill Validator Accepted Denominations screen.

2 Set the bill denominations to either Enabled or Disabled.

3 Select Save.
4 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.
Setup - Sound Setup The Sound Setup option controls the game volume. Complete the following steps to set or view the
volume setting.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Sound Setup, Figure 3-381.
Figure 3-381 Setup Menu.

16-020832
3-214 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Sound Setup screen displays, Figure 3-382.

Figure 3-382 Sound Setup screen.

2 To adjust the volume, slide the volume indicator up or down, or select

+ (plus) or - (minus).
3 Select Save and Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Portal Menu 3-215

Portal Menu The Portal Menu provides access to paytable and meter information for Bank-Level Portal systems.
Portal Connection The following procedures enable verification of the successful application of the portal connection to
a game.
Perform the following procedure to view paytable configuration information:
1 From the Administrative Menu, select Portal | Portal Connections, Figure 3-383.
Figure 3-383 Portal Menu.

The Portal Connections screen displays, Figure 3-384.

Figure 3-384 Portal Connections screen.

B A

2 To view the base game paytable associated with the portal paytable, use the arrow on the
Select an Associated Portal field to scroll through available portal paytables, Figure 3-384 (A).
The associated base game paytable(s) display(s) in the Select a Paytable field,
Figure 3-384 (B).

16-020832
3-216 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Portal - Portal In select jurisdictions, the Portal Meters option offers the option to select how the Portal game
Meters accounting is handled. There are three different Accounting Meters that can be selected. In
jurisdictions without the Select Portal Accounting option, Portal game accounting is tracked by the
Base Game Paytable meter.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Portal | Portal Meters, Figure 3-385.
Figure 3-385 Portal Menu.

2 Select Portal Master (for life of game) or Portal Period (since the last RAM clear).
The Portal Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-386.
Figure 3-386 Portal Accounting screen.

A
B

3 Select the Associated Portal instance from the drop-down Menu, Figure 3-386 (A).

January 2015
 Out of Service 3-217
4 Select the meter to associate with Portal wins, Figure 3-386 (B):
 Base Game Paytable (default). Access this meter by selecting Accounting | Machine
Accounting | Machine Master | Next (Coin Out and Attendant Paid Jackpots meters).
 Progressive Win. Access this meter by selecting Accounting | Machine Accounting |
Machine Master | Next (Progressive Payout meters).
 External Bonus Win. Access this meter by selecting Accounting | Machine Accounting |
Machine Master | Next (External Bonus Payout meters).
5 Select Set to save the setting.
When returning to this screen after game play has occurred, the current Portal Money Played
and Money Won values display Portal-specific accounting information.

Out of Service This function sets the game in an Out of Service mode, prohibiting play of the game.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Out Of Service, Figure 3-387.
Figure 3-387 Administration Menu.

2 The Out of Service Selection screen displays, Figure 3-388.

Figure 3-388 Out of Service Selection screen.

3 Press Set to place the game into Out of Service mode, Figure 3-388 (A).

16-020832
3-218 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Out of Service screen displays, Figure 3-389.

Figure 3-389 Out of Service screen.

4 To return the game to service, turn the Attendant Key.

X-Series This section includes all options and screens to support X-series communication and other required
Support (NSW options for the New South Wales (NSW) jurisdiction.
Only)
Progressive The Progressive Accounting option provides required accounting data for NSW progressives. To
Accounting view Progressive Accounting data, complete the following steps:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Protocol Accounting |
Progressive Accounting | Progressive Master or Progressive Period, Figure 3-390.
Figure 3-390 Progressive Accounting Menu.

January 2015
 X-Series Support (NSW Only) 3-219
The Progressive Accounting screen displays, Figure 3-391.
Figure 3-391 Progressive Accounting screen.

A
B

The list box in the top left corner of the Progressive Accounting screen displays each available
Pool, Figure 3-391 (A). When a Pool is selected in the list box, the Progressive Accounting
screen displays the accounting data for that Pool, Figure 3-391 (B).
2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Current Progressive The Current Amounts screen lists the current progressive amounts for each progressive pool. To
Amounts view the Current Amounts screen, complete the following steps:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Protocol Accounting |
Progressive Accounting | Current Amounts, Figure 3-392.
Figure 3-392 Progressive Accounting Menu.

16-020832
3-220 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Current Progressive Amounts screen displays, Figure 3-393.

Figure 3-393 Current Progressive Amounts screen.

2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

Diagnostics - The Machine Identification option presents X-series component information. Complete the following
Machine Info - steps to access and display this data:
Machine Complete the following procedure to view the Machine Identification screen.
Identification
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | Machine Identification,
Figure 3-394.
Figure 3-394 Machine Info Menu.

January 2015
 X-Series Support (NSW Only) 3-221
The Machine Identification screen displays, Figure 3-395.
Figure 3-395 Machine Information screen.

2 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

History - Game Use the Game Play Data option to review data and soft meters for the last 10 games played.
History - Game Play Complete the following steps to access the data:
Data 1 From the Administration Menu, select History | Game History | Game Play Data,
Figure 3-396.
Figure 3-396 Game History Menu.

16-020832
3-222 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Additional Game Play Data screen displays, Figure 3-397.

Figure 3-397 Additional Game Play Data screen.

A
B

2 Select a game to review the data. Game 1 is the most recently completed game.
The Last Play History screen displays, Figure 3-398.
Figure 3-398 Last Play History screen.

3 To view additional data, select Soft Meters, Figure 3-398 (A).

January 2015
 X-Series Support (NSW Only) 3-223
The Soft Meters screen displays, Figure 3-399.
Figure 3-399 Soft Meters screen.

4 To view Soft Meter data for additional games, select Previous Game or Next Game,
Figure 3-399 (A).

5 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

Setup - Credit Setup Additional credit limit settings are available for NSW:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Credit Setup, Figure 3-400.
Figure 3-400 Setup Menu.

16-020832
 3-224 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Credit Limits screen displays, Figure 3-401.

Figure 3-401 Credit Setup screen.
A

In addition to the standard Credit Limit fields defined in Table 3-15 on page 3-160, see the additional
limits required in NSW:

Table 3-28 Credit Limit screen Fields.

Field Definition
Credit Meter Threshold The credit amount that results in the disabling of credit input devices such as the bill
and coin acceptor, or electronic transfers. Once the credit meter falls to equal to or
below this limit, credit input devices are enabled. Game play is not affected.
Attendant Ticket Limit The amount that requires attendant intervention (key turn) to continue ticket printing.

2 Proceed to Selecting Paytables on page 3-161 to complete paytable setup.

Setup - Comm Setup Complete the following steps to set up X-series communication:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | Comm Setup | Serial Ports, Figure 3-402.
Figure 3-402 Comm Setup Menu.

January 2015
 X-Series Support (NSW Only) 3-225
The Serial Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 3-403.
Figure 3-403 Serial Comm Setup screen.

2 Select the Host Comm I field to scroll through available options until X Series is selected,
Figure 3-403 (A).
3 Select Set, Figure 3-403 (B).
4 Select Host Setup, Figure 3-403 (C), to set additional features.
The NSW X-Series Comm Setup screen displays, Figure 3-404.
Figure 3-404 NSW X-Series Comm Setup screen.
A

5 Select the arrow to view the drop-down list of available Protocol Versions, Figure 3-404 (A).
6 Select the correct version and select Set Version, Figure 3-404 (B). If necessary, check with
your network administrator for the Protocol Version in use.

16-020832
3-226 Chapter 3: Software Administration

7 Once the Protocol Version is set, additional options may be available for editing,
Figure 3-405 (A). Depending on your EGM configuration, the additional options may be set to a
default value and cannot be changed.
Figure 3-405 NSW X-Series Comm Setup screen.

8 If necessary, use the arrow to view the drop-down list of available options for each setting. See
Table 3-29 for fields and descriptions.
Table 3-29 NSW X-Series field definitions. ED Label Description
Table 3-1
Field Definition
CCCE Transfer Determines if centralized cash control equipment (CCCE) transfers are allowed.
Ticket In Determines if the EGM accepts tickets.
Ticket Out Determines if the EGM prints tickets.
Machine Control Determines if the X-series host controls the EGM.

NOTE: Set the options carefully, as any changes will require a RAM clear to reset.
9 Select Save to capture the configuration options.
10 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 X-Series Support (NSW Only) 3-227
Software Validation The Software Validation option allows for the automatic authentication of software components on
the game against third-party applications, such as GLI-Verify 3.5, Dataman, or Kobetron. Complete
the following steps to authenticate the software, including the 6XP firmware:
1 From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Machine Info | Software Validation,
Figure 3-406.
Figure 3-406 Machine Info Menu.

The Software Validation screen displays, Figure 3-407.

Figure 3-407 Software Validation screen.

C
B

2 Select the appropriate validation algorithm option, SHA-1 or HMAC-SHA-1, from the drop-
down Menu, Figure 3-407 (A).
3 Select Validate, Figure 3-407 (B), for each component to authenticate, or select Validate All,
Figure 3-407 (C), to authenticate all available components.
4 The Hex Seed value for the component displays in the Hex Seed column. It may display with a
truncated value, beginning with "...".

16-020832
3-228 Chapter 3: Software Administration

5 Compare the Hex Seed value against the value calculated using a third-party validation tool
(GLI-Verify, Kobetron, Dataman, etc.).
6 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.
Handpays Handpay conditions on NSW EGMs are cleared with an extra Attendant Key turn. Complete the
following steps to acknowledge and clear a handpay condition:
1 If a handpay condition occurs, the player is presented with the option to Call Attendant or
Return to Game, Figure 3-408.
Figure 3-408 Call Attendant or Return to Game option.

2 If the player presses the Call Attendant button, the attendant must turn the attendant key twice
to clear the handpay. After the first turn, a message displays for the attendant: Turn Attendant
Key to Perform HANDPAY, Figure 3-409.
Figure 3-409 Handpay message.

3 Turn the attendant key a second time to complete the handpay and return the game to play.

January 2015
 X-Series Support (NSW Only) 3-229
P1-P6 X-Series If one of the 6 X-series communication ports fails to connect, a tilt condition occurs and game play is
Connection Failure suspended, Figure 3-410, Figure 3-411, and Figure 3-412.
Figure 3-410 Link Down - Play Suspended tilt (P3 shown in example) with no credits on EGM.

The port with the communication failure is identified at the bottom of the screen, Figure 3-410 (A),
Figure 3-411 (A), and Figure 3-412 (A).
Figure 3-411 Play Suspended tilt while EGM idle with credits present.

16-020832
3-230 Chapter 3: Software Administration

If a failure occurs during game play, reference Table 3-30 to note the outcome:
Table 3-30 X-series port failures during game play.ED Label Description
Communication
failure occurs at Outcome
P1 - P4 Current game completes, and EGM enters a Play Suspended tilt, Figure 3-411.
P5 - P6 EGM suspends play immediately, and a Call Attendant message displays, Figure 3-412.

Figure 3-412 Call Attendant message.

January 2015
 Configuration Mode 3-231

Configuration This function is a VLT-specific option that makes the game unplayable, and allows a host system to
Mode continue to communicate with the game.
1 From the Administration Menu, select Configuration Mode, Figure 3-413.
Figure 3-413 Administration Menu.

The Out of Service Selection screen displays, Figure 3-414.

Figure 3-414 Out of Service Selection screen.

2 To return the game to service, turn the Attendant Key or press the DIAGNOSTIC button.

16-020832
3-232 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Big Event If the game theme is from the Monopoly Big Event family, the OS includes Big Event-specific
Server Menu settings to control the Overhead Display and Big Event Server features. This section provides
instructions for using the functions.
NOTE: The Big Event Server may only be accessed by one game at a time.
Big Event Server - Complete the following procedure to access the Big Event Server Event History.
Event History 1 From the Administration Menu, select Big Event Server | Event History, Figure 3-415.
Figure 3-415 Big Event Server Menu.

The Big Event - Event History screen displays, Figure 3-416.

Figure 3-416 Big Event - Event History.

January 2015
 Big Event Server Menu 3-233
Big Event Server - Complete the following steps to configure Big Event sound options:
Big Event Sound 1 From the Administration Menu, select Big Event Server | BE Server Sound Calls,
Calls Figure 3-417.
Figure 3-417 Big Event Server Menu.

The Big Event Server Sound Setup screen displays, Figure 3-418.
Figure 3-418 Big Event Server Sound Setup.

2 To adjust the volume, select Current Level + (plus) or - (minus) fields, Figure 3-418 (A).
3 Listen to the new sound level by selecting Play Test Sound, Attract or
Big Event, Figure 3-418 (B). The Current Level may also be adjusted while the selected
sound is playing.
NOTE: The Big Event sound options are only available when the Big Event Server door is open.
4 Once the volume is set to the preferred level, select Save, Figure 3-418 (C).
NOTE: If the Automatic Sound Schedule is active, the volume override setting remains in effect
until the next time interval starts.

16-020832
 3-234 Chapter 3: Software Administration

5 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play.

Setting Up Big Event The Big Event Server can be set to automatically adjust volume levels for specific times of the day.
Automatic Sound To customize the volume level for the Big Event Server, complete the following steps:
Schedule 1 From the Administration Menu, select Big Event Server | BE Server Sound, Figure 3-419.
Figure 3-419 Big Event Server Menu.

The Big Event Server Sound Setup screen displays, Figure 3-420.
Figure 3-420 Big Event Server Sound Setup - Automatic Sound Schedule.

2 To edit and activate the Automatic Sound Schedule settings, select the field under Automatic
Sound Schedule and toggle it to Enable, Figure 3-420 (A).

January 2015
 Big Event Server Menu 3-235
3 Change the Start Time hour and minute settings by selecting the individual fields.
A numeric touchpad displays, Figure 3-421 (A).
Figure 3-421 Big Event Server Sound Setup - Start Time keypad.

4 Using the numeric touchpad, enter the hour (0 to 23) or minute (0 to 59) corresponding to the
selected field.
5 Select Enter to save the setting, Figure 3-421 (B).
The Sound Server Setup Slide Bar displays, Figure 3-422.
Figure 3-422 Sound Setup Slide Bar screen.

6 To adjust the volume, slide the volume indicator up or down, or select

+ (plus) or - (minus), Figure 3-422 (A).
7 Once the volume is set to the preferred level, select OK, Figure 3-422 (B).
8 Repeat this process for each time setting.
9 Select Save to record the settings, Figure 3-422 (C).

16-020832
3-236 Chapter 3: Software Administration

The Save dialog box displays, Figure 3-423.

Figure 3-423 Big Event Server Sound Setup - Save dialog.

10 Select Yes to save the modification that were made, or No to revert to the previous settings.
11 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu or Return To Game for game play,
Figure 3-423.

January 2015
 Big Event Server Menu 3-237
Big Event Server - Big Event Server Sound Calls function enables setting the individual sound files at different volume
BE Server Sound levels. Complete the following steps:
Calls 1 Open the Big Event Server Door.
2 From the Administration Menu, select Big Event Server | BE Server Sound Calls,
Figure 3-424.
Figure 3-424 Big Event Server Menu.

The Sound Call Diagnostics screen displays, Figure 3-425.

Figure 3-425 Sound Call Diagnostics screen.

A B

3 Select the sound file to hear, and press Play, Figure 3-425 (A).
The highlighted sound plays through the Big Event system speakers.
4 Select Volume, Figure 3-425 (B), to change the volume level.
5 Select Exit to complete the test.

16-020832
3-238 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Big Event Server - Big Event Servers, in certain international jurisdictions, have a language configuration option
Language available. If a language other than English is required, refer to your regional sales office for
Configuration information on available languages for both operator and machine players. Complete the following
steps to select the appropriate language:
(International
Versions Only) 1 Open the Big Event Server Door.
2 From the Administration Menu, select Big Event Server | Language Setup, Figure 3-426.
Figure 3-426 Big Event Server Menu.

The Language Configuration screen displays, Figure 3-427.

Figure 3-427 Big Event Server Language Configuration screen.

3 If applicable, select the desired language for the game Operator and Player, Figure 3-427 (A).
4 Select Save to save changes, Figure 3-427 (B).
5 Select Exit to return to the Administration Menu.

January 2015
 Using SVC/GAT 3-239

Using SVC/GAT Complete the following steps to use a Software Verification (SVC) / Game Authentication Terminal
(GAT) to verify game software components:
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Open the Main Door.
3 Using an SVC or GAT terminal, connect a standard serial cable to the serial connector on the
CPU, Figure 3-428 (A).
Figure 3-428 CPU-NXT3 (top), CPU-NXT2 (bottom left), CPU-NXT (bottom right).

A
A

4 Press the DIAGNOSTIC button.

5 From the Administration Menu, select SVC/GAT, Figure 3-429.
Figure 3-429 SVC/GAT Menu.

16-020832
 3-240 Chapter 3: Software Administration

6 Depending on the version of GAT protocol being used, select GAT3, GAT3 Legacy, or GAT
3.50.
The SVC Authentication Information screen displays, Figure 3-430.
Figure 3-430 SVC Authentication Information screen.

Each component is automatically authenticated. The progress of the process is displayed for
each individual component and for the entire series of components.
NOTE: If necessary, consult the SVC/GAT documentation for more information on utilizing the
application or terminal.
7 When testing is complete, select Exit.

Key-In Credits When installed with the Key-In Credit feature, the game permits the attendant to add credits to the
(Russia Only) Credit Meter.
1 Insert the Key-In Credit key into the Key-In Credits switch and turn clockwise,
Figure 3-431 (A).
Figure 3-431 Key-In Credits Switch.

January 2015
 Key-In Credits (Russia Only) 3-241
The Key-In Credits screen displays, Figure 3-432.
Figure 3-432 Key-in Credits screen.
A

2 Using the numeric keypad, enter the amount of currency to add to the game and select the
keypad Enter field, Figure 3-432 (A).
A confirmation screen displays, Figure 3-433.
Figure 3-433 Key-in confirmation screen.

3 Select Yes, Figure 3-433 (A).

4 Turn the Key-In Credits key counterclockwise back to the starting position (12 o’clock position).
The amount added to the game displays, Figure 3-434.
Figure 3-434 Key-in amount added screen.

16-020832
 3-242 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Central The Central Determination options apply to select jurisdictions only. The options allow the games to
Determination be configured to communicate with a configuration server (OPTOS). Complete the following steps to
configure a game for Central Determination:
1 Obtain the OPTOS server IP address and port number from your system administrator.
2 At the game, perform a RAM clear. See RAM Clear Procedures on page 2-26.
3 Seat the Game and OS CompactFlash cards.
4 Power the game ON at the Power Switch and allow the game to boot.
5 Press the DIAGNOSTIC button.
The Administration Menu displays. Note the Pending Status messages in the upper right
portion of the screen. The messages indicate the missing configuration information, including
Denomination Not Set, No Games Configured, and Printer Com Error.
6 Select Setup | Machine Setup | Cabinet Setup | Device Setup, Figure 3-435.
Figure 3-435 Machine Setup Menu.

The Device Config screen displays, Figure 3-436.

Figure 3-436 Device Config screen.

January 2015
 Central Determination 3-243
7 Configure all game devices, and select Save and Exit.
8 From the Administration Menu, select Central Determination | Paytable Setup, Figure 3-437.
Figure 3-437 Central Determination Menu.

The Central Determination Paytable Setup screen displays, Figure 3-438.

Figure 3-438 Central Determination Paytable Setup screen.

9 Select the Type field to toggle between a Pulltab or a Bingo game type.
10 Set the Manual Claim (for Pulltab games) or Manual Daub option (for Bingo games) to either
Enabled or Disabled, as defined in Table 3-31.

Table 3-31 Manual Claim/Daub options.

Option Definition
Manual Claim - Disabled (default) Winnings are automatically added to the Credit meter.
Manual Claim - Enabled Player must press a button to claim a win.
Manual Daub - Disabled (default) No player intervention is required to complete a bingo game or claim wins.
Winnings are automatically added to the Credit meter.
Manual Daub - Enabled Player must press a button within three seconds to end the bingo game.
The player must also press a button to claim wins. This feature is also
known as 2 Touch.

11 Touch inside the Status field to toggle the setting to Enabled for all applicable Pay Tables.
12 Select Set.
NOTE: Configure is disabled because communications with the host have not yet been
defined. The paytable configuration will continue after the communications are established.
13 Select Exit.

16-020832
3-244 Chapter 3: Software Administration

14 From the Administration Menu, select Central Determination | Central Determ. Host Ip.
The Central Determination Host Ip screen displays, Figure 3-439.
Figure 3-439 Central Determination Host Ip screen.

15 Touch inside the Host Ip Address field and use the keypad to enter the value. Select Enter on
the keypad.
16 Touch inside the Host Port Number field and use the keypad to enter the value. Select Enter
on the keypad.
17 Touch inside the Machine Number field and use the keypad to enter the value (1-100),
Figure 3-440. Select Enter on the keypad.
Figure 3-440 Machine Number keypad.

January 2015
 Central Determination 3-245
18 Touch inside the Terminal Number field and use the keypad to enter the value (1-999999),
Figure 3-441. Select Enter on the keypad.
Figure 3-441 Terminal Number keypad.

19 Select Set to capture the settings.

20 Select Exit.
21 From the Administration Menu, select Central Determination | Paytable Setup to return to the
Paytable Setup screen, Figure 3-442.
Figure 3-442 Central Determination Paytable Setup screen.

22 Select Configure.
NOTE: If the game loses power or is power cycled prior to Configure being selected (but after
the Host Ip settings are captured), return to step 21. The previously set options are saved.
23 At the OPTOS server, download the profile for the EGM. Once a confirmation message
indicates that the profile was received by the EGM, return to the game.
24 At the game, select Configure once again. The game requests paytable and denomination
information from the OPTOS server, and all paytables and denominations are configured
automatically.

16-020832
3-246 Chapter 3: Software Administration

25 Select Exit and view the main Administration Menu. The Pending Status messages in the
upper right portion of the screen have changed. The only messages that should remain are
Main Door Open and Setup Menu Entered, Figure 3-443.
Figure 3-443 Central Determination Menu.

Central The Configuration option allows you to view the current game configuration information.
Determination - 1 Select Central Determination | Configuration from the Administration Menu.
Configuration
The Theme Configuration screen displays, Figure 3-444.
Figure 3-444 Theme Configuration screen.

January 2015
 Central Determination 3-247
2 Select the denomination button to view the lines and multipliers for the denomination,
Figure 3-445.
Figure 3-445 Denomination Configuration screen.

Central Central Determination events are logged in a separate Event History log. To view Central
Determination - Determination events, select Central Determination | Events History | Central Determ. Event
Event History - from the Administration Menu.
Central Determ. The Central Determination Event screen displays, Figure 3-446.
Event Figure 3-446 Central Determination Event screen.

16-020832
3-248 Chapter 3: Software Administration

Central The Central Determination Protocol Event option tracks all messages sent between the OPTOS
Determination - server and the EGM. To view the messages, select Central Determination | Event History |
Event History - Protocol Event from the Administration Menu.
Protocol Event
The Central Determination Protocol Event screen displays, Figure 3-447.
Figure 3-447 Central Determination Protocol Event screen.

Reference the following information if Central Determination games require basic maintenance.
Power Cycling Central Determination Games
If a game requires a power cycle, no additional configuration steps are needed. Upon rebooting,
all configuration and communication settings are retained.
RAM Clearing Central Determination Games
If a Central Determination game requires a RAM clear, the game must be fully reconfigured.
Complete the RAM clear and proceed to step 2 on page page 3-242. If using the same profile as the
one that had been active on the game, omit step 23 on page page 3-245.
Changing the Game Denom or Type on Central Determination Games
To change a game denomination or type (from Pulltab to Bingo, for instance), a full reconfiguration is
required. Proceed to step 2 on page page 3-242.

January 2015
 Chapter 4
Troubleshooting

Table of This chapter contains the following topics:

Contents  Table of Contents.................................................................................4-1
 Overview...............................................................................................4-2
 Troubleshooting...................................................................................4-2
 Major Tilts .............................................................................................4-2
Clearing a Major Tilt .................................................................................. 4-2
 Minor Tilts.............................................................................................4-3
 Tilt or Event Indicators ........................................................................4-3
 Clearing a Tilt .......................................................................................4-3
 Error and Solutions .............................................................................4-4
CPU-NXT3.2 LEDs ................................................................................. 4-15
 OLED Button Panel Tilts/Solutions ..................................................4-16
 Network Gaming Tilts ........................................................................4-17
 RGB Reel Hardware Tilts...................................................................4-18
 General Cabinet Troubleshooting Solutions...................................4-18
 Tower Light Operation.......................................................................4-20
Tower Light States .................................................................................. 4-20
EGM States............................................................................................. 4-20
Two-Stage Tower Lights.......................................................................... 4-21
Two-Stage Tower Light Operations ......................................................... 4-21
Three-Stage Tower Light Operations ...................................................... 4-23
Chirping Switch Troubleshooting ............................................................ 4-25
 Ethernet Diagnostics.........................................................................4-33
 Performing Ethernet Diagnostics Using the Message Delay/Loss Screen .... 4-34

January 2015
16-020832
 4-2 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Overview This chapter provides the following information:

 Tilt codes and possible solutions
 Tower Light code events and descriptions

For detailed steps on troubleshooting the hardware key (digital rights management dongle), see
Hardware Key Administration on page 5-2.

Troubleshooting The game displays tilts or error messages when errors occur, a peripheral device needs service, or
when game security is at risk. The game enters Tilt Mode when it cannot be played.
NOTE: If the information in this section cannot resolve the issue, contact the Customer Product
Support Group at 866.967.4457 or [email protected].
 To list all the tilts pending on the game, insert and turn the Attendant Key.
 The active tilts are listed on the right side of the screen, Figure 4-1 (A).

Figure 4-1 Pending tilts.

Major Tilts When a game enters the Tilt Mode when a major tilt occurs, and game play cannot continue and
requires the assistance of an attendant, Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2 Call Attendant Prompt box.

Clearing a Major Tilt Complete the following steps to clear a major tilt:
1 To access the tilt, open the Main Door.

January 2015
 Minor Tilts 4-3
The most recent major tilt displays in the prompt box, Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Major Tilt In Prompt box - example.

2 Note the tilt and begin the troubleshooting process, see Error and Solutions on page 4-4.

Minor Tilts Minor tilts, when game play can continue but requires some attention, display while in
Administration Mode or Attendant Mode. Complete the following steps to clear a minor tilt:
1 To access the minor tilts, turn the Attendant Key or press the Diagnostic Test Switch.
The active tilts are listed on the right side of the screen, Figure 4-1 (A).
2 Complete the steps in the troubleshooting tables to clear the tilts.

Tilt or Event Depending on the jurisdiction, some tilts and events display on the bottom of the Game Screen until
Indicators the problem or event is cleared, Figure 4-4 (A).
Figure 4-4 Tilts indicated on the Game screen.

Clearing a Tilt Many tilts are cleared by turning the Attendant Key or pressing the DIAGNOSTIC button. For more
information on the location of the Attendant Key or DIAGNOSTIC button on each WMS cabinet, see
Diagnostic Button on page 1-8 and Attendant Key Locations on page 1-12.

16-020832
 4-4 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Error and Refer to Table 4-1 for the tilts included in the OS.
Solutions
Table 4-1 Tilt Codes.
Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
20-Line Payline Payline did not respond to the  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Command Timeout command sent. continues, power cycle the game.
 Check CAT5 cable connections.
 Replace CAT5 cables.
 Change the Payline Board if the problem persists.
20-Line Payline Payline firmware version did not  Run SPN Diagnostics and make sure that the firmware
Invalid Firmware match the requirement. version is correct. If the firmware version is not correct,
Version change the firmware.
 Check CAT5 cable connections.
 Replace CAT5 cables.
5-Line Payline Payline did not respond to the  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Command Timeout command sent. continues, power cycle the game.
 Check CAT5 cable connections.
 Replace CAT5 cables.
 Change the Payline Board if the problem persists.
5-Line Payline Payline returned a bad response to  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Device Response the command sent. continues, power cycle the game.
Error
 Check CAT5 cable connections.
 Replace CAT5 cables.
 Change the Payline Board if the problem persists.
5-Line Payline Payline firmware version did not Run SPN Diagnostics and make sure that the firmware version
Invalid Firmware match the requirement. is correct. If the firmware version is not correct, change the
Version firmware.
Assert Fail Message displays:  When doing a RAM clear, be sure to wait for RAM clear to
complete.
Machine Fault
Assert:  Check RAM clear chip.
Assertion=Success
File=\SDG\framework\libslot\bid\twe  Check the CPU.
ntylineproxy.  Check memory card.
Function=voidCtwentylineProxy:
activate[]  Check software.
Assert Fail "Client Top LCD was not plugged in when Connect the Top LCD and restart the configuration.
Connect failed" configuration was started.

Associated Portals The portal server message indicates This message is applicable for Portal games such as Pirate
Disabled that the portal game must disable Battle. If the player is active, they can finish the game without
when the EGM is idle. interruption. If the EGM is idle, then the EGM displays the
Machine Disabled tilt.
This is typically caused by one or
more EGMs in a bank-level game Once the portal server detects that all EGMs in the bank are
being unavailable. functioning, the connected EGMs are signaled to clear this tilt.
Bill Jam Service Bill Acceptor Service Door is open.  Check the Bill Acceptor Service Door.
Door Open
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
BillVal Acceptor Jam The Bill Acceptor reported that an Check the Bill Acceptor for jammed bills or tickets.
inserted bill or ticket is jamming the
acceptor.
BillVal Com Error The Bill Acceptor connector is  Check the Bill Acceptor connection to the Bulkhead Board.
disconnected or the Bill Acceptor
head is removed.  Check Device settings.

January 2015
 Error and Solutions 4-5
Table 4-1 Tilt Codes. (continued)
Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
BillVal Com Error Generally, a Bill Validator If the communication error does not resolve automatically, the
During Bill or Ticket communication error is a minor tilt. EGM will require service. While the EGM is recovering, the
In However, when there is a communication line or the communication may take up to 15
communication error reported seconds for the Bill Validator device to send the Vend Valid
during Bill/Ticket In, the most command to complete the Bill/Ticket in cycle.
common way to resolve this error is
to cancel the current Bill/Ticket In If the communication error does not resolve, the transaction will
transaction. be canceled and a reject command is sent to Bill Validator.

However, this action could cause

Bill/Ticket not to be credited
properly.
BillVal Device Error The Bill Acceptor reported that one Replace the Bill Acceptor head.
of the following components has
failed:
 Bill Acceptor
 Stack Motor
 Feed Motor
 RAM
 ROM
BillVal Door Open Bill Acceptor Door is open.  Check the Bill Acceptor Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Bill Val Firmware There has been a change in the Bill Open and close the Main Door.
Changed Validation firmware version.
BillVal Port Error An attempt to open, close, read, or  Test UART on the Bulkhead Board.
write through the COM port on the
Bulkhead Board has failed. The  Reseat Bill Acceptor and check if communication is
Bulkhead Board is not restored.
communicating with the Bill
Acceptor through the COM Port.
BillVal Reject Limit More than ten bills or tickets were  Open and close the Main Door.
rejected in a row.
 Clean and calibrate (if applicable).
BillVal Stacker Full The Cashbox is full. Replace the full Cashbox.
BillVal Stacker Jam The Bill Acceptor reports a jam in Check the Cashbox for jammed bills or tickets.
the Cashbox.
BillVal Stacker Open The Cashbox is removed.  Replace the Cashbox or verify that it is properly seated.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
BillVal Tamper The Bill Acceptor reported a tamper. Check the Bill Acceptor for evidence of stringing or other
cheating attempts.
BOSE Chair is The BOSE Chair is not connected to Visually inspect the connection of the BOSE Chair to the EGM
disconnected. the EGM Stand, or has not been Stand to ensure that it is properly connected.
properly connected to EGM Stand.
If the BOSE Chair is not properly connected to the EGM Stand,
disconnect the BOSE Chair, and then reconnect it to the EGM
Stand to ensure that it is properly connected.
WARNING: If the BOSE Chair is disconnected or
improperly connected to the EGM stand, this may
result in injury.
Cabinet fan(s) One or both cabinet fans have a Check cabinet fans and replace failing fan(s).
locked locked rotor (Blade and subsequent
cabinets only).
CashOut To Host Displays when attempting to Check host connection.
Failed cashout to the host and host fails to
respond.

16-020832
4-6 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Table 4-1 Tilt Codes. (continued)

Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
CCCE In <amount> This message reflects that a This message is updated to reflect the most recent CCCE
CCCE Out Centralized Cash Control transfer, and is cleared on the next the game play.
<amount> Equipment (CCCE) transfer has
taken place, (inbound or outbound).
This message triggers the event text
with the amount displayed.
Closure B Belly Door was closed. No action required. Error clears after one game is played.
Closure D Drop Door was closed. No action required. Error clears after one game is played.
Closure H Hatch Door was closed. No action required. Error clears after one game is played.
(Slant ONLY)
Closure L Logic Door was closed. No action required. Error clears after one game is played.
Closure M Main Door was closed. No action required. Error clears after one game is played.
Closure P Top Box Logic Door was closed. No action required. Error clears after one game is played.
Closure S Bill Acceptor Cashbox Door was No action required. Error clears after one game is played.
closed.
Closure T Top Box Main Door was closed. No action required. Error clears after one game is played.
Closure V Bill Acceptor Door was closed. No action required. Error clears after one game is played.
Coin Acceptor The Coin Acceptor reported a Check the Coin Acceptor and optics for coin jams.
Device Error device error.
For the MC40 and the IDX
C480431, a device error is reported
if:
 A coin is behind the comparator
(coil)
 The lower optic is blocked (the
lower optic before the upper
optic)
 A reverse coin was detected
 The rake solenoid is faulty (the
rake is held down)
For the IDX C480435, a device error
is reported if:
 There was no sense signal with
an optic signal
 There was a sense signal with
no optic signal
Coin Acceptor Jam The Coin Acceptor reported that Check Coin Acceptor and optics. Clear jammed coins.
one or more coins are jammed in
the coin path.
Coin Acceptor The Coin Acceptor detected that the Check the Coin Acceptor connection at the Bulkhead Board.
System Error coin in signals did not occur in the
expected order.
Coin Acceptor The Coin Acceptor reported that a Check the Coin Acceptor for evidence of stringing or other
Tamper tamper occurred. attempts at cheating. If a sample coin is used, verify the sample
coin is correct and properly seated.
For the MC40 and the IDX
C480431, a tamper is reported if the
sample coin was removed.
For the IDX C480435, a tamper is
reported if a reverse coin was
detected.
Communication loss The EGM detected a Open and close the Main Door to clear the tilt.
during print communication loss while printing a
ticket, and the printed ticket is
incomplete.
CPU Logic Box Not CPU is not fully seated with latches Release the CPU and reseat. Verify the CPU latches on each
Fully Installed engaged (Blade cabinets only with side of the CPU are engaged.
CPU-NXT3.2).

January 2015
 Error and Solutions 4-7
Table 4-1 Tilt Codes. (continued)
Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
Credit Threshold This message indicates that the This issue can be resolved by cashing out, playing the game, or
Reached credit meter has surpassed the reducing the credit meter below the threshold that is causing
credit threshold value defined by the the error message.
jurisdictional requirements on the
SPI. This condition causes the Cash Once the credit meter indicates that the credit threshold is
In devices to disable. This message below the jurisdictional requirements indicated by means of the
is displayed on the security display SPI, the Cash In devices are enabled.
along the bottom of the screen.
Double Call Two separate Call Attendant  Replace the BIOS chip.
Attendant messages display.
 Replace the SPI chip. If this does not work, replace both the
BIOS and SPI chips at the same time.
 Replace the CPU Board.
Drop Door Open Drop Door is open.  Check the Drop Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead Board.
EMU Com Error Communication to the Emotive  Check the USB and Power Cable that connect to the EMU,
Lighting Controller (EMU) has been
disconnected.  Check the connections to EMU. If all of the connections are
intact,
 Reset the EMU or disconnect then reconnect the USB cable
to the EMU.
EPROM Device Critical error: An improper or non- Replace the Bulkhead Board.
Error functional device was detected and
all processes were suspended.
EPROM System Critical error: An invalid signature ID  RAM clear
Error was detected and all processes
were suspended.  Replace the CPU Board battery and RAM clear.

Extra Coin Out The OS detected a coin out after the Check Hopper and knife.
payout was complete.
Hard Meter 1 The meter connector is  Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
disconnected disconnected. harness.
 Replace the CPU Board.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Hard Meter 2 The meter connector is  Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
disconnected disconnected. harness.
 Replace the CPU Board.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Hard Meter 3 The meter connector is  Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
disconnected disconnected. harness.
 Replace the CPU Board.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Hard Meter 4 The meter connector is  Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
disconnected disconnected. harness.
 Replace the CPU Board.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Hard Meter 5 The meter connector is  Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
disconnected disconnected. harness.
 Replace the CPU Board.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Hard Meter 6 The meter connector is  Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
disconnected disconnected. harness.
 Replace the CPU Board.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Hard Meter 1 The meter connector is shorted. Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
shorted harness.
Hard Meter 2 The meter connector is shorted. Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
shorted harness.
Hard Meter 3 The meter connector is shorted. Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
shorted harness.

16-020832
4-8 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Table 4-1 Tilt Codes. (continued)

Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
Hard Meter 4 The meter connector is shorted. Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
shorted harness.
Hard Meter 5 The meter connector is shorted. Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
shorted harness.
Hard Meter 6 The meter connector is shorted. Check the meter connection. If necessary, replace the meter
shorted harness.
Hood Door Open Hatch Door is open. (Slant ONLY)  Check the Hatch Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Hopper Device Error The OS detected that the time Perform a Hopper Test.
between coin-out pulses was too
short.
Hopper Empty The OS detected that no coins were Check or fill Hopper.
dispensed after a time out period.
Hopper Jam For the Gamesman, a jam condition Check the Hopper and clear any jams or debris from Hopper.
is established if the motor stops
during a payout.
Hopper Runaway The OS detected multiple coins out Check Hopper electronics.
after the payout was complete.
Hopper System The OS detected an error not Check the Hopper connection to the Bulkhead Board.
Error covered in the other error types.
Hopper Tamper The OS detected that the coin pulse Check Hopper coin out switch.
was too short or the coin pulse
occurred during no payout.
IGM Bad Firmware The firmware installed in the Run SPN Diagnostics and make sure that the firmware version
Version Progressive Meter is the incorrect is correct. If the firmware is not correct, change the firmware
version or it is outdated. and/or Progressive Meter.
The incorrect Progressive Meter
hardware is installed.
InGameMeter The Progressive Meter was not able Run SPN Diagnostics and make sure that the firmware version
Config Error to configure itself properly. The is correct. If the firmware is not correct, change the firmware
Progressive Meter may not be and/or Progressive Meter.
supporting all of the progressive
levels configured in physical display.
Jackpot Limit Not (Romania Only) The jackpot limit Set the jackpot limit in the Credit Limits screen. From the
Set has not been set in the Credit Limits Administration Menu, select Setup | Credit Setup.
screen.
Lamp Matrix Lamp Matrix did not respond to the  Clear by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Command Timeout command sent. continues, power cycle the game.
 Change the Lamp Matrix Controller Board if the problem
persists.
Lamp Matrix Device Lamp Matrix returned a bad  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Response Error response to the command sent. continues, power cycle the game.
 Change the Lamp Matrix Controller Board if the problem
persists.
Lamp Matrix Invalid Lamp Matrix firmware version did  Run SPN Diagnostics and make sure that the firmware
Firmware Version not match the requirement. version is correct.
 If the firmware is not correct, change the firmware.
LED Command LED did not respond to the  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Timeout command sent. continues, power cycle the game.
 Change the LED Display Board if the problem persists.
LED Device LED returned a bad response to the  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Response Error command sent. continues, power cycle the game.
 Change the LED Display Board if the problem persists.
LED Invalid LED firmware version did not match  Run SPN Diagnostics and make sure that the firmware
Firmware Version the requirement. version is correct.
 If the firmware is not correct, change the firmware.

January 2015
 Error and Solutions 4-9
Table 4-1 Tilt Codes. (continued)
Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
Location Not Set Theme specific feature in which the Set the Location in the Location Setup screen. From the
Location information needs to be Administration Menu, select Setup | Machine Setup | Location
entered in the Location Setup Setup.
Administration screen.
Logic Door Open Logic Door is open.  Check the Logic Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Machine Control Not A host has not been assigned to Access the Host Setup screen and set the Machine Control.
Selected. control the machine. Select Setup | Comm Setup | Serial Ports | Host Setup.
Machine Disabled The Host has disabled the game. Displays for various reasons, including SAS communication
breakdown. Review Host System messages for detailed
information.
Main Door Open Main Door is open.  Check the Main Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Mech Reels Bad Internal failure of Reel Module. Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Command continues, change the Reel Module.
Response
Mech Reels Bad Reel firmware incompatible with Install proper reel firmware to match game requirements.
Firmware Version game software.
Mech Reels Bad The corresponding reel's light cup Ensure that the correct configuration is used for the game.
Light Cup Position position doesn't match with what the
game expects.
Mech Reels Bad Tampering of reels may have  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door.
Optic Band Reel x occurred.
 Replace reel opto film strip.
Reel opto film damaged or dirty.
Mech Reels Bad The mechanical reels may have  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door.
Opto Strip x incorrect opto strips installed.
 If the error continues, change the opto strips.
 If the problem persists, replace the Reel Module.
Mech Reels Bad Internal failure of Reel Module. Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Stop Symbol continues, change the Reel Module.
Mech Reels Comm Bad Reel Controller chip or a Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Timeout Reel x software issue. continues, power cycle the game.
Mech Reels The SPN cable from the mechanical Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door.
Command Timeout reels is unplugged or bad.
If the error continues, check the cable and reconnect or replace
as necessary.
Mech Reels Invalid Tampering of reels may have  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door.
Opto At Stop Reel x occurred.
 Install correct opto film strip to match the number of stop
Opto film strip number of stop positions required by game.
positions does not match game
requirement.
Mech Reels Invalid Internal failure of Reel Module. Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
State continues, change the Reel Module.
Mech Reels No Internal failure of Reel Module. Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Home Reel x continues, change the Reel Module.
Mech Reels Reel Tampering of reels may have Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Moving At Stop Reel occurred. continues, change the Reel Module.
x
Mech Reels Reel Tampering of reels may have Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Not Spinning Reel x occurred. continues, change the Reel Module.
Mech Reels Internal failure of Reel Module. Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door.
Watchdog Timeout
Reel x If the error continues, check the Reel Mech connections and, if
necessary, change the Reel Module.

16-020832
4-10 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Table 4-1 Tilt Codes. (continued)

Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
Mech Reels RGB If game enables RGB and the  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door.
Hardware Required hardware detected by the driver
doesn't support RGB (Legacy), then  If the error continues, power cycle the game.
the driver would post a tilt by saying
the new RGB Reels are required.
No Trigger XX Error Message displays:  Replace the BIOS chip.
(where X is a
number) Machine Fault  Replace the SPI chip. If this does not work, replace both the
Assert: BIOS and SPI chips at the same time.
Assertion=Success
File=\SDG\framework\libslot\bid\twe  Replace the CPU Board.
ntylineproxy.
Function=voidCtwentylineProxy:
activate[]
NVRAM Battery 1 The NVRAM battery 1 is low. Replace the CPU Battery at location BAT1.
Low
NVRAM Battery 2 The NVRAM battery 2 is low. Replace the CPU Battery at location BAT2.
Low
NVRAM Corruption Critical error: Corruption was  Turn the Attendant Key to display the fault information.
detected in the Non-Volatile
Random Access Memory (NVRAM)  Turn the Attendant Key a second time to force a restart.
and all processes were suspended.  Replace the CPU Board.
NVRAM Device Critical error: An improper or non- Replace the CPU Board.
Error functional device was detected and
all processes were suspended.
NVRAM System Critical error: An invalid signature ID  RAM clear
Error was detected and all processes
were suspended.  Replace the CPU Board battery and RAM clear.

Open Door B Belly Door is open.  Check the Belly Door.

NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Open Door D Drop Door is open.  Check the Drop Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Open Door H Hatch Door is open. (Slant ONLY)  Check the Hatch Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Open Door L Logic Door is open.  Check the Logic Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Open Door M Main Door is open.  Check the Main Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Open Door P Top Box Logic Door is open.  Check the Top Box Logic Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.

January 2015
 Error and Solutions 4-11
Table 4-1 Tilt Codes. (continued)
Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
Open Door S Bill Acceptor Cashbox Door is open.  Check the Bill Acceptor Stacker/ Cashbox Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Open Door T Top Box Main Door is open.  Check the Main Top Box Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Open Door V Bill Acceptor Door is open.  Check the Bill Acceptor Door.
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  Check connections on cherry switch.
enters a tilt condition and displays a
Door Open tilt message. The game  Replace switch.
is unplayable until all doors are  Replace the CPU Board.
securely closed.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Please Wait Displays when transferring funds to/ Wait for the transaction to complete.
Transaction In from the game.
Progress
Power Cycle Device setting was changed. Power cycle the game.
Required (OS
SSOS-000-1300 NOTE: In OS 1300 and later, the
and later). game no longer requires a RAM
clear due to machine device
changes.
Power Fault while The Printer lost power while Check power connection to Printer.
Printing printing.
Power Reset The game powered up. No action required. Error clears after one game is played.
Printer Carriage The Printer reported a carriage jam. Check Printer head for jams.
Jam
Printer Close Error The Printer reported an error after Check Printer cabling.
being closed.
Printer Com Error The Printer communication was Confirm that the Printer communication and power cables are
lost. A status reply has not been connected.
received from the Printer for ten
seconds, during an Idle state. Replace Printer Comm. Board.

Printer Com Lost During a print job, the Printer Confirm that the Printer communication and power cables are
During Print stopped replying to status requests. connected.
Printer Config Error The Printer needs to be configured. Check the Printer configuration in the Administration Menu.
Printer Device Error The Printer reported an error with a Test or replace the Printer.
component.
 Head Failure
 Voltage Failure
 Temperature Failure
 Bad Paper Index
Printer Limit Not Set (Romania Only) The printer limit has Set the printer limit in the Credit Limits screen. From the
not been set in the Credit Limits Administration Menu, select Setup | Credit Setup.
screen.
Printer Not Set The Printer is not set up. Set the Printer as a Machine Device from the Setup Menu.
Printer Off Line The Printer reported an offline Check Printer cabling.
status.
Printer Open Error The Printer reported an open status. Open and close the Printer.
For the Seiko/FutureLogic, the
Printer detected a door open error,
or a platen disengaged error.
Printer Out of Paper The Printer detected an out of paper  Refill the paper.
status, or a lost paper input status.
 Check optic on printer.
Printer Paper In For the Netplex only, the Printer Remove paper from chute.
Chute reported a paper in chute status.
Printer Paper Jam The Printer reported a paper jam. Check the Printer for jams and clear path.

16-020832
4-12 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Table 4-1 Tilt Codes. (continued)

Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
Printer Paper Low The Printer reported a paper low  Refill the paper.
status.
 Check optic on printer.
Printer Power Off The Printer power is OFF.  Check the Aux. Power Distribution Unit (PDU).
 Verify connections on Bulkhead.
Printer Receive The Printer reported a receive error.  Check Printer cabling.
Error
 If necessary, replace cable.
Printer System Error The Printer reported a system error. Test or replace the Printer.
 Bad Library References
 Bad Printer Region Data
 Bad Buffer Space
 Bad Job Memory
 Bad Command
Printer Timeout For the Ithaca/Transact only, the Test or replace the Printer.
Error Printer reported that a print process
started with no errors, but the ticket
complete flag was not reported.
Printer Transmit The Printer reported a transmit Confirm the Printer communication and power cable
Error error. connections.
Program Error Critical error: A program detected  Turn the Attendant Key to display the fault information.
an unrecoverable error and all
processes were suspended.  Turn the Attendant Key a second time to force a restart.
 A RAM clear may be required.
Progressive The game has received a valid  This is cleared automatically when the game is enabled by
Disabled progressive configuration from the the Progressive Controller.
Progressive Controller and is
waiting for the Progressive  Inspect system to establish if a physical communication
Controller to enable the play problem exists.
function.
The gaming device has lost
communication with the progressive
system.
Progressive Link Progressive Link Down is raised Restore the connection.
Down when the operator has configured
the EGM for the Mikohn Progressive
and the EGM has lost
communication with the Mikohn
Progressive Controller.
Progressive The game has received certain Power cycle the game.
Response Error information from the Progressive
Controller which is unexpected or
deemed incorrect, and the error
cannot be automatically cleared.
Progressive Sign Displayed during game startup.  Enter and exit the game Administration Mode completely.
Not Functioning
If after game startup the error is still  If the solution above is unsuccessful, replace In-Game
displayed, the attempt at In-Game Meter.
meter configuration failed.
Progressive The WMSP protocol has been  Verify connectivity to the Progressive Controller. Verify that
Unconfigured configured and the Host has not game has been entered into the database at the controller
recognized the required and/or central system and that the data entered matches
configuration information. This may the actual game configuration.
be due to the following:
 Verify that the cables are functional.
 Game has not received a valid
progressive configuration from  Replace the Progressive Controller software.
the Progressive Controller.  Verify that the game has been configured in Admin.
 There is no communication with
the Progressive Controller or the
communication is lost for more
than 10 seconds.
 Game was explicitly disabled by
the Progressive Controller.
Protocol Com Error A com port error has occurred.  Check Host communication configuration in Administration
Mode.
 Verify that the game has been entered into the casino
backend system.

January 2015
 Error and Solutions 4-13
Table 4-1 Tilt Codes. (continued)
Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
Protocol Config The protocol has not been  Check Host communication configuration in Administration
Error configured or the Host has not sent Mode.
the required validation information.
 Verify that the game has been entered into the casino
backend system.
RAM Error Critical error: An unrecoverable  Turn the Attendant Key to display error information.
error was detected in the Random
Access Memory (RAM) and all  Turn the key a second time to initiate a game restart.
processes were suspended.  If the problem continues, replace the RAM Module and the
CPU.
RGB Matrix The SPN command sent to the  Clear the tilt by opening and closing the Main Door.
command time out device doesn't get any response
from the driver.  If the error continues, power cycle the game.

RGB Matrix device The device responds with errors to  Clear the tilt by opening and closing the Main Door.
response error the SPN commands.
 If the error continues, power cycle the game.
RGB Matrix Invalid The firmware version number read  Clear the tilt by opening and closing the Main Door.
Firmware Version from the RGB device doesn't match
the expected version number.  If the error continues, power cycle the game.

Single Row The Universal Animator Button did  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Universal Animator not respond to the command sent. continues, power cycle the game.
Command Timeout
 Change the button if the problem persists.
 Check or replace CAT 5.
Single Row The Universal Animator Button  Clear tilt by opening and closing Main Door. If the error
Universal Animator returned a bad response to the continues, power cycle the game.
Device Response command sent.
Error  Change the button if the problem persists.

Single Row The Universal Animator Button Run SPN Diagnostics and make sure that the firmware version
Universal Animator firmware version did not match the is correct. If the firmware is not correct, change the firmware.
Invalid Firmware requirement.
Version
Sleeping Forever Message displays: No more tasks  Reset the CPU Board.
for init - sleeping forever.
 Check for bent pins on the Blind Mate Connectors on the
Bulkhead Board.
Soft Cashout to (Only present for AFT with Transfer Exit the attendant menu and/or clear all other tilts. Once this is
Host Failed from EGM enabled and the Cashout done, the EGM clears the Soft Cashout to Host Failed condition
To Host type is Soft Enabled Host and continue the cashout by means of another payout method.
Attempt.)
Indicates that the EGM attempted to
cashout to the host, but the cashout
was unsuccessful. The EGM cannot
complete the cashout because a tilt
is present.
Stacker Switch Bill Acceptor Stacker Door is open.  Check the Bill Acceptor Stacker/Cashbox Door.
Open
NOTE: If a door is open, the game  If using a Mars validator, check or replace the Mars interface
enters a tilt condition and displays a board.
Door Open tilt message. The game
is unplayable until all doors are  Check connections on cherry switch.
securely closed.  Replace switch.
 Replace the CPU Board.
 Replace Bulkhead.
Touch Screen The controller reported an error  Calibrate the Touch Screen.
Calibration Error during calibration.
 Replace LCD.
Touch Screen Com The controller connector is  Check Touch Screen connectors.
Error disconnected or a com port open
error has occurred.  Replace LCD.

Touch Screen Data The controller sent invalid data.  Check the Bulkhead Board Touch Screen connector.
Error
 Replace LCD.

16-020832
4-14 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Table 4-1 Tilt Codes. (continued)

Display Definition Possible Solution(s)
Touch Screen The controller reported an  Check the Touch Screen controller.
Device Error initialization error.
 Replace LCD.
Validation Not Set The validation type needs to be set Access the SAS Setup screen and set the Validation. Select
on the SAS Setup screen. Setup | Comm Setup | Serial Ports | Config.
Waiting For A progressive win has occurred and While waiting for the confirmed win amount to display, the
Progressive Win the game is waiting to receive the operator may turn the Attendant Key to clear the error and
Amount confirmed progressive win amount cause the game to abort. If this occurs, it is then necessary to
from the Progressive Controller. determine the confirmed win amount manually.
This condition clears itself
automatically once the confirmed
win amount is received.
If the game does not receive a
confirmed win amount within 60
seconds of reporting the win to the
controller, Tower Light flashes
slowly to notify attendant that a
manual payout of the win is
required.

January 2015
 Error and Solutions 4-15
CPU-NXT3.2 LEDs When an LED on the CPU-NXT3.2 is not lit, check the meaning in Table 4-2 to identify where the
problem exists.
When an LED on the CPU-NXT3.2 is not operating properly, consult the Position* column.

Table 4-2 CPU-NXT3.2 LEDs.

LED Color Position * Meaning
D2 Red OFF IO Lock
D43 Green Toggle SSD A Access Indicator
D46 Green Toggle/OFF** SSD B Access Indicator
D3 Green ON 3.3V Power
D7 Green ON 5V Power
D8 Green ON POWER GOOD
D13 Green ON 12V Power
D44 Green Toggle OS CompactFlash Access Indicator
D43 Green Toggle Game CompactFlash Access Indicator
D16 Green Toggle ATI Video Source
D17 Green OFF/Toggle*** Intel Video Source
D1A**** Green Toggle Game CompactFlash Access Indicator
D1B**** Green Toggle OS CompactFlash Access Indicator

* Position = Normally ON, Normally OFF, Toggle

** Depends if the SSD B is installed
*** Depends if a third video is attached
**** LEDs are on the SATA PCB and not on the mainboard

16-020832
 4-16 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

OLED Button Refer to Table 4-3 for the OLED Button Panel Tilts.
Panel Tilts/ NOTE: If using the OLED Button Panel in the Game, the OLED Button Panel must be configured
Solutions with the correct firmware prior to configuring the game. The correct firmware version is v3_xx for
SSSG-000-15xx (NG 2.0).
For more information regarding the OLED Button Panel, and the WMS USB Test Comm Tool, refer
to Information Bulletin 16-026536-02: OLED Button Panel Graphics, Font and Animation Display,
and Switch Firmware Installation and Troubleshooting.
WMS Field Service and other employees may access the USB Test Comm Tool and firmware files
from the Supply Chain & Commercial Operations intranet site. Select OLED Button Firmware.
For customers, the OLED Installation Tool and multiple versions of the Firmware may be provided
by WMS on media such as a compact disc or USB Flash Drive, or they may be downloaded from
the Casino Support section of the WMS web site.

Table 4-3 OLED Button Panel Tilts.

Display Definition/Cause Possible Solution(s)
OLED Button Panel Communication error  Check connections (power and USB). Unplug and replug
communication error the Power and USB connections.
Cause:
No power or No USB connection.  Replace Cables
 Replace Button Panel
OLED Button Panel Firmware Version mismatch Download correct firmware.
Firmware Version
mismatch Cause:
Wrong firmware
or
OLED Button Panel
version mismatch
OLED button Panel does Panel mismatch. Choose the correct device, replace with the correct device.
not match Device Setup
selection Cause:
Wrong device is selected or
or installed.
Selected Button Panel
does not match

January 2015
 Network Gaming Tilts 4-17

Network Refer to Table 4-4 for the Network Gaming Tilts.

Gaming Tilts
Table 4-4 Network Gaming Tilts.
Display Definition/Cause Possible Solution(s)
Associated Portals The portal server message indicates that the This message is applicable for Portal games such as
Disabled portal game must disable when the EGM is Pirate Battle. If the player is active, they can finish the
idle. game without interruption, but if the EGM is idle, then
the EGM displays the Machine Disabled tilt.
This is typically caused by one or more
EGMs in a bank-level game being Once the portal server detects that all EGMs in the
unavailable. bank are functioning, the connected EGMs are
signaled to clear this tilt.
CGC Connection The EGM does not have a connection to the  Verify EGM has an IP address and that the
Lost CGC (for retrieving configuration). Network Name Server address is configured
properly.
 Verify the CGC is up and running.
 Verify that the cables are connected.
 Verify that the network switches are operating.
CGC Service Failed There is a problem with a service on the Troubleshoot from the CGC.
CGC.
CGC Portal Failed There is a problem with the portal game on Troubleshoot from the CGC.
the CGC. There are several codes that are
associated with this tilt:
 GNE - Master Game Instance Does Not
Exist
 GID - Master Game Instance Disabled
 GNR - Master Game Instance Not
Running
 GIF - Master Game Instance Failed
Associated Portal The portal game is not able to be played. If the CGC and EGM are otherwise healthy and the
Not Available tilt does not clear on its own in several minutes, try to
power cycle.
Portal Association The portal associations in the current RAM clear and start over.
Error configuration received from the CGC for an
enabled (or previously enabled, but not
installed) paytable-denom do not match the
portal associations that were in the
configuration at the time the paytable-denom
was originally configured.
Portal Configuration The configuration for an associated portal of RAM clear and start over.
Changed an enabled paytable-denom does not match
the configuration of the associated portal
used when the paytable-denom was
originally configured.

16-020832
 4-18 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

RGB Reel Refer to Table 4-5 for the RGB Reel Tilts. These tilts are only applicable for the Mechanical Reel
Hardware Tilts games.

Table 4-5 RGB Reel Tilts.

Display Definition/Cause Possible Solution(s)
SpnDriver Assert: Assert: RGB needs to be enabled to use four  Ensure that the light cup position is set to the
RGB Must be light cups. 4-cup position.
enabled to use four
light cups. The light cup positions are wrong.  Ensure that RGB is enabled on the Game.

SpnDriver RGB must be enabled. Ensure that the RGB is enabled.

ASSERT_FAIL:
Enable/Connect
RGB hardware to
use RGB lamp
commands.
Mech Reels Bad The corresponding reel's light cup position Ensure that the Operating System is configured to
Light Cup Position doesn't match with what the game expects. use 3 cups instead of 4 cups.
This error occurs when trying to use 4 cups
on 3 cup reel hardware.
SpnDriver This assert occurs when legacy lamp Ensure that the correct firmware version is enabled.
ASSERT_FAIL: commands are called while RGB is enabled.
Legacy lamp
commands are not
allowed on RGB
hardware.

General Cabinet Reference Table 4-6 for general cabinet troubleshooting solutions.
Troubleshooting
Solutions Table 4-6 Troubleshooting.
Symptoms Solutions
Game does not operate after setting Confirm the following:
Power Switch to ON.
 All cables are properly connected.
 With CPU door open, the four power LEDs are lit (3.3V, 5V, 12V, and 15V).
If power indicator LEDs are not lit, set the game Power Switch to OFF and
verify that CPU Board is properly seated.
 Operating system and game CompactFlash Cards are installed and fully
seated.
 BIOS Firmware Hub is installed and fully seated.
Displays appearing on game monitors Ensure that video cables are plugged into the correct ports on the CPU.
are reversed.
Enclosure Fan does not spin. Confirm the following:
 Power cable on Enclosure Fan is properly connected
 Power cable on Enclosure Fan is properly connected.
CPU-NXT2 is overheated. Confirm the following:
 Power cable on Enclosure Fan is properly connected.
If Fan requires replacement, see the procedure to replace the Fan in the
Information Bulletin 16-019066: Overview of CPU-NXT2.
All LEDs (VGA_E, VGA_A, 3.3V, 5V, Confirm the following:
12V, and 15V) remain lit for entire
duration the game Power Switch is set  BIOS Firmware Hub is properly installed.
to ON.  BIOS Firmware Hub is not damaged where connected to the socket.
 RAM module is present, properly installed, and free of debris.
 RAM is working properly by swapping it with a known good RAM module.
No video and LCD(s) indicate there is  Check cables and connections.
power.
 Replace VGA cable.
 Replace DVI cable.
 Replace the BIOS Firmware.
 Verify BIOS Firmware is installed properly.

January 2015
 General Cabinet Troubleshooting Solutions 4-19
Table 4-6 Troubleshooting.
Symptoms Solutions
No video and LCD(s) indicate there is  Verify the LCD is properly connected at both ends.
no power.
 Check fuse and replace if necessary.
 Replace LCD.
 Reconnect cable to power.
No video (power indicator LEDs are lit). Confirm the following:
 Video cables are installed in the proper ports.
 ETX CPU module is receiving power (Fan is spinning).
 BIOS Firmware Hub is properly installed.
Display prompts user to use the touch Confirm the following:
screen to select an action while
performing RAM clear.  The RAM clear CompactFlash card is installed in the OS CompactFlash slot.

The two options are as follows:  SPI is installed and in the proper orientation.

 clear NVRAM If the SPI was previously installed in the incorrect orientation, it requires a
replacement.
 clear NVRAM and EPROM
 All the pins of the SPI are free of damage and are inserted into their
corresponding sockets.
Error Text Displays: Confirm the following:
PREPART DSS Signature Validation  The non-conductive battery tabs were removed from CPU-NXT2 battery
failed holder.
 The OS and game CompactFlash Cards are installed into their corresponding
locations and are fully inserted. Complete the following steps to confirm:
1 Power down the game.
2 Remove the OS and game CompactFlash Cards.
3 Replace the OS and game CompactFlash Cards, ensuring they are securely
installed.
4 Power up the game.

16-020832
 4-20 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Tower Light The Tower Light on top of the game indicates the game operational status and denomination. The
Operation Event status information is displayed by the Tower Light turning on and off at specific timed
intervals, Figure 4-5 (A).
Figure 4-5 Tower Light Location on game.

NOTE: Tower Light functionality may vary by jurisdiction.

Tower Light States Table 4-7 lists the Tower Light states and descriptions.
Table 4-7 Tower Light States and Descriptions.
Tower Light State Description
Off The light is off.
On The light is on continually.
Slow Flash Slow Flash flashes on/off once per second (1/2 second on/off intervals).
Medium Flash Medium Flash flashes on/off twice per second (1/4 second on/off intervals).
Fast Flash Fast Flash flashes on/off four times per second (1/8 second on/off intervals).

EGM States Table 4-8 lists the EGM states and descriptions.
Table 4-8 EGM State and Descriptions.
EGM State Description
Out-of-Service Mode EGM is not playable.
Disabled Mode Operator has placed the EGM in the unplayable state.
Idle Mode EGM is playable.

Administrative Mode Operator has entered the Administrative Mode (Setup menus and
game functions accessed by means of the Attendant Key or Test
Switch). This is an unplayable state.
Handpay Mode The EGM is in an unplayable state due to a handpay or jackpot
handpay condition.
Suspend (Hard Tilt) An error condition that requires suspension of the EGM. The game
cannot operate until the condition is cleared. The suspension is
indicated by the Call Attendant message on the EGM.
Non-Suspend (Soft Tilt) The EGM is in a playable state, but the condition is logged and
indicated in the Operator screens.

January 2015
 Tower Light Operation 4-21
Two-Stage Tower The Two-stage Tower Light contains the following two sections:
Lights  The Attendant indicator or Top section, Figure 4-6 (A), displays the game operational status.
 The Service indicator or Bottom section, Figure 4-6 (B), displays the game denomination and
operational status.

Figure 4-6 Two-Stage Tower Light.

Two-Stage Tower Table 4-9 lists the events and light states for the two-stage Tower Lights.
Light Operations The Slot Machine Door is defined as any of the following non-drop compartment doors:

 Main Door
 Belly/Hood/Front Doors (Helios/Orion)
 Bill Validator Door
 Top Box Door
 Logic (CPU) Door
 Top Box Logic Door
 Bill Validator Stacker Removed (listed as Stacker Switch Open in the Event History)

NOTE: For all door open conditions, if the game has not been played off after the Slot Machine Door
is closed, the Bottom Tower Light will continue to flash. The game must be played off in order to
clear the tilt condition. For example, if there is a handpay condition with a door open, the handpay
condition must be cleared first (top light), before a game can be played off to clear the bottom light.

Table 4-9 Two-Stage Tower Light Operations.

Event Top Bottom
 Idle Off Off
 Slot Machine Door is closed
 Idle Off Medium Flash
 Slot Machine Door is open
 Idle Off Fast Flash
 Drop Compartment Door is open
 Patron is requesting change On Off
 All Doors closed
 Slot Machine is in the Disabled Mode On On
 All doors closed
 Patron is requesting change On Medium Flash
 Slot Machine Door is open
or
 Slot Machine is in the Disabled Mode and the Slot Machine Door is open

16-020832
4-22 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Table 4-9 Two-Stage Tower Light Operations. (continued)

Event Top Bottom
 Slot Machine is in the Disabled Mode On Fast Flash
 Drop Compartment Door is open
 All other doors are closed
 Slot Machine is in Tilt Mode Slow Flash Off
 All doors are closed
 Slot Machine is displaying a handpay and all doors are closed Slow Flash Slow Flash
or
 Slot Machine is displaying a handpay while in Tilt Mode, and all doors are closed
 Slot Machine is displaying a handpay and the Slot Machine Door is open Slow Flash Medium Flash
or
 Slot Machine is in Tilt Mode, and the Slot Machine Door is open
 Slot Machine is displaying a handpay Slow Flash Fast Flash
 Drop Compartment Door is open
 All other doors are closed
 Slot Machine is in Tilt Mode Slow Flash Fast Flash
 Drop Compartment Door is open
 All other doors are closed
 Slot Machine is in Administrative Mode Fast Flash Off
 All doors are closed
 Slot Machine is in Administrative Mode Fast Flash Medium Flash
 Slot Machine Door is open
 Drop Door Compartment may be open or closed
 Slot Machine is in Administrative Mode Fast Flash Fast Flash
 Slot Machine Drop Compartment Door is open
 All other doors are closed

January 2015
 Tower Light Operation 4-23
Three-Stage Tower The Three-stage Tower Light contains the following three sections:
Light Operations  The Top section indicates the Handpay status, Figure 4-7 (A).
 The Middle section indicates No Game Play, Figure 4-7 (B).
 The Bottom section indicates if Change or Service Request is present, Figure 4-7 (C).

NOTE: Three-stage Tower Lights are currently only used in France.

Figure 4-7 Three-Stage Tower Light.

NOTE: For the Three-Stage Tower Light, only the Middle section turns on/off once per second
(1/2 second on/off intervals).
Table 4-10 lists the three-stage Tower Light operations.
Table 4-10 Three-Stage Tower Light Operations.
Event Top Middle Bottom
 Doors are closed Off Off Off
 Handpay is not pending
 No tilts
 No change request
 Doors are closed Off Off On
 Handpay is not pending
 No tilts
 Change Request
 Doors are closed Off On Off
 Handpay is not pending
 Tilt Mode
 No change request
 Doors are closed Off On On
 Handpay is not pending
 Tilt Mode
 Change Request
 Doors are closed On Off Off
 Handpay Pending
 No tilts, No change request

16-020832
4-24 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Table 4-10 Three-Stage Tower Light Operations.

 Doors are closed On Off On
 Handpay Pending
 No tilts
 Change Request
 Doors are closed On On Off
 Handpay Pending
 Tilt Mode
 No change request
 Doors are closed On On On
 Handpay Pending
 Tilt Mode
 Change Request
 Door Open Off Slow Off
Flash
 Handpay is not pending
 No change request (Tilt Mode or No tilts)
 Door Open Off Slow On
Flash
 Handpay is not pending
 Change Request (Tilt Mode or No tilts)
 Door Open On Slow Off
Flash
 Handpay Pending
 No change request (Tilt Mode or No tilts)
 Door Open On Slow On
Flash
 Handpay Pending
 Change Request (Tilt Mode or No tilts)
 Door Open On Slow Off
Flash
 Handpay Pending
 No change request (Tilt Mode or No tilts)

January 2015
 Tower Light Operation 4-25
Chirping Switch The Chirping Switch Troubleshooting diagram details a decision tree for Chirping Switch incidents
Troubleshooting occurring on WMS games. Chirping is a term used to identify game switches that record unexpected
open or close events in the Event History, as well as the Host Backend logs.
The Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Introduction explains the objects and notations used in the
Chirping Switch Troubleshooting diagram, with examples to explain the flow throughout the
diagram. Refer to Figure 4-8 for the Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Introduction.
Figure 4-8 Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Introduction.

16-020832
4-26 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Refer to Figure 4-9 for the Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 0.
Figure 4-9 Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 0.

January 2015
 Tower Light Operation 4-27
Refer to Figure 4-10 for the Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 1.
Figure 4-10 Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 1.

16-020832
4-28 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Refer to Figure 4-11 for the Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 2.
Figure 4-11 Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 2.

January 2015
 Tower Light Operation 4-29
Refer to Figure 4-12 for the Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 3.
Figure 4-12 Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 3.

16-020832
4-30 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Refer to Figure 4-13 for the Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 4.
Figure 4-13 Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 4.

January 2015
 Tower Light Operation 4-31
Refer to Figure 4-14 for the Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 5.
Figure 4-14 Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Diagram - Page 5.

16-020832
4-32 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Refer to Figure 4-15 for the Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Checklist. Complete the checklist prior
to contacting WMS for support.
Figure 4-15 Chirping Switch Troubleshooting Checklist.

January 2015
 Ethernet Diagnostics 4-33

Ethernet The Message Delay/Loss screen provides a way to test for networking or infrastructure issues that
Diagnostics may cause the EGMs to lose communication. The Message Delay/Loss Test graph plots latencies
for the messages received, indicating how far apart (in milliseconds) the messages are received
from the peer EGM.
This procedure can be performed when the games are first installed, or if there are networking
infrastructure issues that are causing the EGMs and CGC to lose communication and cause an
EGM tilt.
The Message Delay/Loss Test screen performs the following functions:
 Verifies that the EGMs tested are physically connected to the Local Area Network (LAN).
 Verifies that the network address is correct for the EGMs tested.
 Determines if packets are lost between EGMs tested.
 Verifies ethernet connectivity between two EGMS.
 Measures (on a graph) how long it takes to send a message between two EGMs,
(Transmission Rate).
 Verifies Big Event Server ethernet connectivity.
The Message Delay/Loss Test screen allows testing of the ethernet connectivity between two
EGMs, or the ethernet connectivity between an EGM and the Big Event Server. This procedure
requires the use of two different EGMs to test the network infrastructure between EGMs,
Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16 Message Delay/Loss screen.

16-020832
 4-34 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

Performing Ethernet Complete the following procedure to perform Ethernet Diagnostics using the Message Delay/Loss
Diagnostics Using Test screen. Ethernet diagnostics provides a method for WMS technicians to test the network
the Message Delay/ infrastructure in the casinos for the Big Event Server, Ultra Hit Progressive, or Portal games.
Loss Screen
NOTE: If testing the Big Event Server, use the Big Event Server IP Address: 10.10.1.1
Figure 4-17 displays the two network testing scenarios for the Message Delay/Loss Test.
Figure 4-17 Ethernet Diagnostics testing scenarios.

See Table 4-11 for Ethernet Diagnostic - Message Delay/Loss screen fields.

Table 4-11 Ethernet Diagnostic Message Delay/Loss Test Fields/Descriptions.

Field Description
TX Status Transmission status.
RX Status Receive status.
TX Rate Transmission rate.
Local IP The IP Address of the EGM.
Remote IP The Remote IP Address of the peer EGM or server that is tested.
Run time How long the test has been running.

January 2015
 Ethernet Diagnostics 4-35
This procedure is performed using two different EGMs on the Local Area Network (LAN). Set the
Remote IP address on each EGM to point to the other EGM.
1 Open the Ethernet Diagnostics - Message Delay/Loss Test screen on two different EGMs.
From the Administration Menu, select Diagnostics | Network Diagnostics |
Ethernet Diagnostics | Delay/Loss Diagnostics, Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-18 Ethernet Diagnostics Menu.

The Message Delay/Loss Test screen displays, Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19 Message Delay/Loss Test screen.

2 The Local IP Address field automatically populates with the IP address of the local EGM.
3 Select a peer EGM on the network to test the ethernet connectivity for the LAN.
4 Select Change Remote IP to enter the IP address of the peer EGM, Figure 4-19 (A).

16-020832
4-36 Chapter 4: Troubleshooting

The Remote IP Keypad displays, Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20 Message Delay/Loss Test - Remote IP keypad.

5 Enter the IP Address of the peer EGM in the Remote IP Address Keypad, Figure 4-20.
NOTE: If testing the Big Event Server, enter the Big Event Server IP Address: 10.10.1.1
6 Open the Message Delay/Loss screen on the peer EGM.
7 Select Change Remote IP, Figure 4-20 (B).
8 Enter the IP Address of the peer EGM.
9 Select Start Test, Figure 4-20 (A) for both EGMs.
If the Ethernet communications is normal, the graph plot line displays as in Figure 4-21 (A).
Figure 4-21 Message Delay/Loss Test screen.

10 Select Stop Test, Figure 4-21 (B) for both EGMs when the tests are completed.

January 2015
 Chapter 5
Maintenance

Table of This chapter contains the following topics:

Contents  Table of Contents.................................................................................5-1
 Hardware Key Administration.............................................................5-2
Hardware Key Error Resolution Decision Flow Chart ...............................5-3
Troubleshooting Hardware Key Boot up Errors ........................................5-4
Troubleshooting Hardware Key Machine Fault Errors ..............................5-5
Verifying the Hardware Key Installation ....................................................5-6
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-3.2X Board........................................ 5-6
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT3.2 Board ................................... 5-7
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT2 Board ...................................... 5-9
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board and
Non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT Board ....................................................... 5-11
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board and
Non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT Board for Jurisdictions
with the Protective Cover ............................................................................. 5-13
Verifying Hardware Key ID and Game Theme Information .....................5-15
Verifying the Game ID Information for the Hardware Key if the
System Halted Screen Displays................................................................... 5-15
Obtaining Hardware Key ID Information
if the Machine Fault Screen Displays........................................................... 5-17
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives ...............5-19
Data Recovery ........................................................................................5-19
When to Perform a Transfer of Liability...................................................5-19
Configuration Order ................................................................................5-19
Overview of Transfer of Liability When Values are Not Known ...............5-20
Performing Transfer of Liability When Values are Not Known ................5-21
Overview of Transfer of Liability When Values are Known......................5-27
Performing Transfer of Liability When Values are Known .......................5-28
Flow Chart for Reconciling Current Amounts ..........................................5-34
Reconciling Current Amounts .................................................................5-35

January 2015
16-020832
 5-2 Chapter 5: Maintenance

Hardware Key Complete the following procedures to troubleshoot errors associated with Hardware Key-enabled
Administration themes. There are two Hardware Key system fault screens, the System Halted screen,
Figure 5-1, and the Machine Fault screen, Figure 5-2, that display when there are Hardware Key
errors.
The System Halted screen, Figure 5-1, displays and the Game does not boot up for the following
reasons:
 Hardware Key is not present.
 Hardware Key is installed incorrectly.
 USB port is not working properly.
 Hardware Key does not match the game theme or has an incorrect license.
Figure 5-1 System Halted screen.

The Machine Fault screen, Figure 5-2, displays for the following reasons:
 Game theme does not match the current Hardware Key.
 Hardware Key has been tampered with, or swapped.
 Hardware Key has been removed from the Game after the boot up sequence.

Figure 5-2 Machine Fault screen.

January 2015
 Hardware Key Administration 5-3
Hardware Key Error Reference Figure 5-3 to troubleshoot Hardware Key errors.
Resolution Decision Figure 5-3 Hardware Key Error Resolution Decision Flow Chart.
Flow Chart
Start

The Game does not boot up, and the The Game boots up, and the
Or
System Halted screen displays. Machine Fault screen displays.

Is the Hardware Key No See Verifying the Hardware Key

present and installed Installation on page 4-29.
correctly?

Yes

No See Verifying Hardware Key ID and

Do the Hardware Key ID
and Game Theme ID Game Theme Information on page 4-35.
match?
Yes

Yes
Is the red light lit on
the Hardware Key?

No

Install the Hardware Key on the other Yes

Does the Game boot up
USB port for CPU-NXT.
successfully?
or
Install the Hardware Key and
No
Adaptor Board on (J17) for CPU-NXT2.
Power cycle the Game.

Contact the Customer Product

Support Center to report the issue.

End

16-020832
5-4 Chapter 5: Maintenance

Troubleshooting Perform the following procedure if the Game does not boot up, and the System Halted screen
Hardware Key displays.
Boot up Errors The System Halted screen, Figure 5-4, may display for the following reasons:
 Hardware Key installed in the Game may have an incorrect license.
 Hardware Key Game Theme ID and the Game Theme ID do not match.
 Hardware Key has not been installed in the Game, or is installed incorrectly.
 Hardware Key is faulty.
 USB port is not working.

Figure 5-4 System Halted screen.

1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Note the Reason code highlighted on the System Halted screen, Figure 5-4 (A).
3 Verify that the correct Game theme is installed, see Verifying Hardware Key ID and Game
Theme Information on page 5-15 for step-by-step instructions.
4 If the correct Game theme is installed, and the System Halted screen displays, proceed to the
appropriate procedure in Table 5-1 depending on which CPU is installed in the game:
Table 5-1 Hardware Key Machine Fault Error Decision Table.
If the game has a ... Proceed to ...
CPU-3.2X Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-3.2X Board on page 5-6.
CPU-NXT3.2 Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT3.2 Board on page 5-7.
CPU-NXT2 Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT2 Board on page 5-9.
CPU-NXT or non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board
and Non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT Board on page 5-11.
CPU-NXT with a protective cover Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board
and Non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT Board for Jurisdictions with the
Protective Cover on page 5-13.

January 2015
 Hardware Key Administration 5-5
Troubleshooting Perform the following procedure if the Machine Fault screen displays the following error message:
Hardware Key Theme Hardware Key check failed.
Machine Fault The Machine Fault screen, Figure 5-5, displays an error message after the boot up sequence for the
Errors following reasons:
 Game theme does not match the current Hardware Key.
 Hardware Key has been tampered with, or swapped.
 Hardware Key has been removed from the Game after the boot up sequence.

Figure 5-5 Machine Fault screen.

1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Note the Reason code highlighted on the Machine Fault screen, Figure 5-5 (A).
3 If the correct Game theme is installed, and the Machine Fault screen displays, proceed to the
appropriate procedure in Table 5-2, depending on which CPU is installed in the Game.
Table 5-2 Hardware Key Machine Fault Error Decision Table.
If the game has a ... Proceed to ...
CPU-3.2X Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-3.2X Board on page 5-6.
CPU-NXT3.2 Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT3.2 Board on page 5-7.
CPU-NXT2 Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT2 Board on page 5-9.
CPU-NXT or non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board
and Non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT Board on page 5-11.
CPU-NXT with a protective cover Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board
and Non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT Board for Jurisdictions with the
Protective Cover on page 5-13.

16-020832
5-6 Chapter 5: Maintenance

Verifying the The following procedures describe how to verify that the Hardware Key is properly installed.
Hardware Key
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-3.2X Board
Installation Complete the following procedure to verify the Hardware Key is installed correctly on the CPU-
3.2X Board.
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Unlock and open the Main Door/Hatch, and unlock and open the CPU Logic Door.
3 Verify that the Hardware Key is installed in one of the four available USB ports on the CPU,
Figure 5-7 (A), ensuring that it is fully seated.
Figure 5-6 Four USB ports on CPU-3.2X.

4 Verify that the Game Theme ID and Hardware Key ID match, see Verifying Hardware Key ID
and Game Theme Information on page 5-15.
5 Verify that the Hardware Key red light is lit. If the light is off, either the Hardware key is faulty, or
the USB port or the adapter board are not working.
6 See Table 5-3 for the appropriate procedure to troubleshoot Hardware Key errors.
Table 5-3 CPU-NXT2 Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the ... Possible Solution(s) Proceed to ...
Hardware Key red light is not lit. Check if the Hardware Key, USB step 7.
port, or Hardware Key Adaptor
Board are faulty.
Hardware Key red light is lit, and the System Verify the Hardware Key ID and Verifying the Game ID Information for
Halted screen displays. the Game Theme ID match. the Hardware Key if the System Halted
Screen Displays on page 5-15.
Hardware Key red light is lit, and the Machine Verify the Hardware Key ID and Obtaining Hardware Key ID Information
Fault screen displays. the Game Theme ID match. if the Machine Fault Screen Displays
on page 5-17.

7 Power OFF the Game.

8 Reseat the Hardware Key.
9 Power On the Game.
10 If the Game continues to display the System Halted screen or the Machine Fault screen,
proceed to step 11.
11 Power OFF the Game.
12 Remove and reinstall the Hardware Key.
13 Power ON the Game.

January 2015
 Hardware Key Administration 5-7
14 See Table 5-4 for the appropriate solution if the game does not boot up.
Table 5-4 Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the ... Possible Solution(s)
Game does not boot up. Verify the correct Hardware Key is being used.
Seat the Hardware Key at a different USB port.
Game does not boot up, and the correct Hardware Key Contact the Product Support Group to report the issue.
is installed,
If the Hardware Key is defective or a new version is needed, see
Game does not boot up, and the Hardware Key license Return Material Authorization on page 4-4. for information
is correct, concerning the return of the Hardware Key.
Game does not boot up, and the System Halted
screen, or the Machine Fault screen displays when the
Game boots up,

Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT3.2 Board

Complete the following procedure to verify the Hardware Key is installed correctly on the CPU-
NXT3.2 Board.
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Unlock and open the Main Door/Hatch, and unlock and open the CPU Logic Door.
3 Verify that the Hardware Key is installed in a USB port (J4 or J5) on the CPU, Figure 5-7 (A),
ensuring that it is fully seated.
Figure 5-7 Hardware Key seated at C5.

4 Verify that the Game Theme ID and Hardware Key ID match, see Verifying Hardware Key ID
and Game Theme Information on page 5-15.
5 Verify that the Hardware Key red light is lit. If the light is off, either the Hardware key is faulty, or
the USB port or the adapter board are not working.
6 See Table 5-5 for the appropriate procedure to troubleshoot Hardware Key errors.
Table 5-5 CPU-NXT2 Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the ... Possible Solution(s) Proceed to ...
Hardware Key red light is not lit. Check if the Hardware Key, USB step 7.
port, or Hardware Key Adaptor
Board are faulty.
Hardware Key red light is lit, and the System Verify the Hardware Key ID and Verifying the Game ID Information for
Halted screen displays. the Game Theme ID match. the Hardware Key if the System Halted
Screen Displays on page 5-15.
Hardware Key red light is lit, and the Machine Verify the Hardware Key ID and Obtaining Hardware Key ID Information
Fault screen displays. the Game Theme ID match. if the Machine Fault Screen Displays
on page 5-17.

7 Power OFF the Game.

8 Reseat the Hardware Key.
9 Power On the Game.
10 If the Game continues to display the System Halted screen or the Machine Fault screen,
proceed to step 11.
11 Power OFF the Game.
12 Remove and reinstall the Hardware Key.

16-020832
5-8 Chapter 5: Maintenance

13 Power ON the Game.

14 See Table 5-6 for the appropriate solution if the game does not boot up.
Table 5-6 Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the ... Possible Solution(s)
Game does not boot up. Verify the correct Hardware Key is being used.
Seat the Hardware Key at the USB port at J16.
Game does not boot up, and the correct Hardware Key Contact the Product Support Group to report the issue.
is installed,
If the Hardware Key is defective or a new version is needed, see
Game does not boot up, and the Hardware Key license Return Material Authorization on page 4-4. for information
is correct, concerning the return of the Hardware Key.
Game does not boot up, and the System Halted
screen, or the Machine Fault screen displays when the
Game boots up,

January 2015
 Hardware Key Administration 5-9
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT2 Board
Complete the following procedure to verify the Hardware Key is installed correctly on the
CPU-NXT2 Board.
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Unlock and open the Main Door/Hatch, and unlock and open the CPU Logic Door.
3 Verify that the Hardware Key Adapter Board (A-024263-00-00), Figure 5-8 (A), is installed onto
J16 on the CPU-NXT2 Board next to the Hard Drive, Figure 5-8 (B).
Figure 5-8 J16 - Location of the Hardware Key on the CPU-NXT2 Board.

A B

4 Verify that the white plastic mounting post, Figure 5-9 (A), on the Hardware Key Adapter Board
points the towards the hard drive, Figure 5-9 (B).
Figure 5-9 Hardware Key Adapter.

5 Verify that the Game Theme ID and Hardware Key ID match, see Verifying Hardware Key ID
and Game Theme Information on page 5-15.
6 Verify that the Hardware Key red light is lit. If the light is off, either the Hardware key is faulty, or
the USB port or the adapter board are not working.

16-020832
5-10 Chapter 5: Maintenance

7 See Table 5-7 for the appropriate procedure to troubleshoot Hardware Key errors.
Table 5-7 CPU-NXT2 Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the Hardware Key red light ... Possible Solution(s) Proceed to ...
is not lit. Check if the Hardware Key, USB step 8.
port, or Hardware Key Adaptor
Board are faulty.
is lit, and the System Halted screen Verify the Hardware Key ID and Verifying the Game ID Information for the
displays. the Game Theme ID match. Hardware Key if the System Halted Screen
Displays on page 5-15.
is lit, and the Machine Fault screen Verify the Hardware Key ID and Obtaining Hardware Key ID Information if the
displays. the Game Theme ID match. Machine Fault Screen Displays on page 5-17.

8 Power OFF the Game.

9 Reseat the Hardware Key.
10 Power ON the Game.
11 If the Game continues to display the System Halted screen or the Machine Fault screen,
proceed to step 12.
12 Power OFF the Game.
13 Reinstall the Hardware Key and the Adapter Board in the J17 location on the CPU-NXT2
board, Figure 5-10.
Figure 5-10 J17 Location on CPU-NXT2.

14 Power ON the Game.

15 See Table 5-8 for the appropriate solution if the game does not boot up.
Table 5-8 Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the game does not boot up ... Possible Solution(s) Proceed to ...
and the correct Hardware Key is Contact the Product Support If the Hardware Key is defective or a new
installed, Group to report the issue. version is needed, see Return Material
Authorization on page 4-4. for information
and the Hardware Key license is concerning the return of the Hardware Key.
correct,
and the System Halted screen, or the
Machine Fault screen displays when
the Game boots up,

January 2015
 Hardware Key Administration 5-11
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board and Non-RoHS-
Compliant CPU-NXT Board
Complete the following procedure to verify that the Hardware Key is installed correctly on the
CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant board, and the non-RoHS-Compliant CPU-NXT board.
NOTE: The CPU-NXT enclosure is shown with the Logic Door off for clarity.
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Unlock and open the Main Door/Hatch.
3 Verify that the Hardware Key is installed in the USB Port, Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Hardware Key location on CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant board.

Figure 5-12 shows the Hardware Key installed onto the Non-RoHS CPU-NXT Board USB
Port.
Figure 5-12 Hardware Key location on CPU-NXT non-RoHS-Compliant board.

16-020832
5-12 Chapter 5: Maintenance

4 See Table 5-9 for the appropriate procedure to troubleshoot Hardware Key errors.
Table 5-9 CPU-NXT Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the Hardware Key red light ... Possible Solution(s) Proceed to ...
is not lit. Check if the Hardware Key or USB step 5 on page 5-12.
port are faulty.
is lit, and the System Halted screen Verify the Hardware Key and the Verifying the Game ID Information for the
displays. Game Compact Flashcard have the Hardware Key if the System Halted
same Game theme ID. Screen Displays on page 5-15.

is lit, and the Machine Fault screen Verify the Hardware Key and the Obtaining Hardware Key ID Information if
displays. Game Compact Flashcard have the the Machine Fault Screen Displays on
same Game theme ID. page 5-17.

5 Power OFF the game.

6 Reseat the Hardware Key.
7 Power ON the game.
Table 5-10 Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the ... then ...
Game boots up, the error is addressed.
Game does not boot up, proceed to step 8.

8 Power OFF the game.

9 Reinstall the Hardware Key in the other USB port on the CPU-NXT RoHS or Non-RoHS board.
10 Power ON the game.
11 See Table 5-11 for the appropriate solution if the game does not boot up.
Table 5-11 Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the game does not boot up ... Possible Solution(s) Proceed to ...
and the correct Hardware Key is contact the Product Support Group If the Hardware Key is defective or a new
installed, to report the issue. version is needed, see Return Material
Authorization on page 4-4. for information
and the Hardware Key license is concerning the return of the Hardware Key.
correct,
and the System Halted screen, or the
Machine Fault screen displays when
the Game boots up,

January 2015
 Hardware Key Administration 5-13
Verifying the Hardware Key for a CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant Board and Non-RoHS-
Compliant CPU-NXT Board for Jurisdictions with the Protective Cover
Perform the following procedure if the CPU-NXT RoHS and non-RoHS board is in a jurisdiction
that requires the Hardware Key Protective Cover be installed.
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Unlock and open the game Main Door.
Figure 5-13 (A) shows the Hardware Key Protective Cover installed on the CPU-NXT RoHS-
Compliant board, and the Hardware Key Protective Cover installed on the CPU-NXT non-
RoHS Enclosure, Figure 5-13 (B).
Figure 5-13 CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant board (left) and CPU-NXT non-RoHS-Compliant board (right).

B
A

3 See Table 5-12 for the appropriate procedure to troubleshoot Hardware Key errors.
Table 5-12 Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the Hardware Key red light ... Possible Solution(s) Proceed to ...
is not lit. Check if the Hardware Key or USB step 4 on page 5-13.
port are faulty.
is lit, and the System Halted screen Verify the Hardware Key and the Verifying the Game ID Information for the
displays, game Compact Flashcard have the Hardware Key if the System Halted Screen
same game theme ID. Displays on page 5-15.
is lit, and the Machine Fault screen Verify the Hardware Key and the Obtaining Hardware Key ID Information if
displays, game Compact Flashcard have the the Machine Fault Screen Displays on
same game theme ID. page 5-17.

4 Power OFF the game.

5 On the inside of the CPU Enclosure, use a 1/4-inch Drive ratchet, with a 1/4-inch Drive, 3-inch
extension, and a 5/16-inch socket to remove the Hardware Key Protective Cover from the CPU
faceplate, Figure 5-14 (A). Remove the Hardware Key Protective Cover.
Figure 5-14 Location of hex nuts securing Hardware Key Protective Cover.

6 Reseat the Hardware Key.

7 Power ON the game.

16-020832
5-14 Chapter 5: Maintenance

8 Check if the red light on the Hardware Key is lit. If the red light on the Hardware Key is lit,
proceed to step 13. If the game continues to display the System Halted screen or the Machine
Fault screen when the game boots up, proceed to step 9.
9 Power OFF the game.
10 Reinstall the Hardware Key in the other USB port.
11 Power ON the game.
12 Check if the red light on the Hardware Key is lit. If the red light on the Hardware Key is lit,
proceed to step 13. If the game continues to display the System Halted screen or the Machine
Fault screen when the game boots up, proceed to step 16.
13 Reinstall the Hardware Key Protective Cover by using a 1/4-inch Drive ratchet, with a 1/4-inch
Drive 3-inch extension, and a 5/16-inch socket to reinstall the two 5/16-inch hex nuts and the
screws (that were removed in step 5) that secure the Hardware Key Protective Cover to the
CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant faceplate, Figure 5-15 (A), and the CPU-NXT non-RoHS-
Compliant faceplate, Figure 5-15 (B).
Figure 5-15 CPU-NXT RoHS-Compliant board (top), and CPU-NXT non-RoHS-Compliant board (bottom).

14 Close and lock the Logic Door.

15 Power ON the game.
16 See Table 5-13 for the appropriate solution if the game does not boot up.
Table 5-13 Hardware Key Error Decision Table.
If the game does not boot up ... Possible Solution(s) Proceed to ...
and the correct Hardware Key is contact the Product Support Group If the Hardware Key is defective or a new
installed, to report the issue. version is needed, see Return Material
Authorization on page 4-4. for information
and the Hardware Key license is concerning the return of the Hardware Key.
correct,
and the System Halted screen, or the
Machine Fault screen displays when
the Game boots up,

January 2015
 Hardware Key Administration 5-15
Verifying Hardware Complete the following procedure to verify the Hardware Key and game theme identification if the
Key ID and Game System Halted screen or the Machine Fault screen display.
Theme Information Verifying the Game ID Information for the Hardware Key if the System Halted Screen
Displays
Complete the following procedure to verify the game identification information for the Hardware
Key if the System Halted screen displays, Figure 5-16.
Figure 5-16 System Halted screen.

1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Unlock and open the game Main Door.
3 Power OFF the game.
4 Unlock and open the Logic Door.
5 RAM clear the game.
6 Remove the game CompactFlash Card.
7 Boot up the machine with only the OS CompactFlash Card inserted.

16-020832
5-16 Chapter 5: Maintenance

8 Depending on the OS version in use, access either the DRM Information screen or the System
Information screen for information on the Hardware Key:
If using OS then. . .
NSOS-000-4021 or from the Administration Menu select Diagnostics | Machine Info | DRM Information.
later The DRM Information screen displays, Figure 5-17.
OS versions prior to from the Administration Menu select Diagnostics | Machine Info | System Information.
NSOS-000-4021 The System Information Screen displays, Figure 5-18.

Figure 5-17 DRM Information screen.

Figure 5-18 System Information screen.

A B

9 Note the Hardware Key unique serial ID, Figure 5-17 (A) and Figure 5-18 (A), and the game
theme identification, Figure 5-18 (B). A Network Gaming Hardware Key displays Network
Gaming in the Hardware Key field.

January 2015
 Hardware Key Administration 5-17
Obtaining Hardware Key ID Information if the Machine Fault Screen Displays
Complete the following procedure to view the Hardware Key identification information on the
System Information screen if the Machine Fault screen displays, Figure 5-19.
Figure 5-19 Machine Fault screen.

1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Unlock and open the game Main Door.
3 Power OFF the game.
4 Unlock and open the Logic Door.
5 RAM clear the game.
6 Remove the game CompactFlash Card.
7 Boot up the machine with only the OS CompactFlash Card inserted.

16-020832
5-18 Chapter 5: Maintenance

8 Depending on the OS version in use, access either the DRM Information screen or the System
Information screen for information on the Hardware Key:
If using OS then. . .
NSOS-000-4021 or from the Administration Menu select Diagnostics | Machine Info | DRM Information.
later The DRM Information screen displays, Figure 5-20.
OS versions prior to from the Administration Menu select Diagnostics | Machine Info | System Information.
NSOS-000-4021 The System Information Screen displays, Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-20 DRM Information screen.

Figure 5-21 System Information screen.

A B

9 Note the Hardware Key unique serial ID, Figure 5-20 (A) and Figure 5-21 (A), and the game
theme identification, Figure 5-21 (B). A Network Gaming Hardware Key displays Network
Gaming in the Hardware Key field.

January 2015
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives 5-19

Progressive This section details maintenance tasks associated with the administration of scaling progressive
Liability games, including:
Transfer for  Transferring Progressive Liability
Scaling  Reconciling Current Progressive Amounts
Progressives
 Viewing the Progressive Event History Log
Data Recovery For traditional or non-scaling standalone progressives (SAPs), WMS requires that the operator
reconstruct progressive liability by using video surveillance footage to determine the current
progressive amounts from the top box or In-Game Meter.
The difference in data recovery procedures for scaling progressives and standard progressives is
that you cannot use the Electronic Video Surveillance to view the amount of the jackpots in the
event of a crash. The Progressive Accounting screen only displays the amount for the current
wager, so all of the values are not displayed.
When to Perform a For a scaling progressive, a portion of a wager is contributed to a Progressive Pool. The total
Transfer of Liability increment of a Progressive Pool that is over the base amount is called the Progressive Liability. The
Progressive Liability must be paid to the players, and must not be kept by operators as a profit.
NOTE: It is illegal for operators to retain the Progressive Liability Amount as profit. Any amount of
money that has been accrued in the jackpots must be accounted for by the operator and transferred
back to the player.
In the event of Game failure, or if the game requires a RAM clear, operators are required to
determine the amount of the progressive liability on the machine, and transfer it to another
progressive jackpot that has odds that are better or the same as the original jackpot.
There are three different scenarios discussed in this document for the transfer of liability:
 Reinstatement of progressive liability as a result of a machine failure, in which current
progressive values are unavailable, or unable to be retrieved by means of the external
display, or the administration screens.
 Reinstatement of progressive liability, as a result of a machine failure, in which current
progressive values are available or known.
 Transfer of progressive liability to or from a scaling progressive theme.

Configuration Order Perform the configuration of the Super-Multi Progressive in the following order:
NOTE: When Super-Multi Progressive operation is enabled, the max bet, min bet, and bet per line
settings are one-time settable.
1 Touch Screen Calibration.
2 Set up Date and Time.
3 Set up Devices.
4 Set up Machine Info.
5 Set up Game Sound Volume.
6 Set up Credit.
7 Configure Paytables.
8 Enable WMSP and other Host Protocols in the Serial Comm Setup Screen.
9 Configure WMSP in the WMSP Level Setup Screen.
10 Allow the game to load.
11 Configure Max Bets.
12 Allow the game to come into service.

16-020832
 5-20 Chapter 5: Maintenance

Overview of Figure 5-22 displays the steps to transfer liability for a scaling progressive if the progressive values
Transfer of Liability are not known.
When Values are Not Figure 5-22 How to Transfer Liability for a Scaling SAP when values are not known.
Known
Start

If Progressive values are not known:

Access Administration Menu, then select
the Funds Transfer screen.

Record the following information on paper:

or enter directly into the Transfer of Open the Transfer of Liability Spreadsheet
Liability Spreadsheet,
Select the No Access to Prog. Values Tab
Base Amounts for every Pool, including:
- every bet per line
- every level of denom Select the 1 - 5 Jackpot Type on
G+ Transfer of Liability Spreadsheet

Enter the Base Amounts into the

G+ Transfer of Liability Spreadsheet
Base Amounts Fields

Record the Transfer Amounts from the

G+ Transfer of Liability Spreadsheet

Select Add Funds in the

Performing Prog. Funds Transfer screen

Enter the Transfer Amounts for each

Jackpot, (1-5)

End Select Save in the

Performing Prog. Funds Transfer screen

January 2015
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives 5-21
Performing Transfer The following procedure is performed when scaling progressive values cannot be obtained from
of Liability When the administration menus or from the Game display. This situation occurs if there is a Game
Values are Not failure, or if a RAM clear is performed before obtaining the base amounts and current amounts for
Known the Game.

NOTE: This procedure requires the use of the Transfer of Liability Spreadsheet. If necessary,
contact WMS to obtain this spreadsheet.
Scaling progressives have a large number of progressive pools. These progressive pools are not
displayed simultaneously, so a method has been devised to calculate the progressive liability
amount at an estimated level that is higher than the amount could be statistically.
NOTE: Configuration of the game must be completed prior to performing this procedure. Max Bets
and Min Bet Per Line must be configured prior to transferring funds for a Scaling Standalone
Progressive.
1 Observe all appropriate safety and ESD precautions. See Preventing Injury and Damage on
page 3.
2 Unlock and open the Main Door.
3 Perform a RAM clear.
4 Perform the configuration of the Scaling Progressive, see Configuration Order on page 5-19.
5 Press the Diagnostic Switch.
The Administration Menu displays.
6 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | WMSP Setup | Funds Transfer, Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-23 WMSP Setup Menu.

16-020832
5-22 Chapter 5: Maintenance

The Progressive Funds Transfer screen displays, Figure 5-24.

7 Select the Pool to which to transfer funds, Figure 5-24 (A).
Figure 5-24 Progressive Funds Transfer screen

The Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen displays, Figure 5-25.

8 For every pool, record the Base Amounts on paper, (or enter directly into the G+ Transfer of
Liability Spreadsheet for every bet per line), Figure 5-25 (A).
Figure 5-25 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen.

January 2015
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives 5-23
9 Open the Transfer of Liability Spreadsheet, which is attached to this manual.
10 Select the No Access to Prog. Values tab, Figure 5-26 (A).
Figure 5-26 G+ Transfer Liability Super-Multi Prog Spreadsheet - No Access to Progressive Values Tab.

C D

11 Select the Jackpot Type from the Jackpot Type drop-down menu:
Progressive Level, (1 through 5), Figure 5-26 (B).
12 Enter the Base Amount for each Pool in the yellow Base Amount fields, Figure 5-26 (C).
The Transfer Amount fields, (green color), Figure 5-26 (D), automatically populate with the
correct amounts that must be added in the Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen.
13 Record the transfer amounts on paper, or enter directly into the Progressive Funds Transfer
screen.

16-020832
5-24 Chapter 5: Maintenance

14 In the Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen, select the Bet-Per-Line to which to
perform the funds transfer, Figure 5-27 (A).
The green highlighted background indicates the field is selected.
15 Select Add Funds, Figure 5-27 (B).
Figure 5-27 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen.

The Performing Progressive Funds Keypad displays, Figure 5-28.

Figure 5-28 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen - Keypad.

16 Enter the dollar amount to transfer into the Funds Transfer Keypad, Figure 5-28 (A). The dollar
amount is obtained from the Scaling Progressive G+ Transfer Liability Spreadsheet, Transfer
Amount fields.
17 Select Enter to perform the transfer and close the keypad, Figure 5-28 (B).
NOTE: This procedure should be performed for all Scaling SAP Pools shown on the menu.

January 2015
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives 5-25
The amount that you added displays in the Transfer Amount and the Current Amount is updated
to reflect the amount transferred, Figure 5-29 (A).
Figure 5-29 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen.

NOTE: The Add Funds function is active until money is added to the credit meter through any
means, (bill, coin, or external bonus.)
18 Transfer all of the funds for each bet per line.
The Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen displays, Figure 5-30, with the Transfer
Amounts displayed for each active bet per line, Figure 5-30 (A).
Figure 5-30 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen with Transfer Amounts displayed.

19 When you have completed all of the funds transfers, select Save, Figure 5-30 (B).

16-020832
5-26 Chapter 5: Maintenance

After you select Save, the Confirmation Save Request dialog box displays, Figure 5-31.
Figure 5-31 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen - Save Confirmation Dialog.

20 Select Yes to save your changes, Figure 5-31 (A).

The Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box displays one or more of the transfers were not saved,
Figure 5-32.
21 Select Yes, Figure 5-32 (A).
The amounts shown in the Transfer Amount columns are transferred to the Reset Amount
fields.
Figure 5-32 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen - Transfer Confirmation dialog box.

NOTE: An event is posted to the Progressive Event Log any time there is a funds transfer
operation.
22 Remove the ESD wrist strap and store it in a cool and dry location.
23 Close and lock the Main Door.

January 2015
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives 5-27
Overview of Figure 5-33 displays steps to transfer liability for a Super-Multi Stand-Alone Progressive if the
Transfer of Liability progressive values are known.
When Values are Figure 5-33 How to Transfer Liability for a Scaling SAP when values are known.
Known
If progressive values are known:
Start Access the Administration Menu:
Progressive Accounting | Current Amounts screen.

Record the following information on paper:

or enter directly into the Transfer of Liability
Spreadsheet.
Base Amounts and Current Amounts
for every pool including:
- Every level of denom
- Every bet per line

Execute a RAM clear.

Open the Transfer of Liability Spreadsheet

Select the RAM clear with Access tab.

Enter Base Amounts & Current Amounts

into the Transfer of Liability
Spreadsheet.

Record the Transfer Amounts from the

Transfer of Liability Spreadsheet.

Select Add Funds in the

Performing Prog. Funds Transfer screen.

Enter the Transfer Amounts into the

Performing Prog. Funds Transfer screen.

Select Save in the

End Performing Prog. Funds Transfer screen.

16-020832
 5-28 Chapter 5: Maintenance

Performing Transfer The following procedure is performed when scaling progressive values can be obtained from one
of Liability When of the following:
Values are Known  Administration Menus
 Game Display

The base amounts and current amounts for each pool of the game must be obtained prior to
executing a RAM clear. This procedure can also be used to determine the total increment to transfer
to another scaling progressive game.
NOTE: This procedure requires the use of the G+ Transfer of Liability SMPROG Spreadsheet which
is attached to this document, Figure 5-34.
Figure 5-34 Transfer of Liability Spreadsheet.

1 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Protocol Accounting |

Progressive Accounting | Current Amounts, Figure 5-35.
Figure 5-35 Progressive Accounting Menu.

January 2015
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives 5-29
The Current Progressive Amounts screen displays, Figure 5-36.
Figure 5-36 Current Progressive Amounts screen.
A

2 Record the Current Amounts and Base Amounts for each Pool on paper, or enter directly
into the G+ Transfer of Liability SMPROG Spreadsheet, Figure 5-36 (A).
3 Select Next and Prev to scroll through the screen if there are additional pools.
4 Select Exit to close the Current Progressive Amounts screen, and return to the Administration
Menu.
5 Open the G+ Transfer of Liability SMPROG spreadsheet which is attached to this document,
and select the tab RAM clear with Access, Figure 5-37.
Figure 5-37 G+ Transfer of Liability SMPROG Spreadsheet - RAM clear with Access to Values Tab.

B
A

6 Enter the base and current amounts that were recorded from the Current Amounts screen for
Progressive Levels 1 through 5, into the cells with the yellow color, marked Base Amounts
and Current Amounts, Figure 5-37 (A).

The Transfer Amount fields, (green color), Figure 5-37 (B), automatically populate with the
correct transfer amounts.
7 Record the Transfer Amounts on paper, or enter directly into the Performing Progressive Funds
Transfer screen.

16-020832
5-30 Chapter 5: Maintenance

8 From the Administration Menu, select Setup | WMSP Setup | Funds Transfer, Figure 5-38.
Figure 5-38 WMSP Setup Menu.

The Progressive Funds Transfer screen displays, Figure 5-39.

Figure 5-39 Progressive Funds Transfer screen

9 Select the Pool to transfer funds, Figure 5-39 (A).

January 2015
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives 5-31
The Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen displays, Figure 5-40.
Figure 5-40 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen.
A

10 In the Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen, select the Bet Per Line to which to
perform the funds transfer, Figure 5-40 (A).
The green highlighted background indicates the field is selected.
11 Select Add Funds, Figure 5-40 (B).
The Performing Progressive Funds Keypad displays, Figure 5-41.
Figure 5-41 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen - keypad.

12 Enter the dollar amount to transfer into the keypad, Figure 5-41 (A). The dollar amount is
obtained from the G+ Transfer of Liability SMPROG spreadsheet, Transfer Amount fields.
13 Select Enter to perform the transfer and close the keypad, Figure 5-41 (B).
NOTE: This procedure should be performed for all scaling progressive Pools shown on the
menu.

16-020832
5-32 Chapter 5: Maintenance

The amount that you added displays in the Transfer Amount fields, and the Current Amount field
is updated to reflect the amounts transferred in the Performing Progressive Funds Transfer
screen, Figure 5-42 (A).
Figure 5-42 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen.

NOTE: The Add Funds function is active until the first game of the coin test is played. After the
first game is played, no additional funds may be added. The Remove Funds function is currently
not functional in the Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen. Funds cannot be removed
once they are transferred.
14 Transfer all of the funds for each Bets Per Line.
The Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen displays with all of the Transfer Amounts
displayed in the Transfer Amount fields for each Bets Per Line, Figure 5-43 (A).
Figure 5-43 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen with Transfer Amounts displayed.

15 After all of the Funds Transfers are completed, select Save, Figure 5-43 (B).

January 2015
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives 5-33
The Save Confirmation dialog box displays, Figure 5-44.
Figure 5-44 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen - Save Confirmation dialog box.

16 Select Yes to save the changes, Figure 5-44 (A).

The Transfer Confirmation dialog box displays if Exit was selected without saving,
Figure 5-45.
Figure 5-45 Performing Progressive Funds Transfer screen - Transfer Confirmation dialog box.

17 Select Yes, Figure 5-45 (A), to save the transfers and exit.
When Yes is selected, the amounts shown in the Transfer Amount columns are transferred to
the Reset Amount fields.
NOTE: An event is posted to the Progressive Event Log any time there is a funds transfer operation.

16-020832
 5-34 Chapter 5: Maintenance

Flow Chart for The following procedure provides steps for you to reconcile the current amount for each pool for a
Reconciling Current scaling progressive.
Amounts Figure 5-46 displays the steps to reconcile the current amounts for a scaling progressive.
Figure 5-46 How to Reconcile Current Amounts for a Scaling SAP.

Start

Access Administration Menu

Progressive Accounting screen
&
Current Amounts screen
Obtain Reconciliation Spreadsheet,

Record the following information on paper: Enter amounts into

Reconciliation Spreadsheet.
Coin-In Contribution Rate

Total Coin-In

Times Hit
Ensure that the Variance fields in the
Reconciliation Spreadsheet are set to Zero.
Total Pay Outs

Base Amounts

Current Amounts End

January 2015
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives 5-35
Reconciling Current Complete the following procedure to reconcile the current amount for each pool for a scaling
Amounts progressive.
NOTE: This procedure requires the use of the Super-Multi Reconciliation spreadsheet, (SMProg
Reconciliation.xlsx), which is attached to this manual.
Figure 5-47 Scaling progressive Reconciliation Spreadsheet.

1 From the Admin Menu, select Accounting | Protocol Accounting |

Progressive Accounting | Progressive Master, Figure 5-48.
Figure 5-48 Progressive Accounting Menu.

16-020832
5-36 Chapter 5: Maintenance

The Progressive Accounting screen displays, Figure 5-49.

Figure 5-49 Progressive Accounting screen.

A
B

The list box in the top left corner of the Progressive Accounting screen displays each Pool, and
the Bet Per Lines that are associated with each Pool, Figure 5-49 (A). When a Pool is selected
in the list box, the Progressive Accounting screen displays the paytable that corresponds to the
Pool in the main portion of the Progressive Accounting screen, Figure 5-49 (B).
2 Select only the Bet Per Lines from the drop-down list box, Figure 5-49 (A), that are associated
with each Pool that you are reconciling. Record the following for each Bet Per Line on paper, or
enter directly into the G+ Reconciliation Spreadsheet, in step 9:
 Total Coin-In Since Last Jackpot
 Coin-In Contribution Rate
 Times Hit
 Total Coin-In
 Total Payouts
 Base Amount
These amounts are used to reconcile the current amount of each Pool. Perform this step for all
of the Pools shown on the menu.
3 Select Exit to restart.

January 2015
 Progressive Liability Transfer for Scaling Progressives 5-37
4 From the Administration Menu, select Accounting | Protocol Accounting |
Progressive Accounting | Current Amounts, Figure 5-50.
Figure 5-50 Progressive Accounting Menu.

The Current Progressive Amounts screen displays, Figure 5-51.

Figure 5-51 Current Progressive Amounts screen.

5 Record the Current and Base Amounts for each Pool that you need to reconcile, or enter the
amounts directly into the Super-Multi Reconciliation Spreadsheet, as in step 9.
6 Select Next and Prev to scroll through the screen.
7 Select Exit to close the Current Progressive Amounts screen, and return to the Administration
Menu.

16-020832
5-38 Chapter 5: Maintenance

8 Open the Reconciliation spreadsheet which is attached to this document, Figure 5-52.
Figure 5-52 Super-Multi Reconciliation Spreadsheet.

9 Enter the amounts that you recorded for each corresponding field into the cells with the gray
color, Figure 5-52 (A). After entering the information in the fields of the Super-Multi
Reconciliation Spreadsheet, verify that the Variance fields are all zero, indicating that the
amounts are reconciled.

January 2015